b Easergy Sepam series 80 operation manual, reference SEPED303003EN b Sepam DNP3 communication user's manual, reference SEPED305001EN.
Electrical network protection. User's manual. 01/2021. Sepam series 20 ... b Easergy Sepam series 80 Modbus communication user's manual, reference ...
Sepam user manual The communication interfaces must be installed and connected in accordance with the instructions in the Installation chapter of this manual.
Electrical network protection
Sepam series 20
User's manual 01/2021
Safety instructions
0
Safety symbols and messages
1
Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before trying to install, operate, service or maintain it. The following special messages may appear throughout this bulletin or on the equipment to warn
of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a
procedure.
ANSI symbol. IEC symbol.
Risk of electric shock
The addition of either symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label indicates that an electrical hazard exists, which will result in personal injury if the instructions are not followed.
Safety alert
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death.
Safety messages
DANGER
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, can
result in minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to physical injury.
Important notes
Restricted liability
Electrical equipment should be serviced and maintained only by qualified personnel. No responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this manual. This document is not intended as an instruction manual for untrained persons.
Device operation
The user is responsible for checking that the rated characteristics of the device are suitable for its application. The user is responsible for reading and following the device's operating and installation instructions before attempting to commission or maintain it. Failure to follow these instructions can affect device operation and constitute a hazard for people and property.
Protective grounding
The user is responsible for compliance with all the existing international and national electrical codes concerning protective grounding of any device.
CRED301005EN
Sepam series 20
General contents
Introduction
1
Metering functions
2
Protection functions
3
Control and monitoring functions
4
Modbus communication
5
Installation
6
Use
7
PCRED301005EN
1
Sepam series 20
General contents
Introduction
7
Selection guide by application
8
Protection functions suitable for low voltage
10
Presentation
12
Selection table
13
Technical characteristics
14
Environmental characteristics
15
Metering functions
17
General settings
18
Characteristics
19
Phase current
Residual current
20
Average current and peak demand currents
21
Phase-to-phase voltage
Phase-to-neutral voltage
22
Residual voltage
Positive sequence voltage
23
Frequency
Temperature
24
Network diagnosis functions
25
Tripping current
Negative sequence / unbalance
25
Disturbance recording
26
Machine operation assistance functions 27
Running hours counter and operating time
Thermal capacity used
27
Operating time before tripping
Waiting time after tripping
28
Starting current and
starting / overload time
29
Number of starts before inhibition
Start inhibit time delay
30
Switchgear diagnosis functions
31
Cumulative breaking current and number of operations 31
Operating time
Charging time
32
2
CRED301005EN
Sepam series 20
General contents
Protection functions
33
Setting ranges
34
Phase-to-phase undervoltage
36
Positive sequence undervoltage and phase rotation
direction check
37
Remanent undervoltage
38
Phase-to-neutral undervoltage
39
Phase undercurrent
40
Temperature monitoring
41
Negative sequence / unbalance
42
Excessive starting time, locked rotor
44
Thermal overload
45
Phase overcurrent
54
Phase overcurrent Cold Load Pick-Up/Blocking
56
Breaker failure
58
Earth fault
60
Earth fault Cold Load Pick-Up/Blocking
62
Phase-to-phase overvoltage
64
Neutral voltage displacement
65
Starts per hour
66
Recloser
67
Overfrequency
69
Underfrequency
70
Rate of change of frequency
71
General
72
Control and monitoring functions
79
Description
80
Definition of symbols
81
Assignment of logic inputs / outputs
82
Circuit breaker / contactor control
83
Logic discrimination
87
Disturbance recording triggering
89
Switching of groups of settings
90
Indications
91
Control matrix
93
Self-tests and fail-safe position
94
PCRED301005EN
3
Sepam series 20
General contents
Modbus communication
Presentation Modbus protocol Configuring the communication interfaces Commissioning and diagnosis Data addresses and encoding Time-tagging of events Access to remote settings Disturbance recording Reading Sepam identification
101
102 103 104 106 108 117 122 132 134
Installation
135
Safety and Cyber-security instructions
136
Precautions
137
Equipment identification
138
Base unit
141
1 A/5 A current transformers
154
Voltage transformers
156
LPCT type current sensors
157
CSH120, CSH200, CSH300 Core balance CTs
160
CSH30 interposing ring CT
162
ACE990 Core balance CT interface
164
MES114 modules
166
Optional remote modules
169
MET148-2 Temperature sensor module
170
DSM303 Remote advanced UMI module
174
Communication accessory selection guide
176
Connection of communication interfaces
177
ACE949-2 2-wire RS 485 network interface
178
ACE959 4-wire RS 485 network interface
179
ACE937 fiber optic interface
180
ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2 Multi-protocol interfaces 181
ACE909-2 RS 232/RS 485 converter
186
ACE919CA and ACE919CC RS 485/RS 485 converters 188
ECI850 IEC 61850 Sepam server
190
4
CRED301005EN
Sepam series 20
General contents
Use
User Machine Interfaces SFT2841 setting and operating software UMI on front panel Advanced UMI Default parameter setting
Commissioning
Commissioning: principles and method Testing and metering equipment required General examination and preliminary actions Checking parameter and protection settings Checking phase current input connections Checking the residual current input connection Checking phase voltage input connections Checking the residual voltage input connection Checking logic input and output connections Validation of the complete protection chain Checking optional module connections Test sheet Maintenance Firmware modifications
195
196 197 206 207 213
215
215 216 217 218 219 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 230
PCRED301005EN
5
6
CRED301005EN
Introduction
Contents
Selection guide by application Protection functions suitable for low voltage Presentation Selection table Technical characteristics Environmental characteristics
8
1 10
12 13 14 15
PCRED301005EN
7
Sepam range
Selection guide by application
The selection guide by application suggests Sepam type(s) suitable for your protection requirements, based on your application
characteristics. The most typical applications are presented along with the associated Sepam type.
1
Each application example is described:
Series 20 b By a single-line diagram specifying:
v the device to be protected
v the network configuration
v the position of the metering
Series 40
sensors b By the standard and specific
Sepam functions to be implemented
to protect the application concerned.
Protections
Current Voltage Frequency Specific
Applications
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Breaker failure
Disconnection (ROCOF)
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Directional earth fault
Directional Directional earth fault and earth fault phase
Characteristics
Logic inputs/ outputs
Inputs Outputs
Temperature sensors
Channel
Current
Voltage
LPCT (1)
Communication ports
Control
Matrix (2)
Logic equation editor
Logipam (3)
Other
Memory cartridge with settings
Backup battery
0 to 10 4 to 8 0 to 8 3I + I0 -- Yes 1 to 2 Yes -- -- --
--
0 to 10 4 to 8 0 to 8 -- 3V + V0 -- 1 to 2 Yes -- -- --
--
0 to 10 4 to 8 0 to 16 3I + I0 3V Yes 1 to 2 Yes Yes -- --
--
(1) LPCT: Low-Power Current Transducer conforming to standard IEC 60044-8. (2) Control matrix used for simple assignment of data from the protection, control and monitoring functions. (3) Logipam: Ladder language PC programming environment for extended use of Sepam series 80 functions.
(4) S5X applications are identical to S4X applications with the following additional functions: b earth fault and phase overcurrent cold load pick-up b broken conductor detection b fault locator (5) T5X applications are identical to T4X applications with the following additional functions: b earth fault and phase overcurrent cold load pick-up b broken conductor detection
8
CRED301005EN
Sepam range
Selection guide by application
Series 60
The list of protection functions is given for information only.
Direct earthing or impedance earthing have been represented by the same pictogram, i.e. by a direct earthing system.
Series 80
11
M
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Directional earth fault
Directional earth fault and phase
Directional earth fault
Directional earth fault and phase
Disconnect Transformer
ion
or machine-
(ROCOF) transformer
unit
differential
Machine differential
Busbar voltage and frequency protection
Capacitor bank unbalance
0 to 28 4 to 16 0 to 16 3I + I0 3V, 2U + V0 or Vnt Yes 1 to 2 Yes Yes Yes
0 to 42 5 to 23 0 to 16 3I + 2 x I0 3V + V0 Yes 2 to 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes
0 to 42 5 to 23 0 to 16 2 x 3I + 2 x I0 3V + V0 Yes 2 to 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes
0 to 42 5 to 23 0 to 16 3I + I0 2 x 3V + 2 x V0 Yes 2 to 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes
0 to 42 5 to 23 0 to 16 2 x 3I + 2 x I0 3V + V0 Yes 2 to 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
All the information relating to the Sepam range can be found in the following documents: b Sepam catalog, reference SEPED303005EN b Sepam series 20 user's manual, reference PCRED301005EN b Sepam series 40 user's manual, reference PCRED301006EN b Easergy Sepam series 60 user's manual, reference SEPED310017EN b Easergy Sepam series 80 functions user's manual, reference SEPED303001EN b Easergy Sepam series 80 Modbus communication user's manual, reference SEPED303002EN
b Easergy Sepam series 80 operation manual, reference SEPED303003EN b Sepam DNP3 communication user's manual, reference SEPED305001EN b Sepam IEC 60870-5-103 communication user's manual, reference SEPED305002EN b Sepam IEC 61850 communication user's manual, reference SEPED306024EN
PCRED301005EN
9
Sepam range
1
Protection functions suitable for low voltage
Low voltage earthing systems
There are 4 low voltage (LV) earthing systems designated by a 2 or 3-letter acronym: b TN-S b TN-C b TT b IT
The letters making up the acronym have the following meanings:
Letter
Meaning
First letter
Transformer neutral point
I
Earthed with an impedance
T
Directly earthed
Second letter
Electrical exposed conductive parts of the consumer
T
Earthed
N
Connected to the neutral conductor
Third letter (optional) Protective Earth conductor
S
Separate N neutral conductor and PE Protective Earth conductor
C
Combined N neutral conductor and PE Protective Earth conductor
(PEN)
10
CRED301005EN
Sepam range
Protection functions suitable for low voltage
Compatibility of Sepam low voltage protection functions
Sepam protection functions can be used with low voltage (LV) as long as the conditions below are met: b The distribution circuit must be rated higher than 32 A. b The installation must comply with standard IEC 60364. For additional information about the compatibility of Sepam protection functions with low voltage, please contact Schneider Electric technical support.
The table below lists the Sepam protection functions suitable for low voltage according to the earthing system used. Sepam protection functions not listed in this table are not suitable for low voltage. The protection functions listed in this table are available according to the Sepam type.
Protection
ANSI
Earthing system
Comments
code
Phase overcurrent Earth fault/Sensitive earth fault Earth fault/Sensitive earth fault Negative sequence/unbalance Thermal overload for cables/capacitor/ transformer/motor/generic Restricted earth fault Two-winding transformer differential Directional phase overcurrent
50/51 50N/51N 50G/51G 46 49RMS
64REF 87T 67
TN-S TN-C TT
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b (4)
IT
b
(1)
(3)
b b
(3)
b b (4)
Neutral conductor not protected
Threshold to be adapted to the phase unbalance Neutral conductor not protected
Directional earth fault
67N/67NC
Incompatible with LV diagrams (4-wire)
Directional active overpower
32P
b
b
(2)
(2)
Directional reactive overpower
32Q
b
b
(2)
(2)
Undervoltage (L-L or L-N)
27
b
b
b
b
Remanent undervoltage
27R
b
b
b
b
Overvoltage (L-L or L-N)
59
b
b
b
b
Neutral voltage displacement
59N
b
b
(4)
(4)
Residual voltage not available with 2 VTs
Negative sequence overvoltage
47
b
b
b
b
Overfrequency
81H
b
b
b
b
Underfrequency
81L
b
b
b
b
Rate of change of frequency
81R
b
b
b
b
Synchro-check
25
b
b
b
b
b : Protection function suitable for low voltage (according to Sepam)
(1) Not recommended even on the second fault.
(2) 2-wattmeter method not suitable for unbalanced loads.
(3) Residual current too low in IT.
(4) 2 phase-to-phase VTs.
11
PCRED301005EN
11
Introduction
Presentation
PE80226
PE50593
PE80315
1
Sepam: a modular solution.
Sepam with basic UMI and with fixed advanced UMI.
Example of an SFT2841 software screen.
12
The Sepam series 20 family of protection and metering units is designed for the operation of machines and electrical distribution networks of industrial installations and utility substations for all levels of voltage. The Sepam series 20 family consists of simple, high-performing solutions, suited to demanding applications that call for current and voltage metering.
Sepam series 20 selection guide by application
Selection criteria
Series 20
Metering
I
I
U
Specific protection functions
Breaker failure
Applications
Substation
S20
S24
Transformer
T20
T24
Motor
M20
Busbar
B21
U Disconnection (ROCOF)
B22
Main functions
Protection b Overcurrent and earth fault protection with adjustable time reset and with switching from on setting group to the other controlled by a logic order b Earth fault protection insensitivity to transformer switching b Detection of phase unbalance b RMS thermal protection which takes into account external operating temperature and ventilation operating rates b Rate of change of frequency protection (ROCOF), for a fast and reliable disconnection.
Communication Sepam can be connected to a supervision communication network (S-LAN) based on the following communication protocols: b Modbus RTU b DNP3 b IEC 60870-5-103 b IEC 61850 All the data needed for centralized equipment management from a remote monitoring and control system are available via the communication port: b reading: all measurements, alarms, protection settings,... b writing: breaking device remote control orders,...
Diagnosis 3 types of diagnosis data for improved operation: b network and machine diagnosis: tripping current, unbalance ratio, disturbance recording b switchgear diagnosis: cumulative breaking current, operating time b diagnosis of the protection unit and additional modules: continuous self-testing, watchdog.
Control and monitoring Circuit breaker program logic ready to use, requiring no auxiliary relays or additional wiring.
User Machine Interface
2 levels of User Machine Interface (UMI) are available according to the user's needs: b basic UMI: an economical solution for installations that do not require local operation (run via a remote monitoring and control system) b fixed or remote advanced UMI: a graphic LCD display and 9-key keypad are used to display the measurement and diagnosis values, alarm and operating messages and provide access to protection and parameter setting values, for installations that are operated locally.
Setting and operating software
The SFT2841 PC software tool gives access to all the Sepam functions, with all the facilities and convenience provided by a Windows type environment.
CRED301005EN
Introduction
Selection table
Substation
Transformer
Motor Busbar
Protections
Phase overcurrent
ANSI code S20 S24(4) T20
50/51
4
4
4
T24(4) M20
4
4
B21 (3) B22
1
Phase Overcurrent Cold Load Pick-Up
CLPU 50/51
1
1
Earth fault, sensitive earth fault
50N/51N
4
4
4
4
4
50G/51G
Earth Fault Cold Load Pick-Up
CLPU 50N/51N
1
1
Breaker failure
50BF
1
1
Negative sequence/unbalance
46
1
1
1
1
1
Thermal overload
49RMS
2
2
2
Phase undercurrent
37
1
Locked rotor, excessive starting time
48/51LR/14
1
Starts per hour
66
1
Positive sequence undervoltage
27D/47
2
2
Remanent undervoltage
27R
1
1
Phase-to-phase undervoltage
27
2
2
Phase-to-neutral undervoltage
27S
1
1
Phase-to-phase overvoltage
59
2
2
Neutral voltage displacement
59N
2
2
Overfrequency
81H
1
1
Underfrequency
81L
2
2
Rate of change of frequency
81R
1
Recloser (4 cycles)
79
v
v
Thermostat/Buchholz
26/63
v
v
Temperature monitoring
38/49T
v
v
v
(8 sensors, 2 set points per sensor)
Metering
Phase current I1, I2, I3 RMS, residual current I0
b
b
b
b
b
Demand current I1, I2, I3, peak demand current IM1, IM2, IM3
b
b
b
b
b
Voltage U21, U32, U13, V1, V2, V3, residual voltage V0
Positive sequence voltage Vd/rotation direction
Frequency Temperature
v
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
Network and machine diagnosis
Tripping current TripI1, TripI2, TripI3, TripI0 Unbalance ratio/negative-sequence current Ii Disturbance recording Thermal capacity used Remaining operating time before overload tripping Waiting time after overload tripping Running hours counter/operating time Starting current and time Start inhibit time, number of starts before inhibition
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Switchgear diagnosis
Cumulative breaking current Trip circuit supervision Number of operations, operating time, charging time
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Control and monitoring
ANSI code
Circuit breaker/contactor control (1) Latching/acknowledgment Logic discrimination Switching of groups of settings Inhibition of protection 50N/51N by an input Annunciation
94/69 86 68
30
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
v
v
v
v
v
b (2)
b (2)
b (2)
b (2)
b (2)
v
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Additional modules
8 temperature sensor inputs - MET148-2 module
v
v
v
1 low level analog output - MSA141 module
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Logic inputs/outputs -
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
MES114/MES114E/MES114F module (10I/4O)
Communication interface -
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
ACE949-2, ACE959, ACE937, ACE969TP-2 or ACE969FO-2
b Standard, v according to parameter setting and MES114/MES114E/MES114F or MET148-2 input/output module options
(1) For shunt trip unit or undervoltage trip unit
(2) Exclusive choice between logic discrimination and switching from one 2-relay group of settings to another 2-relay group
(3) Performs Sepam B20 functions
(4) Applications S24 and T24 perform the functions of applications S23 and T23 respectively and, in addition, the phase overcurrent and earth fault cold load
pick-up functions.
PCRED301005EN
13
Introduction
Technical characteristics
Weight
Minimum weight (Sepam with basic UMI and without MES114) 1.2 kg (2.6 lb)
1
Maximum weight (Sepam with advanced UMI and MES114)
Analog inputs
1.7 kg (3.7 lb)
Current transformer
Input impedance
< 0.02
1 A or 5 A CT (with CCA630 or CCA634)
Consumption
< 0.02 VA at 1 A
1 A to 6250 A ratings
< 0.5 VA at 5 A
Rated thermal withstand
4 In
1-second overload
100 In (500 A)
Voltage transformer
Input impedance
> 100 k
220 V to 250 kV ratings
Input voltage
100 to 230/3 V
Rated thermal withstand
240 V
1-second overload
480 V
Temperature sensor input (MET148-2 module)
Type of sensor
Pt 100
Ni 100/120
Isolation from earth
None
None
Current injected in sensor
4 mA
4 mA
Maximum distance between sensor and module
1 km (0.62 mi)
Logic inputs
MES114 MES114E
MES114F
Voltage
24 to 250 V DC 110 to 125 V DC 110 V AC
220 to 250 V DC 220 to 240 V AC
Range
19.2 to 275 V DC 88 to 150 V DC 88 to 132 V AC 176 to 275 V DC 176 to 264 V AC
Frequency
-
-
47 to 63 Hz
-
47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption
3 mA
3 mA
3 mA
3 mA
3 mA
Typical switching threshold Input limit voltage
At state 1 At state 0
14 V DC u 19 V DC y 6 V DC
82 V DC u 88 V DC y 75 V DC
58 V AC u 88 V AC y 22 V AC
154 V DC u 176 V DC y 137 V DC
120 V AC u 176 V AC y 48 V AC
Isolation of inputs in relation to other isolated groups
Enhanced
Enhanced
Enhanced
Enhanced
Enhanced
Relay outputs
Control relay outputs (O1, O2, O3, O11 contacts) (1)
Voltage
DC
24/48 V DC
127 V DC
220 V DC
250 V DC
-
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz)
-
-
-
-
100 to 240 V AC
Continuous current
8 A
8 A
8 A
8 A
8 A
Breaking capacity
Resistive load
8 A / 4 A
0.7 A
0.3 A
0.2 A
-
L/R load < 20
6 A / 2 A
0.5 A
0.2 A
-
-
L/R load < 40 ms
4 A / 1 A
0.2 A
0.1 A
-
-
Resistive load
-
-
-
-
8 A
p.f. load > 0.3
-
-
-
-
5 A
Making capacity
< 15 A for 200 ms
Isolation of outputs from other isolated groups
Enhanced
Annunciation relay output (O4, O12, O13, O14 contacts)
Voltage
DC
24/48 V DC
127 V DC
220 V DC
250 V DC
-
AC (47.5 to 63 Hz)
-
-
-
-
100 to 240 V AC
Continuous current
2 A
2 A
2 A
2 A
2 A
Breaking capacity
Resistive load
2 A / 1 A
0.6 A
0.3 A
0.2 A
-
L/R load < 20 ms
2 A / 1 A
0.5 A
0.15 A
-
-
p.f. load > 0.3
-
-
-
-
1 A
Isolation of outputs from other isolated groups
Enhanced
Power supply
Voltage
24/250 V DC
110/240 V AC
Range
-20% +10%
-20% +10% (47.5 to 63 Hz)
Deactivated consumption (2) Maximum consumption (2)
< 4.5 W < 8 W
< 9 VA < 15 VA
Inrush current
< 10 A for 10 ms < 28 A for 100 µs
< 15 A for first half-period
Acceptable ripple content
12 %
-
Acceptable momentary outages
10 ms
10 ms
Analog output (MSA141 module)
Current
4 - 20 mA, 0 - 20 mA, 0 - 10 mA, 0 - 1 mA
Load impedance
< 600 (including wiring)
Accuracy
0.50% full scale or 0.01 mA
(1) Relay outputs (O1, O2, O11 contact) comply with clause 6.7 of standard C37.90, (30 A, 200 ms, 2000 operations) (2) According to configuration.
14
CRED301005EN
Sepam series 40
Environmental characteristics
Electromagnetic compatibility
Emission tests
Disturbing field emission
Conducted disturbance emission
Immunity tests -- Radiated disturbances
Immunity to radiated fields
Electrostatic discharge
Immunity to magnetic fields at network frequency
Immunity tests -- Conducted disturbances
Immunity to conducted RF disturbances Immunity to conducted disturbances in common mode from 0 Hz to 150 kHz Fast transient bursts
1 MHz damped oscillating wave
100 kHz damped oscillating wave Slow damped oscillating wave (10 kHz to 100 Mhz) Surges Voltage interruptions
Mechanical robustness
In operation
Vibrations
Shocks Earthquakes
De-energized
Vibrations Shocks Jolts
Standard
CISPR 22 EN 55022 CISPR 22 EN 55022
IEC 60255-22-3 IEC 61000-4-3 ANSI C37.90.2 IEC 60255-22-2 ANSI C37.90.3 IEC 61000-4-8
IEC 60000-4-6 IEC 61000-4-16
IEC 60255-22-4 IEC 61000-4-4 ANSI C37.90.1 IEC 60255-22-1 ANSI C37.90.1 IEC 61000-4-12 IEC 61000-4-18 IEC 61000-4-5 IEC 60255-11
Standard
IEC 60255-21-1 IEC 60068-2-6 IEC 60068-2-64 IEC 60255-21-2 IEC 60255-21-3
IEC 60255-21-1 IEC 60255-21-2 IEC 60255-21-2
Level / Class
A B
III
IV
III A or B IV III
III
Level / Class
2 Fc 2M1 2 2
2 2 2
Value
1
10 V/m ; 80 MHz - 1 GHz 10 V/m ; 80 MHz - 2 GHz 20 V/m ; 80 MHz - 1 GHz 8 kV air ; 6 kV contact 8 kV air ; 4 kV contact 30 A/m (continuous) - 300 A/m (13 s)
10 V
4 kV ; 2.5 kHz / 2 kV ; 5 kHz 4 kV ; 5 kHz 4 kV ; 2.5 kHz 2.5 kV MC ; 1 kV MD 2.5 kV MC and MD 2 kV MC
2 kV MC ; 1 kV MD Series 20: 100 %, 10 ms Series 40: 100 %, 20 ms
Value
1 Gn ; 10 Hz - 150 Hz 3 Hz - 13.2 Hz ; a = ±1 mm (±0.039 in)
10 Gn / 11 ms 2 Gn (horizontal axes) 1 Gn (vertical axes)
2 Gn ; 10 Hz - 150 Hz 30 Gn / 11 ms 20 Gn / 16 ms
PCRED301005EN
15
Installation
Environmental characteristics
Climatic withstand
During operation
1
Exposure to cold Exposure to dry heat
Continuous exposure to damp heat
Salt mist
Influence of corrosion/2-gas test
Influence of corrosion/4-gas test
In storage (1)
Temperature variation with specified variation rate Exposure to cold Exposure to dry heat Continuous exposure to damp heat
Safety
Enclosure safety tests
Front panel tightness
Fire withstand
Electrical safety tests
1.2/50 µs impulse wave Power frequency dielectric withstand
Certification
UL CSA
Standard
IEC 60068-2-1 IEC 60068-2-2 IEC 60068-2-78 IEC 60068-2-52 IEC 60068-2-60
IEC 60068-2-60
EIA 364-65A
IEC 60068-2-14 IEC 60068-2-1 IEC 60068-2-2 IEC 60068-2-78 IEC 60068-2-30
Standard
IEC 60529 NEMA IEC 60695-2-11
IEC 60255-5 IEC 60255-5 ANSI C37.90
Level/Class Value
Ad Bd Cab Kb/2 Method 1
Method 4
IIIA
-25°C (-13°F)
+70°C (+158°F)
10 days; 93% RH; 40°C (104°F)
3 days
21 days; 75% RH; 25°C (77°F); 0.1 ppm H2S; 0.5 ppm SO2 21 days; 70% RH; 25°C (77°F); 0.01 ppm H2S; 0.2 ppm SO2; 0.2 ppm NO2; 0.01 ppm Cl2 42 days ; 75% RH ; 30 °C (86 °F) ; 0.1 ppm H2S ; 0.2 ppm SO2 ; 0.2 ppm NO2 ; 0.02 ppm Cl2
Nb
Ab Bb Cab Db
Level/Class
-25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F) 5°C/min
-25°C (-13°F) +70°C (+158°F) 56 days; 93% RH; 40°C (104°F) 6 days; 95% RH; 55°C (131°F)
Value
IP52 Type 12
Other panels IP20 650°C (1200°F) with glow wire
5 kV (2) 2 kV 1min (3)
1 kV 1 min (annunciation output) 1.5 kV 1 min (control output)
IEC60255-26 harmonized standard
European directives: EMC European Directive CEM 2014/30/EU
Low Voltage European Directive 2014/35/EU
UL508-CSA C22.2 no. 14-95
File E212533
CSA C22.2 no. 14-95/no. 0.17-00
File 210625
(1) Sepam must be stored in its original packaging. (2) Except for communication: 3 kV in common mode and 1 kV in differential mode. (3) Except for communication: 1 kVrms.
(4) See the appendix in "Installation and operation" manual SEPED303003EN, "Functional Safety" section
16
SEPED301005EN
Metering functions
Contents
General settings
18
Characteristics
19
Phase current
Residual current
20
Average current and peak demand currents
21
Phase-to-phase voltage Phase-to-neutral voltage
Residual voltage Positive sequence voltage
2 22
23
Frequency
Temperature
24
Tripping current
Negative sequence / unbalance
25
Disturbance recording
26
Running hours counter and operating time
Thermal capacity used
27
Operating time before tripping
Waiting time after tripping
28
Starting current and starting / overload time
29
Number of starts before inhibition
Start inhibit time delay
30
Cumulative breaking current and number of operations 31
Operating time
Charging time
32
PCRED301005EN
17
Metering functions
General settings
The general settings define the characteristics of the measurement sensors connected to Sepam and determine the performance of the metering and protection functions used. They are accessed via the SFT2841 setting software General Characteristics tab.
Nota : You must use an interface ACE990 with a core balance CT other than a CSH120, a CSH200 or a CSH300, even if this core balance CT has the same transformation ratio than a CSH120, CSH200 or a CSH300.
General settings
2 In
Rated phase current (sensor primary current)
Ib
Base current, according to rated
power of equipment (2)
In0
Rated residual current
Selection
2 or 3 CT 1 A / 5 A 3 LPCTs
Sum of 3 phase currents
Setting range
1 A to 6250 A 25 A to 3150 A (1) 0.2 In to 1.3 In
See In rated phase current
CSH120, CSH200, CSH300 core balance CT 2A, 5 A or 20 A rating
1 A/5 A CT
1 A to 6250 A (In0 = In)
1 A/5 A CT Sensitivity x 10
0.1 A to 625 A (In0 = In/10)
ACE990 + core balance CT other than CSH120, CSH200 or CSH300 the core balance CT ratio 1/n must be such that 50 y n y 1500)
According to current monitored and use of ACE990
Unp
Rated primary phase-to-phase voltage
(Vnp: rated primary phase-to-neutral voltage
Vnp = Unp/3)
220 V to 250 kV
Uns
Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage
3 VTs: V1, V2, V3
90 V to 230 V in steps of 1 V
2 VTs: U21, U32
90 V to 120 V in steps of 1 V
1 VT: V1
90 V to 120 V in steps of 1 V
Uns0
Secondary zero sequence voltage for primary zero sequence voltage Unp/3
Uns/3 or Uns/3
Rated frequency
50 Hz or 60 Hz
Integration period (for demand current and peak demand current and power)
5, 10, 15, 30, 60 mn
Pulse-type accumulated energy meter
Increments active energy
0.1 kW.h to 5 MW.h
Increments reactive energy
0.1 kvar.h to 5 Mvar.h
(1) In values for LPCT, in Amps: 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000, 1600, 2000, 3150.
(2) Even if the value is within the range, it has to be rounded according to the setting step of 1 or 10A (i.e.: Ib = 12.2A 13A).
18
PCRED301005EN
Metering functions
Characteristics
Functions
Measurement
Accuracy (1)
MSA141 Saving
range
Metering
Phase current Residual current
0.1 to 40 In (2)
±1 %
b
Calculated 0.1 to 40 In
±1 %
b
Measured 0.1 to 20 In0
±1 %
b
Demand current Peak demand current Phase-to-phase voltage Phase-to-neutral voltage Residual voltage
0.1 to 40 In 0.1 to 40 In 0.05 to 1.2 Unp 0.05 to 1.2 Vnp 0.015 to 3 Vnp
±1 % ±1 % ±1 % ±1 % ±1 %
v
b b
2
Positive sequence voltage Frequency Sepam series 20 Temperature
0.05 to 1.2 Vnp
50 ±5 Hz or 60 ±5 Hz
-30 to +200 °C or -22 to +392 °F
±5 %
±0.05 Hz
b
±1 °C from +20 to +140 °C b
Network diagnosis assistance
Phase tripping current
0.1 to 40 In
±5 %
v
Earth fault tripping current
0.1 to 20 In0
±5 %
v
Negative sequence / unbalance
10 to 500 % of Ib
±2 %
Disturbance recording
Machine operating assistance
Thermal capacity used
0 to 800 % (100 % for I phase = Ib)
±1 %
b
v
Remaining operating time before overload tripping
0 to 999 mn
±1 mn
Waiting time after overload tripping
0 to 999 mn
±1 mn
Running hours counter / operating time
0 to 65535 hours
±1 % or ±0.5 h
v
Starting current
0.5 Ib to 24 In
±5 %
v
Starting time
0 to 300 s
±300 ms
v
Number of starts before inhibition
0 to 60
1
Start inhibit time
0 to 360 mn
±1 mn
Switchgear diagnosis assistance
Cumulative breaking current
0 to 65535 kA²
±10 %
v
Number of operations
0 to 4.109
1
v
Operating time
20 to 100 ms
±1 ms
v
Charging time
1 to 20 s
±0.5 s
v
b available on MSA141 analog output module, according to setup. v saved in the event of auxiliary supply outage.
(1) Typical accuracy, see details on subsequent pages.
(2) Measurement up to 0.02 In for information purpose.
PCRED301005EN
19
Metering functions
2
Phase current Residual current
Phase current
Operation
This function gives the RMS value of the phase currents: b I1: phase 1 current b I2: phase 2 current b I3: phase 3 current. It is based on RMS current measurement and takes into account harmonics up to number 17.
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via: b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software b the communication link b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.
Characteristics
Measurement range Unit Accuracy
Display format (3) Resolution Refresh interval (1) In rated current set in the general settings. (2) At In, in reference conditions (IEC 60255-6). (3) Display of values: 0.02 to 40 In.
0.1 to 1.5 In (1)
A or kA typically ±1 % (2) ±2 % from 0.3 to 1.5 In ±5 % if < 0.3 In
3 significant digits
0.1 A or 1 digit
1 second (typical)
Residual current
Operation
This operation gives the RMS value of the residual current I0. It is based on measurement of the fundamental component.
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via: b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software b the communication link b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.
Characteristics
Measurement range
Connection to 3 phase CT: Connection to 1 CT Connection to core balance CT with ACE990
0.1 to 1.5 In0 (1) 0.1 to 1.5 In0 (1) 0.1 to 1.5 In0 (1)
Connection to CSH residual current sensor
2 A rating
0.2 to 3 A
20 A rating
2 to 30 A
Unit
A or kA
Accuracy (2)
typically ±1 % at In0
±2 % from 0.3 to 1.5 In0
±5 % if < 0.3 In0
Display format
3 significant digits
Resolution
0.1 A or 1 digit
(1) In0 rated current set in the general settings. (2) in reference conditions (IEC 60255-6), excluding sensor accuracy.
20
CRED301005EN
Metering functions
Average current and peak demand currents
Operation
This function gives: b the average RMS current for each phase that has been obtained for each integration interval b the greatest average RMS current value for each phase that has been obtained since the last reset. The values are refreshed after each "integration interval", an interval that may be set from 5 to 60 mn.
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
2
b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Resetting to zero:
b press the clear key on the display when a peak demand current is displayed b via the clear command in the SFT2841 software b via the communication link (remote control order TC6).
Characteristics
Measurement range Unit Accuracy
Display format (3) Resolution Integration interval (1) In rated current set in the general settings. (2) at In, in reference conditions (IEC 60255-6). (3) Display of values: 0.02 to 40 In.
0.1 to 1.5 In (1)
A or kA typically ±1 % (2) ±2 % from 0.3 to 1.5 In ±5 % if < 0.3 In
3 significant digits
0.1 A or 1 digit
5, 10, 15, 30, 60 minutes
TS/TC equivalence for each protocol
Modbus DNP3
IEC 60870-5-103
TC
Binary Output ASDU, FUN, INF
TC6
BO12
-
IEC 61850
LN.DO.DA MSTA.RsMax.ctlVal
PCRED301005EN
21
Metering functions
2
Phase-to-phase voltage Phase-to-neutral voltage
Phase-to-phase voltage
Operation
This function gives the RMS value of the 50 or 60 Hz component of phase-to-phase voltages (according to voltage sensor connections): b U21: voltage between phases 2 and 1 b U32: voltage between phases 3 and 2 b U13: voltage between phases 1 and 3. It is based on measurement of the fundamental component.
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via: b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software b the communication link b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.
Characteristics
Measurement range Unit Accuracy (2)
Display format Resolution Refresh interval (1) Un nominal rating set in the general settings. (2) at Un, in reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
0.05 to 1.2 Unp (1) V or kV ±1 % from 0.5 to 1.2 Unp ±2 % from 0,05 to 0.5 Unp 3 significant digits 1 V or 1 digit 1 second (typical)
Phase-to-neutral voltage
Operation
This function gives the RMS value of the 50 or 60 Hz component of phase-to-neutral voltages: b V1: phase 1 phase-to-neutral voltage b V2: phase 2 phase-to-neutral voltage b V3: phase 3 phase-to-neutral voltage. It is based on measurement of the fundamental component.
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via: b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software b the communication link b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.
Characteristics
Measurement range
0.05 to 1.2 Vnp (1)
Unit
V or kV
Accuracy (2)
±1 % from 0.5 to 1.2 Vnp ±2 % from 0.05 to 0.5 Vnp
Display format
3 significant digits
Resolution
1 V or 1 digit
Refresh interval
1 second (typical)
(1) Vnp: primary rated phase-to-neutral voltage (Vnp = Unp/3).
(2) at Vnp in reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
22
CRED301005EN
Metering functions
Residual voltage Positive sequence voltage
Residual voltage
Operation
This function gives the value of the residual voltage V0 = (V1 + V2 + V3). V0 is measured: b by taking the internal sum of the 3 phase voltages b by an open star / delta VT. It is based on measurement of the fundamental component.
Readout
The measurement may be accessed via:
b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the
key
2
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range
0.015 Vnp to 3 Vnp (1)
Unit
V or kV
Accuracy
±1 % from 0.5 to 3 Vnp ±2 % from 0.05 to 0.5 Vnp ±5 % from 0.015 to 0.05 Vnp
Display format
3 significant digits
Resolution
1 V or 1 digit
Refresh interval
1 second (typical)
(1) Vnp: primary rated phase-to-neutral voltage (Vnp = Unp/3).
Positive sequence voltage
Operation
This function gives the calculated value of the positive sequence voltage Vd.
Readout
The measurement may be accessed via: b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range
0.05 to 1.2 Vnp (1)
Unit
V or kV
Accuracy
±2 % at Vnp
Display format
3 significant digits
Resolution
1 V or 1 digit
Refresh interval
1 second (typical)
(1) Vnp: primary rated phase-to-neutral voltage (Vnp = Unp/3).
PCRED301005EN
23
Metering functions
2
Frequency Temperature
Frequency
Operation
This function gives the frequency value. Frequency is measured via the following: b based on U21, if only one phase-to-phase voltage is connected to the Sepam b based on positive sequence voltage, if the Sepam includes U21 and U32 measurements. Frequency is not measured if: b the voltage U21 or positive sequence voltage Vd is less than 40 % of Un b the frequency is outside the measurement range.
Readout
The measurement may be accessed via: b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software b the communication link b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.
Characteristics
Rated frequency
Range
50 Hz
60 Hz
Accuracy (1)
Display format
Resolution
Refresh interval
(1) At Un in reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
50 Hz, 60 Hz 45 Hz to 55 Hz 55 Hz to 65 Hz ±0.05 Hz 3 significant digits 0.01 Hz or 1 digit 1 second (typical)
Temperature
Operation
This function gives the temperature value measured by resistance temperature detectors (RTDs): b platinum Pt100 (100 at 0 °C or 32 °F) in accordance with the IEC 60751 and DIN 43760 standards b nickel 100 or 120 (at 0 °C or 32 °F). Each RTD channel gives one measurement: b tx = RTD x temperature. The function also indicates RTD faults: b RTD disconnected (tx > 205 °C or 401 °F) b RTD shorted (tx < -35 °C or -31 °F). In the event of a fault, display of the value is inhibited. The associated monitoring function generates a maintenance alarm.
Readout
The measurement may be accessed via:
b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the
key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link
b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.
Characteristics
Range
Accuracy
Resolution Refresh interval
-30 °C to +200 °C or -22 °F to +392 °F
±2 °C ±1 °C from +20 to +140 °C
1 °C or 1 °F
5 seconds (typical)
Accuracy derating according to wiring: see chapter "installation of MET148-2 module" page 170.
24
CRED301005EN
MT10252
Network diagnosis functions
Tripping current Negative sequence / unbalance
I
TRIP 1
tripping order
30 ms
T0
t
Tripping current
Operation
This function gives the RMS value of currents at the prospective time of the last trip: b TRIP1: phase 1 current b TRIP2: phase 2 current b TRIP3: phase 3 current b TRIPI0: residual current.
It is based on measurement of the fundamental component.
This measurement is defined as the maximum RMS value measured during a 30 ms interval after the activation of the tripping contact on output O1.
2
The tripping currents are not saved in the event of a power failure.
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via: b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range Residual current Unit Accuracy Display format Resolution (1) In/In0 rated current set in the general settings.
phase current 0.1 to 40 In (1) 0.1 to 20 In0 (1) A or kA ±5 % ±1 digit 3 significant digits 0.1 A or 1 digit
Negative sequence / unbalance
Operation
This function gives the negative sequence component: T = Ii/Ib The negative sequence current is determined based on the phase currents: b 3 phases
Ii = 13-- × (I1 + a2I2 + aI3)
with
a
=
j
e
2--3----
b 2 phases
Ii = ---1--- × I1 a2I3 3
with
a
=
j
e
2--3----
These 2 formulas are equivalent when there is no earth fault.
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via: b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range Unit Accuracy Display format Resolution Refresh interval
10 to 500 % Ib ±2 % 3 significant digits 1 % 1 second (typical)
PCRED301005EN
25
Network diagnosis functions
2
MT10181
Disturbance recording
Operation
This function is used to record analog signal and logical states. Record storage is activated according to parameter setting by a triggering event (see Control and monitoring functions - Disturbance recording triggering). The stored event begins before the triggering event and continues afterwards. The record comprises the following information: b values sampled from the different signals b date b characteristics of the recorded channels. The files are recorded in FIFO (First In First Out) type shift storage: the oldest record is erased when a new record is triggered. Transfer Files may be transferred locally or remotely: b locally: using a PC which is connected to the pocket terminal connector and has the SFT2841 software tool b remotely: using a software tool specific to the remote monitoring and control system. Recovery The signals are recovered from a record by means of the SFT2826 software tool.
Principle
stored record
time
triggering event (1)
Characteristics
Record duration
x periods before the triggering event (1) total 86 periods
Record content
Set-up file: date, channel characteristics, measuring transformer ratio Sample file: 12 values per period/recorded signal
Analog signals recorded (2)
4 current channels (I1, I2, I3, I0) or 4 voltage channels (V1, V2, V3)
Logical signals
10 digital inputs, outputs O1, pick-up
Number of stored records
2
File format
COMTRADE 97
(1) According to parameter setting with the SFT2841 (default setting 36 cycles). (2) According to sensor type and connection.
26
CRED301005EN
Machine operation assistance functions
Running hours counter and operating time Thermal capacity used
Running hours counter / operating time
The counter gives the running total of time during which the protected device (motor or transformer) has been operating (I > 0.1Ib). The initial counter value may be modified using the SFT2841 software. The counter is saved every 4 hours.
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software b the communication link.
2
Characteristics
Range Unit
0 to 65535 hours
Thermal capacity used
Operation
The thermal capacity used is calculated by the thermal protection function. The thermal capacity used is related to the load. The thermal capacity used measurement is given as a percentage of the rated thermal capacity.
Saving of thermal capacity used
When the protection unit trips, the current thermal capacity used increased by 10 % (1) is saved. The saved value is reset to 0 when the thermal capacity used has decreased sufficiently for the start inhibit time delay to be zero. The saved value is used again after a Sepam power outage, making it possible to start over with the temperature buildup that caused the trip.
(1) The 10 % increase is used to take into account the average temperature buildup of motors when starting.
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via: b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software b the communication link b an analog converter with the MSA141 option.
Characteristics
Measurement range Unit Display format Resolution Refresh interval
0 to 800 % % 3 significant digits 1 % 1 second (typical)
PCRED301005EN
27
Machine operation assistance functions
Operating time before tripping Waiting time after tripping
Remaining operating time before overload tripping
Operation
The time is calculated by the thermal protection function. It depends on the thermal capacity used.
Readout
2
The measurements may be accessed via: b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range Unit Display format Resolution Refresh interval
0 to 999 mn mn 3 significant digits 1 mn 1 second (typical)
Waiting time after overload tripping
Operation
The time is calculated by the thermal protection function. It depends on the thermal capacity used.
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via: b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range Unit Display format Resolution Refresh period
0 to 999 mn mn 3 significant digits 1 mn 1 second (typical)
28
CRED301005EN
DE80237
Machine operation assistance functions
Starting current and starting / overload time
Operation
The starting time is defined as follows: b If the locked rotor/excessive starting time protection (ANSI code 48/51LR) is
active, the starting time is the time separating the moment when one of the 3 phase
currents exceeds Is and the moment when the 3 currents drop back below Is, Is being
the value of the current set point for protection function 48/51LR. The minimum value
of set point Is is 0.5 lb. b If the locked rotor/excessive starting time protection (ANSI code 48/51LR) is not
active, the starting time is the time separating the moment when one of the 3 phase currents exceeds 1.2 Ib and the moment when the 3 currents drop back below 1.2 Ib. The maximum phase current obtained during this time corresponds to the starting
2
current.
Both values are saved in the event of a power failure. or Is
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via: b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software b the communication link.
Characteristics
Starting / overload time
Measurement range Unit Display format Resolution Refresh interval
Starting / overload current
Measurement range
Unit Display format Resolution Refresh interval (1) Or 65.5 kA.
0 to 300 s s or ms 3 significant digits 10 ms or 1 digit 1 second (typical)
48/51LR active 48/51LR inactive
Is to 24 In (1) 1.2 Ib to 24 In (1) A or kA 3 significant digits 0.1 A or 1 digit 1 second (typical)
PCRED301005EN
29
Machine operation assistance functions
Number of starts before inhibition Start inhibit time delay
Number of starts before inhibition
Operation
The number of starts allowed before inhbition is calculated by the number of starts protection function (ANSI code 66). The number of starts depends on the thermal state of the motor.
Readout
This measurement may be accessed via:
2
b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
Resetting to zero
The number of starts counters may be reset to zero as follows, after the entry of a password: b on the advanced UMI display unit by pressing the clear key b on the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software.
Characteristics
Measurement range Unit Display format Resolution Refresh interval
0 to 60 none 3 significant digits 1 1 second (typical)
Start inhibit time delay
Operation
The start inhibit time only applies to the M20 motor application. It depends on both the starts per hour protection (ANSI code 66) and the machine thermal overload protection (ANSI code 49RMS) if they have been activated. This time expresses the waiting time until another start is allowed.
If at least one of these functions starts up, a "START INHIBIT" message informs the user that starting the motor is not allowed.
Readout
The number of starts and waiting time may be accessed via: b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software b the communication link.
Characteristics
Measurement range Unit Display format Resolution Refresh interval
0 to 360 mn mn 3 significant digits 1 mn 1 second (typical)
30
CRED301005EN
Switchgear diagnosis functions
Cumulative breaking current and number of operations
Cumulative breaking current
Operation
This function indicates the cumulative breaking current in square kiloamperes (kA)2
for five current ranges.
It is based on measurement of the fundamental component.
The current ranges displayed are:
b 0 < I < 2 In
b 2 In < I < 5 In
b 5 In < I < 10 In b 10 In < I < 40 In
2
b I > 40 In.
The function also provides the total number of operations and the cumulative total of
breaking current in (kA)².
Each value is saved in the event of a power failure.
Refer to switchgear documentation for use of this information.
Number of operation
The function is activated by tripping commands (O1 relay). This value is saved in the event of a power failure.
Readout
The measurements may be accessed via:
b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the
key
b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
The initial values may be introduced using the SFT2841 software tool to take into
account the real state of a used breaking device.
Characteristics
Breaking current (kA)2 Range Unit Accuracy (1) Number of operations Range (1) At In, in reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
0 to 65535 (kA)2 primary (kA)2 ±10 %
0 to 65535
PCRED301005EN
31
Switchgear diagnosis functions
Operating time Charging time
Operating time
Operation
This function gives the value of the opening operating time of a breaking device (1) and change of status of the device open position contact connected to the I11 input (2). The function is inhibited when the input is set for AC voltage (3). The value is saved in the event of a power failure.
Readout
2
The measurement may be accessed via: b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software
b the communication link.
(1) Refer to switchgear documentation for use of this information. (2) Optional MES module.
(3) Optional MES114E or MES114F modules.
Characteristics
Measurement range Unit Accuracy Display format
20 to 100 ms typically ±1 ms 3 significant digits
Charging time
Operation
This function gives the value of the breaking device (1) operating mechanism charging time, determined according to the device closed position status change contact and the end of charging contact connected to the Sepam I12 and I24 (2). The value is saved in the event of a power failure.
Readout
The measurement may be accessed via: b the display of a Sepam with advanced UMI by pressing the key b the display of a PC with the SFT2841 software b the communication link.
(1) Refer to switchgear documentation for use of this information. (2) Optional MES114 or MES114E or MES114F modules.
Characteristics
Measurement range Unit Accuracy Display format
1 to 20 s ±0.5 sec 3 significant digits
32
CRED301005EN
Protection functions
Contents
PCRED301005EN
Setting ranges
Phase-to-phase undervoltage ANSI code 27
Positive sequence undervoltage and phase rotation direction check ANSI code 27D/47
Remanent undervoltage ANSI code 27R
Phase-to-neutral undervoltage ANSI code 27S
Phase undercurrent ANSI code 37
Temperature monitoring ANSI code 38/49T
Negative sequence / unbalance ANSI code 46
Excessive starting time, locked rotor ANSI code 48/51LR/14
Thermal overload ANSI code 49RMS
Phase overcurrent ANSI code 50/51
Phase overcurrent Cold Load Pick-Up/Blocking CLPU 50/51
Breaker failure ANSI code 50BF
Earth fault ANSI code 50N/51N or 50G/51G
Earth fault Cold Load Pick-Up/Blocking CLPU 50N/51N
Phase-to-phase overvoltage ANSI code 59
Neutral voltage displacement ANSI code 59N
Starts per hour ANSI code 66
Recloser ANSI code 79
Overfrequency ANSI code 81H
Underfrequency ANSI code 81L
Rate of change of frequency ANSI code 81R
General Tripping curves
34 36
37 38 39 40
3 41
42 44 45 54 56 58 60 62 64 65 66 67 69 70 71 72
33
Protection functions
Setting ranges
Functions
Settings
Time delays
ANSI 27 - Phase-to-phase undervoltage
5 to 120 % of Unp
0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 27D/47 - Positive sequence undervoltage
5 to 60 % of Unp
0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 27R - Remanent undervoltage
5 to 100 % of Unp
0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 27S - Phase-to-neutral undervoltage
5 to 120 % of Vnp
0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 37 - Phase undercurrent
0.15 to 1 Ib
0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 38/49T - Temperature monitoring (8 or 16 RTDs)
Alarm and trip set points
0 to 180 °C (or 32 to 356 °F)
ANSI 46 - Negative sequence / unbalance
Definite time
0.1 to 5 Ib
3
IDMT
0.1 to 0.5 Ib
ANSI 48/51LR/14 - Excessive starting time, locked rotor
0.5 Ib to 5 Ib
ST starting time
0.1 s to 300 s 0.1 s to 1 s
0.5 s to 300 s
LT and LTS time delays
0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload
Rate 1
Rate 2
Accounting for negative sequence component
0 - 2,25 - 4,5 - 9
Time constant
Heating
T1: 1 to 120 mn
T1: 1 to 120 mn
Cooling
T2: 5 to 600 mn
T2: 5 to 600 mn
Alarm and tripping set points
50 to 300 % of rated thermal capacity
Cold curve modification factor
0 to 100 %
Switching of thermal settings conditions
By logic input I26 (transformer)
By Is set point adjustable from 0.25 to 8 Ib (motor)
Maximum equipment temperature
60 to 200 °C (140 °F to 392 °F)
ANSI 50/51 - Phase overcurrent
Tripping time delay
Timer hold
Tripping curve
Definite time
DT
SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1)
DT
RI
DT
IEC: SIT/A, LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C
DT or IDMT
IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F)
DT or IDMT
IAC: I, VI, EI
DT or IDMT
Is set point
0.1 to 24 In
Definite time
Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.1 to 2.4 In
IDMT
0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is
Timer hold
Definite time (DT ; timer hold)
Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s
IDMT (IDMT ; reset time)
0.5 s to 20 s
Short circuit current Isc min
In to 999 kA
CLPU 50/51 - Phase Overcurrent Cold Load Pick-Up/Blocking
Time before activation Tcold
0.1 to 300 s
Pick-up threshold CLPUs
10 to 100% of In
Global action CLPU 50/51
Blocking or multiplication of the set point
Action on unit x ANSI 50/51
OFF or ON
Time delay T/x
100 ms to 999 min
Multiplying factor M/x
100 to 999% of Is
ANSI 50BF - Breaker failure
Presence of current
0.2 to 2 In
Operating time
0.05 to 300 s
(1) Tripping as of 1.2 Is.
34
CRED301005EN
Protection functions
Setting ranges
Functions
Settings
Time delays
ANSI 50N/51N or 50G/51G - Earth fault / Sensitive earth fault
Tripping time delay
Timer hold
Tripping curve
Definite time
DT
SIT, LTI, VIT, EIT, UIT (1)
DT
RI
DT
IEC: SIT/A,LTI/B, VIT/B, EIT/C
DT or IDMT
IEEE: MI (D), VI (E), EI (F)
DT or IDMT
IAC: I, VI, EI
DT or IDMT
Is0 set point
0.1 to 15 In0
Definite time
Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s
0.1 to 1 In0
IDMT
0.1 s to 12.5 s at 10 Is0
Timer hold
Definite time (DT ; timer hold)
Inst ; 0.05 s to 300 s
IDMT (IDMT ; reset time)
0.5 s to 20 s
CLPU 50N/51N - Earth Fault Cold Load Pick-Up/Blocking
Time before activation Tcold
0.1 to 300 s
Pick-up threshold CLPUs Global action CLPU 50N/51N
10 to 100% of In Blocking or multiplication of the set point
3
Action on unit x ANSI 50N/51N
OFF or ON
Time delay T0/x
100 ms to 999 min
Multiplying factor M0/x
100 to 999% of Is0
ANSI 59 - Overvoltage phase-to-phase
50 to 150% of Unp (or Vnp) if Uns < 208 V 50 to 135% of Unp (or Vnp) if Uns u 208 V
0.05 s to 300 s 0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 59N - Neutral voltage displacement
2 to 80 % of Unp
0.05 s to 300 s
ANSI 66 - Starts per hour
Starts per period
1 to 60
Period
1 to 6 hr
Consecutive starts
1 to 60
Time between starts
0 to 90 mn
ANSI 81H - Overfrequency
50 to 53 Hz or 60 to 63 Hz
0.1 s to 300 s
ANSI 81L - Underfrequency
45 to 50 Hz or 55 to 60 Hz
0.1 s to 300 s
ANSI 81R - Rate of change of frequency
0.1 to 10 Hz/s
Inst ; 0.15 s to 300 s
(1) Tripping as of 1.2 Is.
PCRED301005EN
35
Protection functions
Phase-to-phase undervoltage ANSI code 27
Operation
The protection function is three-phase: b it picks up if one of the 3 phase-to-phase voltages drops below the Us set point b it includes a definite time delay T.
Block diagram
U21
U32
U < Us
U13
T0
time-delayed output "pick-up" signal
MT10873
Characteristics
3
Us set point Setting Accuracy (1)
5 % Unp to 120 % Unp ±2 % or 0.005 Unp
Resolution
1 %
Drop-out/pick-up ratio
103 % ±2.5 %
Time delay T
Setting
50 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1)
±2 %, or ±25 ms
Resolution
10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time
pick-up < 35 ms (typically 25 ms)
Overshoot time
< 35 ms
Reset time
< 40 ms
(1) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
36
CRED301005EN
Protection functions
MT10872
Positive sequence undervoltage and phase rotation direction check ANSI code 27D/47
Operation
Positive sequence undervoltage The protection picks up when the positive sequence component Vd of a three-phase voltage system drops below the Vsd set point with
Vd = 13-- (V1 + V2 + a2V3)
Vd = 13-- (U21 a2U32)
with V
=
--U----
and a
=
j 2------
e3
3
b it includes a definite time delay T b it allows drops in motor electrical torque to be detected.
Phase rotation direction This protection also allows the phase rotation direction to be detected.
3
The protection considers that the phase rotation direction is inverse when the
positive sequence voltage is less than 10 % of Unp and when the phase-to-phase
voltage is greater than 80 % of Unp.
Block diagram
Vd
Vd < Vsd
T0
time-delayed output
Vd < 0.1Un
"pick-up" signal
U21 (or V1)
U > 0.8 Un
&
rotation display(2)
Characteristics
Vsd set point
Setting Accuracy (1)
5 % Unp to 60 % Unp ±2 % or ±0.005 Unp
Pick-up/drop-out ratio
103 % ±2.5 %
Resolution
1 %
Time delay
Setting
50 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1)
±2 %, or ±25 ms
Resolution
10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristics times
Operating time
pick-up < 55 ms
Overshoot time
< 35 ms
Reset time
< 35 ms
(1) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6). (2) Displays "rotation" instead of positive sequence voltage measurement.
PCRED301005EN
37
Protection functions
Remanent undervoltage ANSI code 27R
Operation
This protection is single-phase: b it picks up when the U21 phase-to-phase voltage is less than the Us set point b the protection includes a definite time delay.
MT10875
Block diagram
U21 (or V1)
U < Us
T0
time-delayed output "pick-up" signal
Characteristics
Us set point
3
Setting Accuracy (1)
5 % Unp to 100 % Unp ±2 % or 0.005 Unp
Resolution
1 %
Drop-out/pick-up ratio
103 % ±2.5 %
Time delay T
Setting
50 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1)
±2 %, or ±25 ms
Resolution
10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time
< 40 ms
Overshoot time
< 20 ms
Reset time
< 30 ms
(1) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
38
CRED301005EN
Protection functions
Phase-to-neutral undervoltage ANSI code 27S
MT10874
Operation
This protection is three-phase: b it picks up when one of the 3 phase-to-neutral voltages drops below the Vs set point b it has 3 independent outputs available for the control matrix b it is operational if the number of VTs connected is V1, V2, V3 or U21, U32 with measurement of V0.
Block diagram
V1
V1 < Vs
T0
time-delayed output
V2
V2 < Vs
V3
V3 < Vs
T0 T0
time-delayed output
time-delayed output
3
1
"pick-up" signal
Characteristics
Vs set point Setting Accuracy (1) Resolution Drop-out/pick-up ratio Time delay T Setting Accuracy (1) Resolution Characteristic times Operation time Overshoot time Reset time (1) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
5 % Vnp to 120 % Vnp ±2 % or 0.005 Vnp 1 % 103 % ±2.5 %
50 ms to 300 s ±2 %, or ±25 ms 10 ms or 1 digit
pick-up < 35 ms (typically 25 ms) < 35 ms < 40 ms
PCRED301005EN
39
Protection functions
Phase undercurrent ANSI code 37
Operation
This protection is single-phase: b it picks up when phase 1 current drops below the Is set point b it is inactive when the current is less than 10 % of Ib b it is insensitive to current drops (breaking) due to circuit breaker tripping b it includes a definite time delay T.
DE50367
Block diagram
I1
I < Is
I > 0.1 Ib
15 ms 0
T0
&
time-delayed
output"
"pick-up" signal
t
MT10426
T
3
0 0,1 Ib
Is I
MT10865
Operating principle 1.06 Is Is 0.1 Ib
"pick-up" signal time-delayed output Case of current sag.
Characteristics
Is set point Setting Accuracy (1) Pick-up/drop-out ratio T time delay Setting Accuracy (1) Resolution Characteristic times
Operating time Overshoot time Reset time (1) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
15 % Ib y Is y 100 % Ib by steps of 1 % ±5 % 106 % ±5 % for Is > 0.1 In
50 ms y T y 300 s ±2 % or ±25 ms 10 ms or 1 digit
< 50 ms < 35 ms < 40 ms
MT10866
1.06 Is Is
0.1 Ib
"pick-up" signal = 0
<15 ms
time-delayed output = 0
Case of circuit breaker tripping.
40
CRED301005EN
Protection functions
Temperature monitoring ANSI code 38/49T
Operation
This protection is associated with an RTD of the Pt100 platinum (100 at 0°C or
32°F) or Ni100 or Ni120 nickel type in accordance with the IEC 60751 and DIN 43760
standards. b it picks up when the monitored temperature is greater than the Ts set point b it has two independent set points: v alarm set point v tripping set point b when the protection is activated, it detects whether the RTD is shorted or
disconnected: v RTD shorting is detected if the measured temperature is less than -35 °C or
-31 °F (measurement displayed "****") v RTD disconnection is detected if the measured temperature is greater than
+205 °C or +401 °F (measurement displayed "-****").
If an RTD fault is detected, the set point output relays are inhibited: the protection
outputs are set to zero.
The "RTD fault" item is also made available in the control matrix and an alarm message is generated.
3
Block diagram
T < +205 °C
&
T > Ts1
set point 1
RTD
T > Ts2
set point 2
& T > -35 °C
RTD's fault
Characteristics
Ts1 and Ts2 set points
°C
°F
Setting Accuracy (1)
0 °C to 180 °C ±1.5 °C
32 °F to 356 °F ±2.7 °F
Resolution
1 °C
1 °F
Pick-up/drop-out difference
3 °C ±0.5 °
Characteristic times
Operation time
< 5 seconds
(1) See "connection of MET148-2 module" chapter for accuracy derating according to wiring cross-section.
MT10878
PCRED301005EN
41
Protection functions
Negative sequence / unbalance ANSI code 46
Operation
The negative sequence / unbalance protection function: b picks up if the negative sequence component of phase currents is greater than the operation set point b it is time-delayed. The time delay may be definite time or IDMT (see curve). The negative sequence current is determined according to the 3 phase currents. Ii = 13-- × (I1 + a2I2 + aI3)
j 2------
with a = e 3
The tripping curve is defined according to the following equations: b for Is/Ib y Ii/Ib y 0. t = -(--l--i3-/--l-.-b1----9)--1--.-5-. T
b for 0.5 y Ii/Ib y 5 t = (---l--i-4/--l-.-b-6---)4--0--.-9--6-. T
b for Ii/Ib > 5 t = T
If Sepam is connected to 2 phase current sensors only,
the negative sequence current is:
3
Ii = ---1--- × I1 a2I3 3
Block diagram
I1
DE50557
j 2------
with a = e 3
I2
Ii > Is
I3
T0
time-delayed output
MT10550
Both formulas are equivalent when there is no zero sequence current (earth fault).
Definite time protection Is is the operation set point expressed in Amps, and T is the protection operation time delay.
t
T
Is
Ii
Definite time protection principle.
IDMT protection For Ii > Is, the time delay depends on the value of Ii/Ib (Ib: basis current of the protected equipment defined when the general parameters are set) T corresponds to the time delay for Ii/Ib = 5.
Characteristics
Curve
Setting
Definite, IDMT
Is set point
Setting
Definite time
IDMT
Resolution Accuracy (1)
Time delay T (operation time at 5 Ib)
Setting
Definite time
IDMT
Resolution Accuracy (1)
Definite time
IDMT
Pick-up/drop-out ratio
Characteristic times
Operation time
Overshoot time
Reset time
(1) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
"pick-up" signal
10 % Ib y Is y 500 % Ib 10 % Ib y Is y 50 % Ib 1 % ±5 % 100 ms y T y 300 s 100 ms y T y 1 s 10 ms or 1 digit ±2 % or ±25 ms ±5 % or ±35 ms 93.5 % ±5 %
pick-up < 55 ms < 35 ms < 55 ms
MT10857
IDMT protection principle.
42
CRED301005EN
Protection functions
Negative sequence / unbalance ANSI code 46
Determination of tripping time for different negative sequence current values for a given curve
Use the table to find the value of K that corresponds to the required negative sequence current. The tripping time is equal to KT.
Example given a tripping curve with the setting T = 0.5 s. What is the tripping time at 0.6 Ib? Use the table to find the value of K that corresponds to 60 % of Ib. The table reads K = 7.55. The tripping time is equal to: 0.5 x 7.55 = 3.755 s.
MT10546
IDMT tripping curve t(s)
10000 5000
2000 1000
500
200 100
50
20 10
5
2 1 0.5
0.2 0,1 0.05
min. curve (T=0,1s)
0.02 0.01 0.005
0.002 0.001
0.05
0.1
0.2 0.3 0.5 0.7 1
3
max. curve (T=1s)
23
5 7 10
I/Ib 20
li (% lb) K
10
15
20
25
30
33.33 35
40
45
50
55
57.7 60
65
70
75
99.95 54.50 35.44 25.38 19.32 16.51 15.34 12.56 10.53 9.00 8.21 7.84 7.55 7.00 6.52 6.11
li (% lb) cont'd 80
85
90
95
100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210
K cont'd
5.74 5.42 5.13 4.87 4.64 4.24 3.90 3.61 3.37 3.15 2.96 2.80 2.65 2.52 2.40 2.29
li (% lb) cont'd 22.
230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370
K cont'd
2.14 2.10 2.01 1.94 1.86 1.80 1.74 1.68 1.627 1.577 1.53 1.485 1.444 1.404 1.367 1.332
li (% lb) cont'd 380
390
400
410
420
430
440
450
460
470
480
490
u 500
K cont'd
1.298 1.267 1.236 1.18 1.167 1.154 1.13 1.105 1.082 1.06 1.04 1.02 1
PCRED301005EN
43
DE50559
DE50558
Protection functions
Case of normal starting.
3
Excessive starting time, locked rotor ANSI code 48/51LR/14
Operation
This function is three-phase. It comprises two parts: b excessive starting time: during starting, the protection picks up when one of the 3 phase currents is greater than the set point Is for a longer period of time than the ST time delay (normal starting time) b locked rotor: v at the normal operating rate (after starting), the protection picks up when one of the 3 phase currents is greater than the set point Is for a longer period of time than the LT time delay of the definite time type v locked on start: large motors may have very long starting time, due to their inertia or the reduce voltage supply. This starting time is longer than the permissive rotor blocking time. To protect such a motor LTS timer initiate a trip if a start has been detected (I > Is) or if the motor speed is zero. For a normal start, the input I23 (zero-speed-switch) disable this protection. Motor re-acceleration When the motor re-accelerates, it consumes a current in the vicinity of the starting current (> Is) without the current first passing through a value less than 10 % of Ib. The ST time delay, which corresponds to the normal starting time, may be reinitialized by a logic data input for particular uses (input I22). b reinitialize the excessive starting time protection b set the locked rotor protection LT time delay to a low value.
Starting is detected when the current consumed is 10 % greater than the Ib current.
DE50560
Case of excessive starting time. Case of locked rotor output. Case of starting locked rotor.
MT10870
Block diagram
I > 0.1Ib
ST 0 R
I1
I2
input I22
I3
I > Is
LT 0 &
1 &
LTS 0 &
input I23
1 tripping output
locked rotor output
starting time output
locked rotor at output
Characteristics
Is set point
Setting
Resolution Accuracy (1)
Pick-up/drop-out ratio
ST, LT and LTS time delays
Setting
ST
LT
LTS
Resolution Accuracy (1)
(1) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
50 % Ib y Is y 500 % Ib 1 % ±5 % 93.5 % ±5 %
500 ms y T y 300 s 50 ms y T y 300 s 50 ms y T y 300 s 10 ms or 1 digit ±2 % or from -25 ms to +40 ms
DE50561
44
CRED301005EN
MT10858
Protection functions
Thermal overload ANSI code 49RMS
Description
For self-ventilated rotating machines, cooling is more effective when the machine is
This function is used to protect equipment (motors, transformers, generators, lines, capacitors) against overloads, based on measurement of the current consumed.
Operation curve The protection gives a trip order when the heat rise E, calculated according to the measurement of an equivalent current Ieq, is greater than the set point Es. The greatest permissible continuous current is I = Ib Es
running than when it is stopped. Running and stopping of the equipment are calculated from the value of the current: b running if I > 0.1 Ib b stopped if I < 0.1 Ib. Two time constants may be set: b T1: heat rise time constant: concerns equipment that is running b T2: cooling time constant: concerns equipment that is stopped.
Accounting for harmonics The current measured by the thermal protection is an RMS 3-phase current which takes into account harmonics up to number 17.
The protection tripping time is set by the time
Accounting for ambient temperature
constant T. b the calculated heat rise depends on the current
Most machines are designed to operate at a maximum ambient temperature of 40 °C (104 °F). The thermal overload function takes into account the ambient temperature
consumed and the previous heat rise state
(Sepam equipped with the temperature sensor module option, with sensor no. 8
b the cold curve defines the protection tripping time based on zero heat rise b the hot curve defines the protection tripping time
assigned to measurement of ambient temperature) to increase the calculated heat rise value when the temperature measured exceeds 40 °C (104 °F).
3
based on 100 % nominal heat rise.
Increase factor: fa= T-----m---T--a--m--x----a----x--T----a---4-m---0--b--°--Ci---e---n-----t
101 100 10-1
Cold curve T-t--= Ln---l----l-e----b---q--l------l-e----b---2q---------2--E----s--
in whichT max is the equipment's maximum temperature (according to insulation class)
T ambient is the measured temperature.
Adaptation of the protection to motor thermal withstand
10-2 10-3
0
5
10
Hot curve T-t--= Ln
---l----l-e-l-----b-l-e---q---b-----q------2--2-------E--1--s--
Alarm set point, tripping set point Two set points may be set for heat rise: b Es1: alarm b Es2: tripping.
"Hot state" set point When the function is used to protect a motor, this fixed set point is designed for detection of the hot state used by the number of starts function.
Heat rise and cooling time constants
Motor thermal protection is often set based on the hot and cold curves supplied by the machine manufacturer. To fully comply with these experimental curves, additional parameters must be set: b initial heat rise, Es0, is used to reduce the cold tripping time. modified cold curve: T-t-- = Ln ---l----l-l--e---l--eb-----qb-----q--------2--2-------E-E---s--s--0-b a second group of parameters (time constants and set points) is used to take into account thermal withstand with locked rotors. This second set of parameters is taken into account when the current is greater than an adjustable set point Is.
Accounting for negative sequence current In the case of motors with coiled rotors, the presence of a negative sequence component increases the heat rise in the motor. The negative sequence component of the current is taken into account in the protection by the equation:
E 1
E 1
leq= lph2 + K li2
in which Iph is the greatest phase current
0,63
Ii is the negative sequence component of the current
0,36
K is an adjustable factor
0
T1
t
Heat rise time constant.
0 T2
Cooling time constant.
t
K may have the following values: 0 - 2.25 - 4.5 - 9 For an asynchronous motor, K is determined as follows:
K
=
2
CC-----dn--
----------1-----------
g
ll---db--
2
1
in which Cn, Cd: rated torque and starting torque Ib, Id: basis current and starting current g: rated slip.
Saving of heat rise When the protection trips, the current heat rise, increased by 10 %, is saved (Increasing by 10 % makes it possible to take into account the average heat rise of motors when starting). The saved value is reset to zero when the heat rise decreases sufficiently for the time before starting to be zero. The saved value is used when the power returns after a Sepam power failure, so as to start up again with the heat rise that triggered tripping.
MT10419 MT10420
PCRED301005EN
45
Protection functions
Thermal overload ANSI code 49RMS
Start inhibit
User information
The thermal overload protection can inhibit the closing of the motor's control device until the heat rise drops back down below a value that allows restarting. This value takes into account the heat rise produced by
The following information is available for the user: b time before restart enabled (in case of inhibition of starting) b time before tripping (with constant current) b heat rise.
the motor when starting.
See chapter "Machine operation assistance functions".
The inhibition function is grouped together with the
starts per hour protection and the indication START INHIBIT informs the user.
Characteristics
Set points
group A
group B
Inhibition of the thermal overload protection
Setting
Es1 alarm set point 50 % to 300 %
50 % to 300 %
function
Es2 tripping set point 50 % to 300 %
50 % to 300 %
Tripping of the thermal overload protection function (in
Es0 initial heat rise 0 to 100 %
0 to 100 %
the case of a motor) may be locked out, when required Resolution
1 %
1 %
by the process, by: b logic input I26 b remote control order TC7 (inhibit thermal overload
Time constants
Setting
T1 running (heat rise) 1 mn to 120 mn
T2 stopped (cooling) 5 mn to 600 mn
1 mn to 120 mn 5 mn to 600 mn
3
protection). Remote control order TC13 may be used to enable the operation of the thermal overload protection function.
Resolution
1 mn
Accounting for negative sequence component
Setting
K
0 --2.25 --4.5 --9
1 mn
Taking into account 2 transformer operating rates Maximum equipment temperature (according to insulation class) (2)
Power transformers often have two ventilation
Setting
T max 60°C to 200°C (140°F to 392°F)
operating rates: b ONAN (Oil Natural, Air Natural) b ONAF (Oil Natural, Air Forced). The two groups of thermal overload protection parameters enable both of these operating rates to be taken into account. Switching from one group of thermal settings to the other is controlled by logic input I26. Switching is carried out without any loss of the thermal capacity used value.
Taking into account 2 motor operating rates Switching from one set of thermal settings to the other
Resolution 1°
RMS current measurement
Accuracy 5 %
Tripping time
Accuracy (1) 2 % or 1 s
Change of setting parameters
By current threshold for motor
Is set point
0.25 to 8 Ib
By digital input for transformer
Input
I26
(1) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-8). (2) Equipment manufacturer data.
is controlled by. b logic input I26 b overrun of a set point by the equivalent current. The 2 groups of thermal overload protection parameters enable both operating rates to be taken into account. Switching is carried out without any loss of the thermal capacity used value.
TS/TC equivalence for each protocol
Modbus DNP3
IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850
TC
Binary Output
ASDU, FUN, INF LN.DO.DA
TC7
BO10
20, 106,3 (ON)
PTTR.InhThmPro.ctlVal
TC13
BO11
20, 106,3 (OFF) PTTR.InhThmPro.ctlVal
Block diagram
DE50243
46
CRED301005EN
Protection functions
Thermal overload ANSI code 49RMS
Setting examples
Example 1
The following data are available: b time constants for on operation T1 and off operation T2: v T1 = 25 min v T2 = 70 min b maximum curve in steady state: Imax/Ib = 1.05.
Setting of tripping set point Es2 Es2 = (Imax/Ib)2 = 110 %
For an overload of 2 Ib, the value t/T1 = 0.0339 (2) is obtained. In order for Sepam to trip at the point 1 (t = 70 s), T1 is equal to 2065 sec 34 min. With a setting of T1 = 34 min, the tripping time is obtained based on a cold state (point 2). In this case, it is equal to t/T1 = 0.3216 t 665 sec, i.e. 11 min, which is compatible with the thermal resistance of the motor when cold. The negative sequence factor is calculated using the equation defined on page 45. The parameters of the second thermal overload relay do not need to be set. They are not taken into account by default.
Example 3
Note: If the motor absorbs a current of 1.05 Ib in steady state, The following data are available:
the heat rise calculated by the thermal overload protection will b motor thermal resistance in the form of hot and cold curves (see solid line curves
reach 110 %.
in Figure 1),
Setting of alarm set point Es1
b cooling time constant T2
Es1 = 90 % (I/Ib = 0.95).
b maximum steady state current: Imax/Ib = 1.1.
Knegative: 4.5 (usual value) The other thermal overload parameters do not need to be set. They are not taken into account by default.
Setting of tripping set point Es2 Es2 = (Imax/Ib)2 = 120 %
Setting of alarm set point Es1
3
Example 2
Es1 = 90 % (I/Ib = 0.95).
The following data are available:
The time constant T1 is calculated so that the thermal overload protection trips after
b motor thermal resistance in the form of hot and cold 100 s (point 1).
curves (see solid line curves in Figure 1) b cooling time constant T2 b maximum steady state current: Imax/Ib = 1.05.
With t/T1 = 0.069 (I/Ib = 2 and Es2 = 120 %): T1 = 100 s / 0.069 = 1449 sec 24 min. The tripping time starting from the cold state is equal to:
Setting of tripping set point Es2 Es2 = (Imax/Ib)2 = 110 %
Setting of alarm set point Es1: Es1 = 90 % (I/Ib = 0.95). The manufacturer's hot/cold curves (1) may be used to determine the heating time constant T1. The approach consists of placing the Sepam hot/cold curves below the motor curves.
t/T1 = 0.3567 t = 24 min 0.3567 = 513 s (point 2'). This tripping time is too long since the limit for this overload current is 400 s (point 2). If the time constant T1 is lowered, the thermal overload protection will trip earlier, below point 2. There risk that motor starting when hot will not be possible also exists in this case (see Figure 2 in which a lower Sepam hot curve would intersect the starting curve with U = 0.9 Un). The Es0 parameter is a setting that is used to solve these differences by lowering the Sepam cold curve without moving the hot curve.
Figure 1: motor thermal resistance and thermal overload tripping curves
In this example, the thermal overload protection should trip after 400 s starting from the cold state. The following equation is used to obtain the Es0 value:
motor cold curve Sepam cold curve
Es0 =
-l-p---r-o--c-l-b-e--s--s--e--d- 2 t---n-e-e---c-T-e--1s---s--a---r-y-
.
2
-l-p---r-o--c-l-b-e--s--s--e--d- Es2
665
2
70
1
motor hot curve Sepam hot curve
with: t necessary : tripping time necessary starting from a cold state. I : processed equipment current.
(1) When the machine manufacturer provides both a time constant T1 and the machine hot/cold curves, the use of the curves is recommended since they are more accurate. (2) The charts containing the numerical values of the Sepam hot curve may be used, or else the equation of the curve which is given on page 45.
1.05 2
I/Ib
DE50368
time before tripping / s
PCRED301005EN
47
Protection functions
Thermal overload ANSI code 49RMS
Setting examples
In numerical values, the following is obtained:
---4----0---0-----s---e----c----
Es0 = 4 e 2460sec = 0.3035 31%
By setting Es0 = 31 %, point 2' is moved downward to obtain a shorter tripping time that is compatible with the motor's thermal resistance when cold (see Figure 3).
Note: A setting Es0 = 100 % therefore means that the hot and cold curves are the same.
Figure 2: hot/cold curves not compatible with the motor's thermal resistance
Sepam cold curve
Use of the additional setting group When a motor rotor is locked or is turning very slowly, its thermal behavior is different from that with the rated load. In such conditions, the motor is damaged by overheating of the rotor or stator. For high power motors, rotor overheating is most often a limiting factor. The thermal overload parameters chosen for operation with a low overload are no longer valid. In order to protect the motor in this case, "excessive starting time" protection may be used. Nevertheless, motor manufacturers provide the thermal resistance curves when the rotor is locked, for different voltages at the time of starting.
Figure 4: Locked rotor thermal resistance
motor running
locked rotor
MT10863
DE50369
time before tripping / s
3
513 400
2' 2
motor cold curve motor hot curve
times / s
1
100
1
Sepam hot curve
1.05 2
starting at Un starting at 0.9 Un
I/Ib
Figure 3: hot/cold curves compatible with the motor's thermal resistance via the setting of an initial heat rise Es0
400
2
100
1
adjusted Sepam cold curve motor cold curve motor hot curve
Sepam hot curve
3 2
4
5
1.1
2
Is
: thermal resistance, motor running : thermal resistance, motor stopped : Sepam tripping curve : starting at 65 % Un : starting at 80 % Un : starting at 100 % Un
6 I/Ib
In order to take these curves into account, the second thermal overload relay may be used. The time constant in this case is, in theory, the shortest one: however, it should not be determined in the same way as that of the first relay. The thermal overload protection switches between the first and second relay if the equivalent current Ieq exceeds the Is value (set point current).
DE50370
time before tripping / s
1.1
2
starting at Un starting at 0.9 Un
I/Ib
48
CRED301005EN
Protection functions
Thermal overload ANSI code 49RMS
Setting examples
Cold curves for Es0 = 0 %
l/Ib
1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80
Es (%)
50
0.6931 0.6042 0.5331 0.4749 0.4265 0.3857 0.3508 0.3207 0.2945 0.2716 0.2513 0.2333 0.2173 0.2029 0.1900 0.1782 0.1676
55
0.7985 0.6909 0.6061 0.5376 0.4812 0.4339 0.3937 0.3592 0.3294 0.3033 0.2803 0.2600 0.2419 0.2257 0.2111 0.1980 0.1860
60
0.9163 0.7857 0.6849 0.6046 0.5390 0.4845 0.4386 0.3993 0.3655 0.3360 0.3102 0.2873 0.2671 0.2490 0.2327 0.2181 0.2048
65
1.0498 0.8905 0.7704 0.6763 0.6004 0.5379 0.4855 0.4411 0.4029 0.3698 0.3409 0.3155 0.2929 0.2728 0.2548 0.2386 0.2239
70
1.2040 1.0076 0.8640 0.7535 0.6657 0.5942 0.5348 0.4847 0.4418 0.4049 0.3727 0.3444 0.3194 0.2972 0.2774 0.2595 0.2434
75
1.3863 1.1403 0.9671 0.8373 0.7357 0.6539 0.5866 0.5302 0.4823 0.4412 0.4055 0.3742 0.3467 0.3222 0.3005 0.2809 0.2633
80
1.6094 1.2933 1.0822 0.9287 0.8109 0.7174 0.6413 0.5780 0.5245 0.4788 0.4394 0.4049 0.3747 0.3479 0.3241 0.3028 0.2836
85
1.8971 1.4739 1.2123 1.0292 0.8923 0.7853 0.6991 0.6281 0.5686 0.5180 0.4745 0.4366 0.4035 0.3743 0.3483 0.3251 0.3043
90
2.3026 1.6946 1.3618 1.1411 0.9808 0.8580 0.7605 0.6809 0.6147 0.5587 0.5108 0.4694 0.4332 0.4013 0.3731 0.3480 0.3254
95
1.9782 1.5377 1.2670 1.0780 0,9365 0.8258 0.7366 0.6630 0.6012 0.5486 0.5032 0.4638 0.4292 0.3986 0.3714 0.3470
100 105
2.3755 1.7513 1.4112 1.1856 1.0217 0.8958 0.7956 0.7138 0.6455 0.5878 0.5383 0.4953 0.4578 0.4247 0.3953 0.3691 3.0445 2.0232 1.5796 1.3063 1.1147 0.9710 0.8583 0.7673 0.6920 0.6286 0.5746 0.5279 0,4872 0,4515 0,4199 0,3917
3
110
2.3979 1.7824 1.4435 1.2174 1.0524 0.9252 0.8238 0.7406 0.6712 0.6122 0.5616 0.5176 0.4790 0.4450 0.4148
115
3.0040 2.0369 1.6025 1.3318 1.1409 0,9970 0.8837 0.7918 0.7156 0.6514 0.5964 0.5489 0.5074 0.4708 0.4384
120
2.3792 1.7918 1.4610 1.2381 1.0742 0.9474 0.8457 0.7621 0.6921 0.6325 0.5812 0.5365 0.4973 0.4626
125
2.9037 2.0254 1.6094 1.3457 1.1580 1.0154 0.9027 0.8109 0.7346 0.6700 0.6146 0.5666 0.5245 0.4874
130
2.3308 1.7838 1.4663 1.2493 1.0885 0.9632 0.8622 0.7789 0.7089 0.6491 0.5975 0.5525 0.5129
135
2.7726 1.9951 1.6035 1.3499 1.1672 1.0275 0.9163 0.8253 0.7494 0.6849 0.6295 0.5813 0.5390
140
2.2634 1.7626 1.4618 1.2528 1.0962 0.9734 0.8740 0.7916 0.7220 0.6625 0.6109 0.5658
145
2.6311 1.9518 1.5877 1.3463 1.1701 1.0341 0.9252 0.8356 0.7606 0.6966 0.6414 0.5934
150
3.2189 2.1855 1.7319 1.4495 1.2498 1.0986 0.9791 0.8817 0.8007 0.7320 0.6729 0.6217
155
2.4908 1.9003 1.5645 1.3364 1.1676 1.0361 0.9301 0.8424 0.7686 0.7055 0.6508
160
2.9327 2.1030 1.6946 1.4313 1.2417 1.0965 0.9808 0.8860 0.8066 0.7391 0.6809
165
2.3576 1.8441 1.5361 1.3218 1.1609 1.0343 0.9316 0.8461 0.7739 0.7118
170
2.6999 2.0200 1.6532 1.4088 1.2296 1.0908 0.9793 0.8873 0.8099 0.7438
175
3.2244 2.2336 1.7858 1.5041 1.3035 1.1507 1.0294 0.9302 0.8473 0.7768
180
2.5055 1.9388 1.6094 1.3832 1.2144 1.0822 0.9751 0.8861 0.8109
185
2.8802 2.1195 1.7272 1.4698 1.2825 1.1379 1.0220 0.9265 0.8463
190
3.4864 2.3401 1.8608 1.5647 1.3555 1.1970 1.0713 0.9687 0.8829
195
2.6237 2.0149 1.6695 1.4343 1.2597 1.1231 1.0126 0.9209
200
3.0210 2.1972 1.7866 1.5198 1.3266 1.1778 1.0586 0.9605
PCRED301005EN
49
Protection functions
Thermal overload ANSI code 49RMS
Setting examples
Cold curves for Es0 = 0 %
I/Ib
1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3.20 3.40 3.60 3.80 4.00 4.20 4.40 4.60
Es (%)
50
0.1579 0.1491 0.1410 0.1335 0.1090 0.0908 0.0768 0.0659 0.0572 0.0501 0.0442 0.0393 0.0352 0.0317 0.0288 0.0262 0.0239
55
0.1752 0.1653 0.1562 0.1479 0.1206 0.1004 0.0849 0.0727 0.0631 0.0552 0.0487 0.0434 0.0388 0.0350 0.0317 0.0288 0.0263
60
0.1927 0.1818 0.1717 0.1625 0.1324 0.1100 0.0929 0.0796 0.069 0.0604 0.0533 0.0474 0.0424 0.0382 0.0346 0.0315 0.0288
65
0.2106 0.1985 0.1875 0.1773 0.1442 0.1197 0.1011 0.0865 0.075 0.0656 0.0579 0.0515 0.0461 0.0415 0.0375 0.0342 0.0312
70
0.2288 0.2156 0.2035 0.1924 0.1562 0.1296 0.1093 0.0935 0.081 0.0708 0.0625 0.0555 0.0497 0.0447 0.0405 0.0368 0.0336
75
0.2474 0.2329 0.2197 0.2076 0.1684 0.1395 0.1176 0.1006 0.087 0.0761 0.0671 0.0596 0.0533 0.0480 0.0434 0.0395 0.0361
80
0.2662 0.2505 0.2362 0.2231 0.1807 0.1495 0.1260 0.1076 0.0931 0.0813 0.0717 0.0637 0.0570 0.0513 0.0464 0.0422 0.0385
85
0.2855 0.2685 0.2530 0.2389 0.1931 0.1597 0.1344 0.1148 0.0992 0.0867 0.0764 0.0678 0.0607 0.0546 0.0494 0.0449 0.0410
90
0.3051 0.2868 0.2701 0.2549 0.2057 0.1699 0.1429 0.1219 0.1054 0.092 0.0811 0.0720 0.0644 0.0579 0.0524 0.0476 0.0435
95
0.3251 0.3054 0.2875 0.2712 0.2185 0.1802 0.1514 0.1292 0.1116 0.0974 0.0858 0.0761 0.0681 0.0612 0.0554 0.0503 0.0459
3
100 105 110
0.3456 0.3244 0.3051 0.2877 0.2314 0.1907 0.1601 0.1365 0.1178 0.1028 0.0905 0.0803 0.0718 0.0645 0.0584 0.0530 0.0484 0.3664 0.3437 0.3231 0.3045 0.2445 0.2012 0.1688 0.1438 0.1241 0.1082 0.0952 0.0845 0.0755 0.0679 0.0614 0.0558 0.0509 0.3877 0.3634 0.3415 0.3216 0.2578 0.2119 0.1776 0.1512 0.1304 0.1136 0.1000 0.0887 0.0792 0.0712 0.0644 0.0585 0.0534
115
0.4095 0.3835 0.3602 0.3390 0.2713 0.2227 0.1865 0.1586 0.1367 0.1191 0.1048 0.0929 0.0830 0.0746 0.0674 0.0612 0.0559
120
0.4317 0.4041 0.3792 0.3567 0.2849 0.2336 0.1954 0.1661 0.1431 0.1246 0.1096 0.0972 0.0868 0.0780 0.0705 0.0640 0.0584
125
0.4545 0.4250 0.3986 0.3747 0.2988 0.2446 0.2045 0.1737 0.1495 0.1302 0.1144 0.1014 0.0905 0.0813 0.0735 0.0667 0.0609
130
0.4778 0.4465 0.4184 0.3930 0.3128 0.2558 0.2136 0.1813 0.156 0.1358 0.1193 0.1057 0.0943 0.0847 0.0766 0.0695 0.0634
135
0.5016 0.4683 0.4386 0.4117 0.3270 0.2671 0.2228 0.1890 0.1625 0.1414 0.1242 0.1100 0.0982 0.0881 0.0796 0.0723 0.0659
140
0.5260 0.4907 0.4591 0.4308 0.3414 0.2785 0.2321 0.1967 0.1691 0.147 0.1291 0.1143 0.1020 0.0916 0.0827 0.0751 0.0685
145
0.5511 0.5136 0.4802 0.4502 0.3561 0.2900 0.2414 0.2045 0.1757 0.1527 0.1340 0.1187 0.1058 0.0950 0.0858 0.0778 0.0710
150
0.5767 0.5370 0.5017 0.4700 0.3709 0.3017 0.2509 0.2124 0.1823 0.1584 0.1390 0.1230 0.1097 0.0984 0.0889 0.0806 0.0735
155
0.6031 0.5610 0.5236 0.4902 0.3860 0.3135 0.2604 0.2203 0.189 0.1641 0.1440 0.1274 0.1136 0.1019 0.0920 0.0834 0.0761
160
0.6302 0.5856 0.5461 0.5108 0.4013 0.3254 0.2701 0.2283 0.1957 0.1699 0.1490 0.1318 0.1174 0.1054 0.0951 0.0863 0.0786
165
0.6580 0.6108 0.5690 0.5319 0.4169 0.3375 0.2798 0.2363 0.2025 0.1757 0.1540 0.1362 0.1213 0.1088 0.0982 0.0891 0.0812
170
0.6866 0.6366 0.5925 0.5534 0.4327 0.3498 0.2897 0.2444 0.2094 0.1815 0.1591 0.1406 0.1253 0.1123 0.1013 0.0919 0.0838
175
0.7161 0.6631 0.6166 0.5754 0.4487 0.3621 0.2996 0.2526 0.2162 0.1874 0.1641 0.1451 0.1292 0.1158 0.1045 0.0947 0.0863
180
0.7464 0.6904 0.6413 0.5978 0.4651 0.3747 0.3096 0.2608 0.2231 0.1933 0.1693 0.1495 0.1331 0.1193 0.1076 0.0976 0.0889
185
0.7777 0.7184 0.6665 0.6208 0.4816 0.3874 0.3197 0.2691 0.2301 0.1993 0.1744 0.1540 0.1371 0.1229 0.1108 0.1004 0.0915
190
0.8100 0.7472 0.6925 0.6444 0.4985 0.4003 0.3300 0.2775 0.2371 0.2052 0.1796 0.1585 0.1411 0.1264 0.1140 0.1033 0.0941
195
0.8434 0.7769 0.7191 0.6685 0.5157 0.4133 0.3403 0.2860 0.2442 0.2113 0.1847 0.1631 0.1451 0.1300 0.1171 0.1062 0.0967
200
0.8780 0.8075 0.7465 0.6931 0.5331 0.4265 0.3508 0.2945 0.2513 0.2173 0.1900 0.1676 0.1491 0.1335 0.1203 0.1090 0.0993
50
CRED301005EN
Protection functions
Thermal overload ANSI code 49RMS
Setting examples
Cold curves for Es0 = 0 %
I/Ib
4.80 5.00 5.50 6.00 6.50 7.00 7.50 8.00 8.50 9.00 9.50 10.00 12.50 15.00 17.50 20.00
Es (%)
50
0.0219 0.0202 0.0167 0.0140 0.0119 0.0103 0.0089 0.0078 0.0069 0.0062 0.0056 0.0050 0.0032 0.0022 0.0016 0.0013
55
0.0242 0.0222 0.0183 0.0154 0.0131 0.0113 0.0098 0.0086 0.0076 0.0068 0.0061 0.0055 0.0035 0.0024 0.0018 0.0014
60
0.0264 0.0243 0.0200 0.0168 0.0143 0.0123 0.0107 0.0094 0.0083 0.0074 0.0067 0.0060 0.0038 0.0027 0.0020 0.0015
65
0.0286 0.0263 0.0217 0.0182 0.0155 0.0134 0.0116 0.0102 0.0090 0.0081 0.0072 0.0065 0.0042 0.0029 0.0021 0.0016
70
0.0309 0.0284 0.0234 0.0196 0.0167 0.0144 0.0125 0.0110 0.0097 0.0087 0.0078 0.0070 0.0045 0.0031 0.0023 0.0018
75
0.0331 0.0305 0.0251 0.0211 0.0179 0.0154 0.0134 0.0118 0.0104 0.0093 0.0083 0.0075 0.0048 0.0033 0.0025 0.0019
80
0.0353 0.0325 0.0268 0.0225 0.0191 0.0165 0.0143 0.0126 0.0111 0.0099 0.0089 0.0080 0.0051 0.0036 0.0026 0.0020
85
0.0376 0.0346 0.0285 0.0239 0.0203 0.0175 0.0152 0.0134 0.0118 0.0105 0.0095 0.0085 0.0055 0.0038 0.0028 0.0021
90
0.0398 0.0367 0.0302 0.0253 0.0215 0.0185 0.0161 0.0142 0.0125 0.0112 0.0100 0.0090 0.0058 0.0040 0.0029 0.0023
95
0.0421 0.0387 0.0319 0.0267 0.0227 0.0196 0.0170 0.0150 0.0132 0.0118 0.0106 0.0095 0.0061 0.0042 0.0031 0.0024
100
0.0444 0.0408 0.0336 0.0282 0.0240 0.0206 0.0179 0.0157 0.0139 0.0124 0.0111 0.0101 0.0064 0.0045 0.0033 0.0025
105
0.0466 0.0429 0.0353 0.0296 0.0252 0.0217 0.0188 0.0165 0.0146 0.0130 0.0117 0.0106 0.0067 0.0047 0.0034 0.0026
3
110
0.0489 0.0450 0.0370 0.0310 0.0264 0.0227 0.0197 0.0173 0.0153 0.0137 0.0123 0.0111 0.0071 0.0049 0.0036 0.0028
115
0.0512 0.0471 0.0388 0.0325 0.0276 0.0237 0.0207 0.0181 0.0160 0.0143 0.0128 0.0116 0.0074 0.0051 0.0038 0.0029
120
0.0535 0.0492 0.0405 0.0339 0.0288 0.0248 0.0216 0.0189 0.0167 0.0149 0.0134 0.0121 0.0077 0.0053 0.0039 0.0030
125
0.0558 0.0513 0.0422 0.0353 0.0300 0.0258 0.0225 0.0197 0.0175 0.0156 0.0139 0.0126 0.0080 0.0056 0.0041 0.0031
130
0.0581 0.0534 0.0439 0.0368 0.0313 0.0269 0.0234 0.0205 0.0182 0.0162 0.0145 0.0131 0.0084 0.0058 0.0043 0.0033
135
0.0604 0.0555 0.0457 0.0382 0.0325 0.0279 0.0243 0.0213 0.0189 0.0168 0.0151 0.0136 0.0087 0.0060 0.0044 0.0034
140
0.0627 0.0576 0.0474 0.0397 0.0337 0.0290 0.0252 0.0221 0.0196 0.0174 0.0156 0.0141 0.0090 0.0062 0.0046 0.0035
145
0.0650 0.0598 0.0491 0.0411 0.0349 0.0300 0.0261 0.0229 0.0203 0.0181 0.0162 0.0146 0.0093 0.0065 0.0047 0.0036
150
0.0673 0.0619 0.0509 0.0426 0.0361 0.0311 0.0270 0.0237 0.0210 0.0187 0.0168 0.0151 0.0096 0.0067 0.0049 0.0038
155
0.0696 0.0640 0.0526 0.0440 0.0374 0.0321 0.0279 0.0245 0.0217 0.0193 0.0173 0.0156 0.0100 0.0069 0.0051 0.0039
160
0.0720 0.0661 0.0543 0.0455 0.0386 0.0332 0.0289 0.0253 0.0224 0.0200 0.0179 0.0161 0.0103 0.0071 0.0052 0.0040
165
0.0743 0.0683 0.0561 0.0469 0.0398 0.0343 0.0298 0.0261 0.0231 0.0206 0.0185 0.0166 0.0106 0.0074 0.0054 0.0041
170
0.0766 0.0704 0.0578 0.0484 0.0411 0.0353 0.0307 0.0269 0.0238 0.0212 0.0190 0.0171 0.0109 0.0076 0.0056 0.0043
175
0.0790 0.0726 0.0596 0.0498 0.0423 0.0364 0.0316 0.0277 0.0245 0.0218 0.0196 0.0177 0.0113 0.0078 0.0057 0.0044
180
0.0813 0.0747 0.0613 0.0513 0.0435 0.0374 0.0325 0.0285 0.0252 0.0225 0.0201 0.0182 0.0116 0.0080 0.0059 0.0045
185
0.0837 0.0769 0.0631 0.0528 0.0448 0.0385 0.0334 0.0293 0.0259 0.0231 0.0207 0.0187 0.0119 0.0083 0.0061 0.0046
190
0.0861 0.0790 0.0649 0.0542 0.0460 0.0395 0.0344 0.0301 0.0266 0.0237 0.0213 0.0192 0.0122 0.0085 0.0062 0.0048
195
0.0884 0.0812 0.0666 0.0557 0.0473 0.0406 0.0353 0.0309 0.0274 0.0244 0.0218 0.0197 0.0126 0.0087 0.0064 0.0049
200
0.0908 0.0834 0.0684 0.0572 0.0485 0.0417 0.0362 0.0317 0.0281 0.0250 0.0224 0.0202 0.0129 0.0089 0.0066 0.0050
PCRED301005EN
51
Protection functions
Thermal overload ANSI code 49RMS
Setting examples
Hot curves
I/Ib
1.00 1.05 1.10 1.15 1.20 1.25 1.30 1.35 1.40 1.45 1.50 1.55 1.60 1.65 1.70 1.75 1.80
Es (%)
105
0.6690 0.2719 0.1685 0.1206 0.0931 0.0752 0.0627 0.0535 0.0464 0.0408 0.0363 0.0326 0.0295 0.0268 0.0245 0.0226
110
3.7136 0.6466 0.3712 0.2578 0.1957 0.1566 0.1296 0.1100 0.0951 0.0834 0.0740 0.0662 0.0598 0.0544 0.0497 0.0457
115
1.2528 0.6257 0.4169 0.3102 0.2451 0.2013 0.1699 0.1462 0.1278 0.1131 0.1011 0.0911 0.0827 0.0755 0.0693
120
3.0445 0.9680 0.6061 0.4394 0.3423 0.2786 0.2336 0.2002 0.1744 0.1539 0.1372 0.1234 0.1118 0.1020 0.0935
125
1.4925 0.8398 0.5878 0.4499 0.3623 0.3017 0.2572 0.2231 0.1963 0.1747 0.1568 0.1419 0.1292 0.1183
130
2.6626 1.1451 0.7621 0.5705 0.4537 0.3747 0.3176 0.2744 0.2407 0.2136 0.1914 0.1728 0.1572 0.1438
135
1.5870 0.9734 0.7077 0.5543 0.4535 0.3819 0.3285 0.2871 0.2541 0.2271 0.2048 0.1860 0.1699
140
2.3979 1.2417 0.8668 0.6662 0.5390 0.4507 0.3857 0.3358 0.2963 0.2643 0.2378 0.2156 0.1967
145
1.6094 1.0561 0.7921 0.6325 0.5245 0.4463 0.3869 0.3403 0.3028 0.2719 0.2461 0.2243
150
2.1972 1.2897 0.9362 0.7357 0.6042 0.5108 0.4408 0.3864 0.3429 0.3073 0.2776 0.2526
155
3 160 165
3.8067 1.5950 1.1047 0.8508 0.6909 0.5798 0.4978 0.4347 0.3846 2.0369 1.3074 0.9808 0.7857 0.6539 0.5583 0.4855 0.4282 2.8478 1.5620 1.1304 0.8905 0.7340 0.6226 0.5390 0.4738
0.3439 0.3102 0.2817 0.3819 0.3438 0.3118 0.4215 0.3786 0.3427
170
1.9042 1.3063 1.0076 0.8210 0.6914 0.5955 0.5215 0.4626 0.4146 0.3747
175
2.4288 1.5198 1.1403 0.9163 0.7652 0.6554 0.5717 0.5055 0.4520 0.4077
180
3.5988 1.7918 1.2933 1.0217 0.8449 0.7191 0.6244 0.5504 0.4908 0.4418
185
2.1665 1.4739 1.1394 0.9316 0.7872 0.6802 0.5974 0.5312 0.4772
190
2.7726 1.6946 1.2730 1.0264 0.8602 0.7392 0.6466 0.5733 0.5138
195
4.5643 1.9782 1.4271 1.1312 0.9390 0.8019 0.6985 0.6173 0.5518
200
2.3755 1.6094 1.2483 1.0245 0.8688 0.7531 0.6633 0.5914
I/Ib Es (%) 105 110 115 120 125 130 135 140 145 150 155 160 165 170 175 180 185 190 195 200
1.85 1.90 1.95 2.00 2.20 2.40 2.60 2.80 3.00 3,20 3,40 3.60 3.80 4.00
0.0209 0.0422 0.0639 0.0862 0.1089 0.1322 0.1560 0.1805 0.2055 0.2312 0.2575 0.2846 0.3124 0.3410 0.3705 0.4008 0.4321 0.4644 0.4978 0.5324
0.0193 0.0391 0.0592 0.0797 0.1007 0.1221 0.1440 0.1664 0.1892 0.2127 0.2366 0.2612 0.2864 0.3122 0.3388 0.3660 0.3940 0.4229 0.4525 0.4831
0.0180 0.0363 0.0550 0.0740 0.0934 0.1132 0.1334 0.1540 0.1750 0.1965 0.2185 0.2409 0.2639 0.2874 0.3115 0.3361 0.3614 0.3873 0.4140 0.4413
0.0168 0.0339 0.0513 0.0690 0.0870 0.1054 0.1241 0.1431 0.1625 0.1823 0.2025 0.2231 0.2442 0.2657 0.2877 0.3102 0.3331 0.3567 0.3808 0.4055
0.0131 0.0264 0.0398 0.0535 0.0673 0.0813 0.0956 0.1100 0.1246 0.1395 0.1546 0.1699 0.1855 0.2012 0.2173 0.2336 0.2502 0.2671 0.2842 0.3017
0.0106 0.0212 0.0320 0.0429 0.0540 0.0651 0.0764 0.0878 0.0993 0.1110 0.1228 0.1347 0.1468 0.1591 0.1715 0.1840 0.1967 0.2096 0.2226 0.2358
0.0087 0.0175 0.0264 0.0353 0.0444 0.0535 0.0627 0.0720 0.0813 0.0908 0.1004 0.1100 0.1197 0.1296 0.1395 0.1495 0.1597 0.1699 0.1802 0.1907
0.0073 0.0147 0.0222 0.0297 0.0372 0.0449 0.0525 0.0603 0.0681 0.0759 0.0838 0.0918 0.0999 0.1080 0.1161 0.1244 0.1327 0.1411 0.1495 0.1581
0.0063 0.0126 0.0189 0.0253 0.0317 0.0382 0.0447 0.0513 0.0579 0.0645 0.0712 0.0780 0.0847 0.0916 0.0984 0.1054 0.1123 0.1193 0.1264 0.1335
0.0054 0.0109 0.0164 0.0219 0.0274 0.0330 0.0386 0.0443 0.0499 0.0556 0.0614 0.0671 0.0729 0.0788 0.0847 0.0906 0.0965 0.1025 0.1085 0.1145
0.0047 0.0095 0.0143 0.0191 0.0240 0.0288 0.0337 0.0386 0.0435 0.0485 0.0535 0.0585 0.0635 0.0686 0.0737 0.0788 0.0839 0.0891 0.0943 0.0995
0.0042 0.0084 0.0126 0.0169 0.0211 0.0254 0.0297 0.0340 0.0384 0.0427 0.0471 0.0515 0.0559 0.0603 0.0648 0.0692 0.0737 0.0782 0.0828 0.0873
0.0037 0.0075 0.0112 0.0150 0.0188 0.0226 0.0264 0.0302 0.0341 0.0379 0.0418 0.0457 0.0496 0.0535 0.0574 0.0614 0.0653 0.0693 0.0733 0.0773
0.0033 0.0067 0.0101 0.0134 0.0168 0.0202 0.0236 0.0270 0.0305 0.0339 0.0374 0.0408 0.0443 0.0478 0.0513 0.0548 0.0583 0.0619 0.0654 0.0690
4.20 4.40 4.60
0.0030 0.0027 0.0060 0.0055 0.0091 0.0082 0.0121 0.0110 0.0151 0.0137 0.0182 0.0165 0.0213 0.0192 0.0243 0.0220 0.0274 0.0248 0.0305 0.0276 0.0336 0.0304 0.0367 0.0332 0.0398 0.0360 0.0430 0.0389 0.0461 0.0417 0.0493 0.0446 0.0524 0.0474 0.0556 0.0503 0.0588 0.0531 0.0620 0.0560
0.0025 0.0050 0.0075 0.0100 0.0125 0.0150 0.0175 0.0200 0.0226 0.0251 0.0277 0.0302 0.0328 0.0353 0.0379 0.0405 0.0431 0.0457 0.0483 0.0509
52
CRED301005EN
Protection functions
Thermal overload ANSI code 49RMS
Setting examples
Hot curves
I/Ib
4.80 5.00 5.50 6.00 6.50 7.00 7.50 8.00 8.50 9.00 9.50 10.00 12.50 15.00 17.50 20.00
Es (%)
105
0.0023 0.0021 0.0017 0.0014 0.0012 0.0010 0.0009 0.0008 0.0007 0.0006 0.0006 0.0005 0.0003 0.0002 0.0002 0.0001
110
0.0045 0.0042 0.0034 0.0029 0.0024 0.0021 0.0018 0.0016 0.0014 0.0013 0.0011 0.0010 0.0006 0.0004 0.0003 0.0003
115
0.0068 0.0063 0.0051 0.0043 0.0036 0.0031 0.0027 0.0024 0.0021 0.0019 0.0017 0.0015 0.0010 0.0007 0.0005 0.0004
120
0.0091 0.0084 0.0069 0.0057 0.0049 0.0042 0.0036 0.0032 0.0028 0.0025 0.0022 0.0020 0.0013 0.0009 0.0007 0.0005
125
0.0114 0.0105 0.0086 0.0072 0.0061 0.0052 0.0045 0.0040 0.0035 0.0031 0.0028 0.0025 0.0016 0.0011 0.0008 0.0006
130
0.0137 0.0126 0.0103 0.0086 0.0073 0.0063 0.0054 0.0048 0.0042 0.0038 0.0034 0.0030 0.0019 0.0013 0.0010 0.0008
135
0.0160 0.0147 0.0120 0.0101 0.0085 0.0073 0.0064 0.0056 0.0049 0.0044 0.0039 0.0035 0.0023 0.0016 0.0011 0.0009
140
0.0183 0.0168 0.0138 0.0115 0.0097 0.0084 0.0073 0.0064 0.0056 0.0050 0.0045 0.0040 0.0026 0.0018 0.0013 0.0010
145
0.0206 0.0189 0.0155 0.0129 0.0110 0.0094 0.0082 0.0072 0.0063 0.0056 0.0051 0.0046 0.0029 0.0020 0.0015 0.0011
150
0.0229 0.0211 0.0172 0.0144 0.0122 0.0105 0.0091 0.0080 0.0070 0.0063 0.0056 0.0051 0.0032 0.0022 0.0016 0.0013
155
0.0253 0.0232 0.0190 0.0158 0.0134 0.0115 0.0100 0.0088 0.0077 0.0069 0.0062 0.0056 0.0035 0.0025 0.0018 0.0014
160
0.0276 0.0253 0.0207 0.0173 0.0147 0.0126 0.0109 0.0096 0.0085 0.0075 0.0067 0.0061 0.0039 0.0027 0.0020 0.0015
3
165
0.0299 0.0275 0.0225 0.0187 0.0159 0.0136 0.0118 0.0104 0.0092 0.0082 0.0073 0.0066 0.0042 0.0029 0.0021 0.0016
170
0.0323 0.0296 0.0242 0.0202 0.0171 0.0147 0.0128 0.0112 0.0099 0.0088 0.0079 0.0071 0.0045 0.0031 0.0023 0.0018
175
0.0346 0.0317 0.0260 0.0217 0.0183 0.0157 0.0137 0.0120 0.0106 0.0094 0.0084 0.0076 0.0048 0.0034 0.0025 0.0019
180
0.0370 0.0339 0.0277 0.0231 0.0196 0.0168 0.0146 0.0128 0.0113 0.0101 0.0090 0.0081 0.0052 0.0036 0.0026 0.0020
185
0.0393 0.0361 0.0295 0.0246 0.0208 0.0179 0.0155 0.0136 0.0120 0.0107 0.0096 0.0086 0.0055 0.0038 0.0028 0.0021
190
0.0417 0.0382 0.0313 0.0261 0.0221 0.0189 0.0164 0.0144 0.0127 0.0113 0.0101 0.0091 0.0058 0.0040 0.0030 0.0023
195
0.0441 0.0404 0.0330 0.0275 0.0233 0.0200 0.0173 0.0152 0.0134 0.0119 0.0107 0.0096 0.0061 0.0043 0.0031 0.0024
200
0.0464 0.0426 0.0348 0.0290 0.0245 0.0211 0.0183 0.0160 0.0141 0.0126 0.0113 0.0102 0.0065 0.0045 0.0033 0.0025
PCRED301005EN
53
Protection functions
Phase overcurrent ANSI code 50/51
Description
The Is setting corresponds to the vertical asymptote of the curve, and T is the
The phase overcurrent function comprises 4 independent elements divided into two groups of 2
operation time delay for 10 Is. The tripping time for I/Is values less than 1.2 depends on the type of curve chosen.
settings called Group A and Group B respectively.
The use of the two elements may be chosen by by
Curve description
Type
parameter setting:
Standard inverse time (SIT)
1.2
b operation with Group A and Group B exclusively, with Very inverse time (VIT or LTI)
1.2
switching from one group to the other dependent on the Extremely inverse time (EIT)
1.2
state of logic input I13 exclusively, or by remote control (TC3, TC4)
Ultra inverse time (UIT)
1.2
v I13 = 0 group A
RI curve
1
v I13 = 1 group B
IEC standard inverse time SIT/A
1
b operation with Group A and Group B active for 4-set IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI/B
1
point operation
IEC extremely inverse time EIT/C
1
Enabling/disabling is performed by group of 2 elements IEEE moderately inverse (IEC/D)
1
(A, B).
IEEE very inverse (IEC/E)
1
3
Operation
Phase overcurrent protection is three-phase.
IEEE extremely inverse (IEC/F)
1
IAC inverse
1
It picks up if one, two or three phase currents reach the IAC very inverse
1
operation set point.
IAC extremely inverse
1
It includes a time delay, which is either definite
The curve equations are given in the chapter entitled "IDMT protection functions".
(constant, DT) or IDMT depending on the curves on the
facing page. The protection incorporates a harmonic 2 restraint set point which can be used to set the protection Is set point close to the CT rated current, including when a transformer closes. This restraint can be activated by parameter setting. Harmonic 2 restraint is valid as long as the current is
The function takes into account current variations during the time delay interval. For currents with a very large amplitude, the protection function has a definite time characteristic: b If I > 20 Is, tripping time is the time that corresponds to 20 Is b If I > 40 In, tripping time is the time that corresponds to 40 In (In: rated current transformer current defined when entering the general settings).
less than half the minimum short-circuit current Isc of the network downstream of the protection.
Block diagram
Definite time protection functions
DE80533
Is is the operation set point expressed in Amps, and T I1
is the protection operation time delay.
I2
I > Is
t
I3
"pick-up" signal and to logic discrimination
T 0
&
time-delayed output
DE80505
T
Is
I
Definite time protection principle.
IDMT protection
IDMT protection operates in accordance with the IEC 60255-3, BS 142 and IEEE C-37112 standards.
type 1 t
type 1,2
I < Iscmin/2 &
H2 restraint
DE80506
T
1 1.2
10
IDMT protection principle.
20
I/Is
54
CRED301005EN
MT10541
Protection functions
Phase overcurrent ANSI code 50/51
Timer hold delay
The function includes an adjustable timer hold delay T1: b definite time (timer hold) for all the tripping curves
Characteristics
Tripping curve Setting
Definite time, IDMT: chosen according to list on previous page
I > Is time-delayed output I > Is pick-up signal
Is set point Setting
Resolution Accuracy (1) Drop-out/pick-up ratio
Definite time 0.1 In y Is y 24 In expressed in Amps
IDMT
0.1 In y Is y 2.4 In expressed in Amps
1 A or 1 digit
±5% or ±0.01 In
93.5% ±5% or > (1 - 0.02 In/Is) x 100%
Harmonic restraint 2 Fixed threshold
17% ±5 %
Min short-circuit current Isc
T
tripping
Setting
In to 999 kA
value of internal time delay counter
Time delay T (operation time at 10 Is)
Setting
Definite time inst, 50 ms y T y 300 s
IDMT
100 ms y T y 12.5 s or TMS (2)
3
Resolution
10 ms or 1 digit
Accuracy (1)
Definite time ±2% or from -10 ms to +25 ms
T1
T1
T1
IDMT
Class 5 or from -10 ms to +25 ms
b IDMT for IEC, IEEE and IAC curves
I > Is time-delayed output
Timer hold delay T1 Definite time (timer hold) IDMT (3)
Characteristic times Operation time
0; 0.05 to 300 s 0.5 to 300 s pick-up < 35 ms at 2 Is (typically 25 ms)
I > Is pick-up signal
confirmed instantaneous: b inst < 50 ms at 2 Is for Is u 0.3 In (typically 35 ms) b inst < 70 ms at 2 Is for Is < 0.3 In (typically 50 ms)
T value of internal time delay counter
tripping
Overshoot time Reset time
< 35 ms < 50 ms (for T1 = 0)
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6)
(2) Setting ranges in TMS (Time Multiplier Setting) mode
T1
Inverse (SIT) and IEC SIT/A:
Very inverse (VIT) and
IEC VIT/B:
Long time inverse (LTI) and
IEC LTI/B:
Extremely inverse (EIT) and
IEC EIT/C:
IEEE moderately inverse:
IEEE very inverse:
IEEE extremely inverse:
IAC inverse:
IAC very inverse:
IAC extremely inverse:
0.04 to 4.20 0.07 to 8.33 0.01 to 0.93 0.13 to 15.47 0.42 to 51.86 0.73 to 90.57 1.24 to 154.32 0.34 to 42.08 0.61 to 75.75 1.08 to 134.4
(3) Only for standardized IEC, IEEE and IAC tripping curves.
TS/TC equivalence for each protocol
Modbus DNP3
IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850
TC
Binary Output ASDU, FUN, INF LN.DO.DA
TC3
BO08
20, 160, 23
LLN0.SGCB.SetActiveSettingGroup
TC4
BO09
20, 160, 24
LLN0.SGCB.SetActiveSettingGroup
DE80508
PCRED301005EN
55
Protection functions
Phase overcurrent Cold Load Pick-Up/Blocking CLPU 50/51
Description
Operation
The Cold Load Pick-Up I or CLPU 50/51 function avoids nuisance tripping of the phase overcurrent protection (ANSI 50/51), during energization after a long outage. Depending on the installation characteristics, these operations can actually generate transient inrush currents likely to exceed the protection set points. These transient currents may be due to: b the power transformer magnetizing currents b the motor starting currents b simultaneous resetting of all the loads in the installation (air conditioning, heating, etc.).
The CLPU 50/51 function starts if one of the following two conditions is fulfilled: b a phase current is detected after all the currents have disappeared for longer than the time before activation Tcold b input I22 has been activated, indicating a temporary overload due to starting of the load corresponding to the protected feeder, or a feeder downstream.
This detection results in either, depending on the parameter setting of Global action CLPU 50/51, for a predefined duration: b application of a configurable multiplying factor to set point Is of each ANSI 50/51 protection unit b or blocking of the various protection units
In principle, the protection settings should be defined
so as to avoid tripping due to these transient currents. Setting the CLPU 50/51 function parameters allows the user to:
However, if these settings result in inadequate
b define the time before activation Tcold and the pick-up threshold CLPUs
sensitivity levels or delays that are too long, the
b choose which ANSI 50/51 protection units it affects
3
CLPU 50/51 function can be used to increase or inhibit set points temporarily after energization.
b define the type of action (multiplying factor or blocking), its duration T/x and if necessary, the multiplying factor M/x for each ANSI 50/51 protection unit x By default, the CLPU 50/51 function is off.
Block diagram
DE80546
I1 I2 Max I3
CLPU 50/51/x ON
I < 5% In Tcold 0
input I22 Downstream load start up I > CLPUs
&R S
1
& T/x
0
ANSI 50/51 - Unit x
I1 I2 I > M/x.Is 1 I3 2
T
0
&
time-delayed output 51/x
instantaneous
&
output 50/x
Action of the CLPU 50/51 function on set point Is of ANSI 50/51 protection unit x during time delay T/x depends on the Global action CLPU 50/51 setting: 1 multiplication of set point Is by a coefficient M/x
2 blocking
56
CRED301005EN
Protection functions
Phase overcurrent Cold Load Pick-Up/Blocking CLPU 50/51
Characteristics
Time before activation Tcold (Setting common to CLPU 50/51 and CLPU 50N/51N functions)
Setting
0.1 to 300 s
Resolution
10 ms
Accuracy
±2% or ±20 ms
Pick-up threshold CLPUs (Setting common to CLPU 50/51 and CLPU 50N/51N functions)
Setting
10 to 100% In
Resolution
1% In
Accuracy
±5% or ±1% In
Global action CLPU 50/51
Setting
Blocking/multiplication of the set point
Action on ANSI 50/51 protection unit x
Setting
OFF/ON
Time delay T/x for ANSI 50/51 protection unit x
Setting/resolution
100 to 999 ms in 1 ms steps 1 to 999 s in 1 s steps
3
1 to 999 min in 1 min steps
Accuracy
±2% or ±20 ms
Multiplying factor M/x for ANSI 50/51 protection unit x
Setting
100 to 999% Is
Resolution
1% Is
PCRED301005EN
57
Protection functions
3
Breaker failure ANSI code 50BF
Operation
This function is designed to detect when a breaker fails, i.e. when it fails to open when a trip order is sent. The "breaker failure" function is activated: b by a trip order issued by the overcurrent protection functions (50/51, 50N/51N, 46) b by an external trip order sent by logic input I24 (I24 should be assigned to external trip function 5)
It checks that the current has disappeared within the time interval specified by time delay T. It can also take account of the position of the breaker read on the logic inputs to determine effective breaker opening.
When the circuit breaker control function is used, the breaker failure function is activated automatically by protection units 50/51, 50N/51N and 46, which trip the breaker. When the circuit breaker control function is not used, the user has the choice of overcurrent protection functions to associate with the breaker failure protection function.
The protection delayed output should be assigned to a logic output using the control matrix.
Launching and stopping the time delay counter T both depend on the presence of a current above the set point (I > Is) or, according to the parameter setting, on the absence of breaker opening.
Block diagram
DE80107
(I24) external tripping 5
Not accounting for the circuit breaker position Accounting for the circuit breaker position Note: When an external trip order is issued on input I24 of an MES114 module configured for AC, the 50BF operating characteristics are not guaranteed.
58
CRED301005EN
Protection functions
Breaker failure ANSI code 50BF
Setting example
The example below shows how to determine the time delay setting for the breaker failure function: Overcurrent protection setting: T = inst. Circuit breaker operating time: 60 ms Auxiliary relay operating time to open the upstream circuit breaker(s): 10 ms
DE80108
overshoot time 30
3
30
The time delay for the breaker failure function is the sum of the following times: Rise time for the Sepam O1 output relay = 10 ms Circuit breaker opening time = 60 ms Overshoot time for the breaker failure function = 30 ms To avoid nuisance tripping by the upstream breakers, select a margin of approximately 20 ms. This gives a time delay of T = 120 ms.
Characteristics
Is set point
Setting
0.2 In to 2 In
Accuracy (1)
±5%
Resolution
0.1 A
Drop-out/pick-up ratio
(87.5 ±10)%
Time delay T
Setting
0.05 to 300 s
Accuracy (1)
±2%, or 0 ms to +15 ms
Resolution
10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Overshoot time
< 30 ms
Taking into account of the circuit breaker position
Setting
With/without
Choice of protection functions that activate the 50BF protection in the absence of circuit breaker control
50/51-1A, 50/51-1B, 50/51-2A, 50/51-2B, 50N/51N-1A, 50N/51N-1B, 50N/51N-2A
50N/51N-2B, 46
(1) Under reference conditions (IEC 60255-6)
PCRED301005EN
59
Protection functions
Earth fault ANSI code 50N/51N or 50G/51G
Description
The earth fault function comprises 4 independant elements divided into two groups of 2 settings called Group A and Group B respectively.
The Is0 setting is the vertical asymptote of the curve, and T is the operation time delay for 10 Is0. The tripping time for I0/Is0 values of less than 1.2 depends on the type of curve chosen.
The use of the two elements may be chosen by
parameter setting:
Name of curve
b operation with Group A or Group B exclusively, with Standard inverse time (SIT)
Type 1.2
switching from one group to the other dependent on the Very inverse time (VIT or LTI)
1.2
state of logic input I13 exclusively, or by remote control Extremely inverse time (EIT)
1.2
(TC3, TC4),
Ultra inverse time (UIT)
1.2
I13 = 0 group A
RI curve
1
I13 = 1 group B
IEC standard inverse time SIT / A
1
b operation with Group A and Group B active for 4-set IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI / B
1
point operation b enabling/disabling of each group of 2 elements
IEC extremely inverse time EIT / C IEEE moderately inverse (IEC / D)
1 1
(A, B).
IEEE very inverse (IEC / E)
1
3
Operation
Earth fault protection is single-phase.
It picks up if the earth fault current reaches the
operation set point.
It includes a time delay, which is either definite
IEEE extremely inverse (IEC / F)
1
IAC inverse
1
IAC very inverse
1
IAC extremely inverse
1
The curve equations are given in the chapter entitled "IDMT protection functions".
(constant, DT) or IDMT depending on the curves on the facing page. The protection function includes a harmonic 2 restraint set point which can be used to bypass the incorrect residual current on the sum of the 3 phase CTs when the transformers are energized. The restraint can be
The function takes into account current variations during the time delay interval. For currents with a very large amplitude, the protection function has a definite time characteristic: b if I0 > 20 Is0, tripping time is the time that corresponds to 20 Is0 b if I0 > 15 In0, tripping time is the time that corresponds to 15 In0.
selected by parameter setting.
The principle of this harmonic 2 restraint allows this protection to trip on intermittent earth faults.
Block diagram
The protection function can be inhibited by input I23 for the S24 application only.
"
"
DE80520
Definite time protection Is0 is the operation set point expressed in Amps, and T is the protection operation time delay.
& Restraint
I23 Input (for S24)
DE50244
Definite time protection principle.
IDMT protection IDMT protection operates in accordance with the IEC 60255-3, BS 142 and IEEE C-37112 standards.
DE50246
IDMT protection principle.
60
CRED301005EN
Protection functions
Earth fault ANSI code 50N/51N or 50G/51G
DE50247
DE50248
Timer hold delay
Characteristics
The function includes an adjustable timer hold delay T1:
Tripping curve Setting
Definite time,
b definite time (timer hold) for all the tripping curves
Is0 set point Definite time setting
Sum of CTs (1) (5)
IDMT: chosen according to list on previous page
0.1 In0 y Is0 y 15 In0 expressed in Amps 0.1 In0 y Is0 y 15 In0
With CSH sensor
2 A rating
0.2 A to 30 A
20 A rating CT
2 A to 300 A 0.1 In0 y Is0 y 15 In0 (min. 0.1 A)
Core balance CT
with ACE990 IDMT time setting
Sum of CTs (1) (5)
0.1 In0 < Is0 < 15 In0 0.1 In0 y Is0 y In0 (1) expressed in Amps 0.1 In0 y Is0 y In0
With CSH sensor 2 A rating
0.2 A to 2 A
3
20 A rating
2 A to 20 A
CT
0.1 In0 y Is0 y In0 (min. 0.1 A)
Core balance CT with ACE990
0.1 In0 y Is0 y In0
Resolution Accuracy (2)
0.1 A or 1 digit ±5 % or ±0.01 In0
b IDMT for IEC, IEEE and IAC curves
Drop out/pick-up ratio
93.5 % ±5 % (with CSH sensor, CT or core balance CT + ACE990)
93.5 % ±5 % or > (1 - 0.015 In0/Is0) x 100 % (sum of CTs)
I > Is time-delayed output
Harmonic 2 restraint Fixed threshold
17 % ±5 %
I > Is pick-up signal
Time delay T (operation time at 10 Is0)
Setting
Definite time
IDMT (3)
inst. 50 ms y T y 300 s 100 ms y T y 12.5 s or TMS (3)
Resolution Accuracy (2)
Definite time
10 ms or 1 digit ±2 % or from -10 ms to +25 ms
T value of internal time delay counter
tripping
IDMT Timer hold delay T1 Definite time (timer hold) IDMT (4)
class 5 or from -10 ms to +25 ms
0; 0.05 to 300 s 0.5 to 20 s
Characteristic times
T1
Operation time
pick-up < 35 ms at 2 Is0 (typically 25 ms)
confirmed instantaneous: b inst. < 50 ms at 2 Is0 for Is0 u 0.3 In0 (typically 35 ms) b inst. < 70 ms at 2 Is0 for Is0 < 0.3 In0 (typically 50 ms)
Overshoot time
< 35 ms
Reset time
< 40 ms (for T1 = 0)
(1) In0 = In if the sum of the three phase currents is used for the measurement. In0 = sensor rating if the measurement is taken by a CSH core balance CT. In0 = In of the CT if the measurement is taken by a 1 A or 5 A current transformer.
(2) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6). (3) Setting ranges in TMS (Time Multiplier Setting) mode
Inverse (SIT) and IECIEC SIT/A: 0.04 to 4.20 Very inverse (VIT) and IEC VIT/B: 0.07 to 8.33 Very inverse (LTI) and IEC LTI/B:0.01 to 0.93 Ext inverse (EIT) and IEC EIT/C: 0.13 to 15.47 IEEE moderately inverse: 0.42 to 51.86 IEEE very inverse: 0.73 to 90.57 IEEE extremely inverse: 1.24 to 154.32 IAC inverse: 0.34 to 42.08 IAC very inverse: 0.61 to 75.75 IAC extremely inverse:1.08 to 134.4 (4) Only for standardized tripping curves of the IEC, IEEE and IAC types. (5) For Is0 < 0.4 In0, the minimum time delay is 300 ms. If a shorter time delay is needed, use the CT + CSH30 or CT + CCA634 combination.
TS/TC equivalence for each protocol
Modbus DNP3
IEC 60870-5-103 IEC 61850
TC
Binary Output ASDU, FUN, INF LN.DO.DA
TC3
BO08
TC4
BO09
20, 160, 23 20, 160, 24
LLN0.SGCB.SetActiveSettingGroup LLN0.SGCB.SetActiveSettingGroup
PCRED301005EN
61
Protection functions
Earth fault Cold Load Pick-Up/Blocking CLPU 50N/51N
Description
Operation
The Cold Load Pick-Up I0 or CLPU 50N/51N function avoids nuisance tripping of the earth fault protection
The CLPU 50N/51N function starts if one of the following conditions is fulfilled: b a phase current is detected after all the currents have disappeared for longer than
(ANSI 50N/51N) during energization after a long outage.
the time before activation Tcold b input I22 has been activated, indicating a temporary overload due to starting of the
Depending on the installation characteristics, such
load corresponding to the protected feeder, or a feeder downstream.
operations can actually generate transient inrush
currents.
This detection results in either, depending on the parameter setting of Global action
If the residual current measurement is based on the sum of the 3 phase CTs, the aperiodic component of
CLPU 50N/51N, for a predefined duration: b application of a configurable multiplying factor to set point Is0 of each
these transient currents can result in saturation of the phase CTs, which can result in a residual current
ANSI 50N/51N protection unit b or blocking of the various protection units
measurement likely to exceed the protection set points.
These transient currents are essentially due to:
Setting the CLPU 50N/51N function parameters allows the user to:
b the power transformer magnetizing currents
b define the time before activation Tcold and the pick-up threshold CLPUs
b the motor starting currents
b choose which ANSI 50N/51N protection units it affects
3
In principle, the protection settings should be defined so as to avoid tripping due to these transient currents. However, if these settings result in inadequate
b define the type of action (multiplying factor or blocking), its duration T0/x and if necessary, the multiplying factor M0/x for each ANSI 50N/51N protection unit x By default, the CLPU 50N/51N function is off.
sensitivity levels or delays that are too long, the CLPU 50N/51N function is used to increase or inhibit set points temporarily after energization. If the residual current is measured by a correctly
Setting assistance
During use with multiplying factor M0/x, it is advisable to set the Is0 set point of the 50N/51N protection unit higher than the pick-up threshold CLPUs.
installed CT, there is less risk of measuring an incorrect
residual current. In this case, there is no need to use
the CLPU 50N/51N function.
CLPU 50N/51N/x ON
Block diagram
DE80547
I1 I2 Max I3
I < 5% In Tcold 0
input I22 Downstream load start up I > CLPUs
& R S
1
& T0/x 0
ANSI 50N/51N - Unit x
I1
I2 I > M0/x.Is0
T
1 I3
2
0 &
time-delayed output 51N/x
instantaneous
&
output 50N/x
Action of the CLPU 50N/51N function on set point Is0 of ANSI 50N/51N protection unit x during time delay T0/x depends on the Global action CLPU 50N/51N setting: 1 multiplication of set point Is0 by a coefficient M0/x 2 blocking
62
CRED301005EN
Protection functions
Earth fault Cold Load Pick-Up/Blocking CLPU 50N/51N
Characteristics
Time before activation Tcold (Setting common to CLPU 50/51 and CLPU 50N/51N functions)
Setting
0.1 to 300 s
Resolution
10 ms
Accuracy
±2% or ±20 ms
Pick-up threshold CLPUs (Setting common to CLPU 50/51 and CLPU 50N/51N functions)
Setting
10 to 100% In
Resolution
1% In
Accuracy
±5% or ±1% In
Global action CLPU 50N/51N
Setting
Blocking/multiplication of the set point
Action on ANSI 50N/51N protection unit x
Setting
OFF/ON
Time delay T0/x for ANSI 50N/51N protection unit x
Setting/resolution
100 to 999 ms in 1 ms steps 1 to 999 s in 1 s steps
3
1 to 999 min in 1 min steps
Accuracy
±2% or ±20 ms
Multiplying factor M0/x for ANSI 50N/51N protection unit x
Setting
100 to 999% Is0
Resolution
1% Is0
PCRED301005EN
63
Protection functions
Phase-to-phase overvoltage ANSI code 59
Operation
This protection is three-phase: b it picks up when one of the phase-to-phase voltages concerned is greater than the Us set point b the protection includes a definite time delay.
Block diagram
U21
U32
U > Us
U13
T0
time-delayed output "pick-up" signal
MT10876
Characteristics
3
Us set point Setting
50% to 150% Unp if Uns < 208 V
50% to 135% Unp if Uns u 208 V
Accuracy (1)
±2 % or 0.005 Unp
Resolution
1 %
Drop-out/pick-up ratio
97 % ±1 %
Time delay T
Setting
50 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1)
±2 %, or ±25 ms
Resolution
10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time
pick-up < 35 ms (typically 25 ms)
Overshoot time
< 35 ms
Reset time
< 40 ms
(1) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
64
CRED301005EN
Protection functions
Neutral voltage displacement ANSI code 59N
Operation
The protection function picks up if the residual voltage V0 is above a Vs0 set point, with V0 = V1 + V2 + V3 , b it includes a definite time delay T b the residual voltage is either calculated from the 3 phase voltages or measured by an external VT.
Block diagram
DE50249
3
Characteristics
Vs0 set point Setting
2 % Unp to 80 % Unp if Vns0 (2) = sum of 3Vs 2 % Unp to 80 % Unp if Vns0 (2) = Uns/3
Accuracy (1)
5 % Unp to 80 % Unp if Vns0 (2) = Uns/3 ±2 % or ±0.005 Unp
Resolution
1 %
Drop-out/pick-up ratio
97 % ±1 %
Time delay T
Setting
50 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1)
±2 %, or ±25 ms
Resolution
10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times
Operation time
pick-up < 55 ms
Overshoot time
< 35 ms
Reset time
< 55 ms
(1) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
(2) Vns0 is one of the general settings.
PCRED301005EN
65
Protection functions
Starts per hour ANSI code 66
Operation
This function is three-phase. It picks up when the number of starts reaches the following limits: b maximum number of starts allowed per period of time (P) (Nt) b maximum allowed number of consecutive hot starts (Nh) b maximum allowed number of consecutive cold starts (Nc). The function indicates: b the number of starts still allowed before the maximum, if the protection has not picked up. The number of starts depends on the motor's thermal state b waiting time before a start is allowed, if the protection has picked up. Starting is detected when the current consumed becomes greater than 10 % of the Ib current.
User information
The following information is available for the user: b the waiting time before a start is allowed b the number of starts still allowed.
3
See chapter "Machine operation assistance functions".
The number of consecutive starts is the number starts counted during the last P/Nt
minutes, Nt being the number of starts allowed per period.
The motor hot state corresponds to the overshooting of the fixed set point (50 % heat
rise) of the thermal overload function.
When the motor re-accelerates, it undergoes a stress similar to that of starting
without the current first passing through a value less than 10 % of Ib, in which case
the number of starts is not incremented.
It is possible however to increment the number of starts when a re-acceleration
occurs by a logic data input (input I22).
Block diagram
MT10871
I1 I2 I > 0.1Ib I3
input I22
& 0T
1
k1 > Nt P mn
1 k2 > Nc
P mn/Nt
inhibit closing
thermal alarm (hot state)
&
k3 > Nh
P mn/Nt
"Clear"
Characteristics
Period of time (P)
Setting
1 to 6 hr
Resolution
1
Nt total number of starts
Setting
1 to 60
Resolution
1
Nh and Nc number of consecutive starts
Setting (1)
1 to Nt
Resolution
1
T time delay between starts Setting
0 mn y T y 90 mn (0: no time delay)
Resolution (1) With Nc y Nf.
1 mn or 1 digit
66
CRED301005EN
Protection functions
Recloser ANSI code 79
Operation
Initialization of the recloser The recloser is ready to operate if all of the following conditions are met: b "CB control" function activated and recloser in service b circuit breaker closed b inhibition time delay not running b none of the recloser inhibition conditions is true (see further on).
Recloser cycles b case of a cleared fault: v following a reclosing order, if the fault does not appear after the memory time delay
has run out, the recloser reinitializes and a message appears on the display (see
example 1) b case of a fault that is not cleared: v following instantaneous or time-delayed tripping by the protection unit, activation
of the isolation time delay associated with the first active cycle. At the end of the time delay, a closing order is given, which activates the memory time delay.
3
If the protection unit detects the fault before the end of the time delay, a tripping order
is given and the following reclosing cycle is activated. v after all the active cycles have been run, if the fault still persists, a final trip order
is given, a message appears on the display and closing is locked out until
acknowledgment takes place, according to the parameter setting of the protection
function b closing on a fault.
If the circuit breaker closes on a fault, or if the fault appears before the end of the
lockout time delay, the recloser is inhibited.
Recloser inhibition conditions The recloser is inhibited according to the following conditions: b voluntary open or close order b recloser put out of service b receipt of a lockout order on the lockout logic input I26 b appearance of a switchgear-related fault, such as trip circuit fault, or unexecture
control order fault b opening of the circuit breaker by external tripping via inputs I21, I22 or I23.
Characteristics
Reclosing cycles
Setting
Number of cycles Activation of cycle 1 (1)
overcurrent 1
1 to 4 inst. / delayed / inactive
overcurrent 2
inst. / delayed / inactive
earth fault 1
inst. / delayed / inactive
Activation of cycles 2, 3 and 4 (1)
earth fault 2 overcurrent 1
inst. / delayed / inactive inst. / delayed / inactive
overcurrent 2
inst. / delayed / inactive
earth fault 1
inst. / delayed / inactive
earth fault 2
inst. / delayed / inactive
Time delays
Memory time delay
0.05 to 300 s
Isolation time delay
cycle 1
0.05 to 300 s
cycle 2
0.05 to 300 s
cycle 3
0.05 to 300 s
cycle 4
0.05 to 300 s
Lockout time delay
0.05 to 300 s
Accuracy
±2 % or 25 ms
Resolution
10 ms or 1 digit
(1) If a protection function that is inactive in relation to the recloser leads to circuit breaker opening, the recloser is inhibited.
PCRED301005EN
67
Protection functions
Recloser ANSI code 79
MT10879
Example 1: case of successful reclosing after the first cycle. Activation with 300 ms time-delayed O/C protection
Instantaneous O/C Time-delayed O/C
300 ms
I12 (closed position)
CB open command
3
I11 (open position)
CB close command
Reclosing in progress (TS35) Reclosing successful (TS37)
inhibition time delay cycle 1 isolation time delay
disengagement time delay "cleared fault" message
MT10880
Example 2: case of definitive tripping after two cycles activated by 300 ms time-delayed O/C protection
Instantaneous O/C
300 ms
300 ms
300 ms
Time-delayed O/C
I12 (closed position)
inhibition time delay
CB open command
I11 (open position)
CB close command
Reclosing in progress (TS35) Definitive tripping (TS37)
cycle 1 isolation time delay
cycle 2 isolation time delay
"permanent fault" message
68
CRED301005EN
Protection functions
Overfrequency ANSI code 81H
MT10542
Operation
The protection function picks up when the positive sequence voltage frequency is above the set point and the positive sequence voltage is more than 20 % of Vnp (Unp/3). If a single VT is connected (U21), the function picks up when the frequency is higher than the set point and the U21 voltage is more than 20 % of Unp. It includes a definite time delay T.
Block diagram
U32 Vd
U21
&
F > Fs
T0
time-delayed output
Vd > 0.2 Vnp(1) (1) or U21 > 0.2 Unp if only one VT.
"pick-up" signal
3
If there is only one sensor (U21), the voltage signal is connected to terminals 1 and 2 of the connector CCT640, whatever the phase.
Characteristics
Fs set point
Setting
50 to 53 Hz or 60 to 63 Hz
Resolution
0.1 Hz
Accuracy (1)
±0.1 Hz
Pick-up / drop-out difference
0.2 Hz ±0.1 Hz
Time delay T
Setting
100 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1)
±2 % or ±25 ms
Resolution
10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times (1)
Operation time
pick-up < 100 ms (typically 80 ms)
Overshoot time
< 100 ms
Reset time
< 100 ms
(1) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6) and df/dt < 3 Hz/s.
PCRED301005EN
69
Protection functions
Underfrequency ANSI code 81L
Operation
The function picks up when the positive sequence voltage frequency is below the set point and if the positive sequence voltage is more than 20 % of Vnp (Unp/3). If a single VT is connected (U21), the function picks up when the frequency is below the set point and the U21 voltage is more than 20 % of Unp. It includes a definite time delay T.
Block diagram
U32
U21
Vd
&
F < Fs
T0
time-delayed output
MT10543
"pick-up" sortie
Vd > 0.2 Vnp(1)
3
(1) Or U21 > 0.2 Unp if only one VT.
If there is only one sensor (U21), the voltage signal is connected to terminals 1 and 2 of the connector CCT640, whatever the phase.
Characteristics
Fs set point
Setting
45 to 50 Hz or 55 to 60 Hz
Resolution
0.1 Hz
Accuracy (1)
±0.1 Hz
Pick-up / drop-out difference
0.2 Hz ±0.1 Hz
Time delay T
Setting
100 ms to 300 s
Accuracy (1)
±2 % or ±25 ms
Resolution
10 ms or 1 digit
Characteristic times (1)
Operation time
pick-up < 100 ms (typically 80 ms)
Overshoot time
< 100 ms
Reset time
< 100 ms
(1) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6) and df/dt < 3 Hz/s.
70
CRED301005EN
Protection functions
Rate of change of frequency ANSI code 81R
MT10877
Operation
This function picks up when the rate of change of frequency (ROCOF) of the positive sequence voltage overshoots the set point. If only one VT is connected (U21), the function is inhibited. It includes a definite time delay T.
Block diagram
Vd f
< Fmax
> + dFs/dt
> Fmin
& dF/dt
T0 1
time delayed output
> 0.5 Vn
< - dFs/dt
signal "pick-up"
3
Characteristics
dFs/dt set point
Setting
Resolution
Accuracy
tripping
no tripping
Time delay T
Setting
Accuracy
Resolution
Characteristic times (1)
Operation time
Overshoot time
Reset time
(1) In reference conditions (IEC 60255-6).
0.1 to 10 Hz/s 0.1 Hz/s ±5 % or ±0.1 Hz/s ±3 % or ±0.05 Hz/s
100 ms to 300 s ±2 % or ±25 ms 10 ms or 1 digit
pick-up < 170 ms (130 ms typical) < 100 ms < 100 ms
PCRED301005EN
71
Protection functions
General Tripping curves
Presentation of tripping curve operation and
settings for protection functions using: b definite time b IDMT b timer hold.
MT10911
Definite time protection
The tripping time is constant. The time delay is started when the set point is overrun.
t
T
Is
I
Definite time protection principle.
IDMT protection
3
The operation time depends on the protected value (phase current, earth fault current, etc.) in accordance with standards IEC 60255-3, BS 142 and IEEE C~37112.
Operation is represented by a characteristic curve, e.g.: b t = f(I) curve for the phase overcurrent function b t = f(I0) curve for the earth fault function.
The rest of the document is based on t = f(I); the reasoning may be extended to other
variables I0, etc.
The curve is defined by: b its type (standard inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse, etc.) b current setting Is which corresponds to the vertical asymptote of the curve b time delay T which corresponds to the operation time for I = 10 Is.
These 3 settings are made chronologically in the following order: type, Is current,
time delay T.
Changing the time delay T setting by x % changes all of the operation times in the
curve by x %.
type 1 t
type 1,2
DE50666
T
1 1,2
10
IDMT protection principle.
20
I/Is
The tripping time for I/Is values less than 1.2 depends on the type of curve selected.
Name of curve
Standard inverse time (SIT) Very inverse time (VIT or LTI) Extremely inverse time (EIT) Ultra inverse time (UIT) RI curve IEC inverse time SIT / A IEC very inverse time VIT or LTI / B IEC extremely inverse time EIT / C IEEE moderately inverse (IEC / D) IEEE very inverse (IEC / E) IEEE extremely inverse (IEC / F) IAC inverse IAC very inverse IAC extremely inverse
Type
1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
b when the monitored value is more than 20 times the set point, the tripping time is limited to the value corresponding to 20 times the set point. b if the monitored value exceeds the measurement capacity of Sepam (40 In for the phase current channels, 20 In0 for the residual current channels), the tripping time is limited to the value corresponding to the largest measurable value (40 In or 20 In0).
72
CRED301005EN
Protection functions
General Tripping curves
Equation
td(I)
=
----------k-----------
I--Is-
1
×
T--
Equation
td(I)
=
----I---Is------A-p---------1-
+
B
×
T--
Equation
Current IDMT tripping curves
Multiple IDMT tripping curves are offered, to cover most applications: b IEC curves (SIT, VIT/LTI, EIT) b IEEE curves (MI, VI, EI) b commonly used curves (UIT, RI, IAC).
IEC curves
Curve type
Coefficient values
k
Standard inverse / A
0.14
0.02
2.97
Very inverse / B
13.5
1
1.50
Long time inverse / B
120
1
13.33
Extremely inverse / C
80
2
0.808
Ultra inverse
315.2
2.5
1
RI curve
Equation:
td(I) = 0----.--3---3---9----------0---.-1-2---3---6-------I---I-s----------1- × 3----.--1--T-7---0----6-
3
IEEE curves
Curve type
Moderately inverse Very inverse Extremely inverse
Coefficient values
A
B
p
0.010
0.023
0.02
3.922
0.098
2
5.64
0.0243
2
0.241 0.138 0.081
IAC curves
Curve type
Inverse Very inverse Extremely inverse
Coefficient values
A
B
0.208 0.863
0.090 0.795
0.004 0.638
C 0.800 0.100 0.620
D -0.418 -1.288 1.787
E 0.195 7.958 0.246
0.297 0.165 0.092
td(I)
=
A
+
---I---I-s----B-----C-----
+
---I---I-s-----D----C-------2-
+
---I---I-s------E---C-------3-
x
T-----
PCRED301005EN
73
Protection functions
General Tripping curves
DE51630
DE51629
Example.
3
Setting of IDMT tripping curves, time delay T or TMS factor
The time delays of current IDMT tripping curves (except for customized and RI curves) may be set as follows: b time T, operating time at 10 x Is b TMS factor, factor shown as T/ in the equations on the left. Example: t(I) = -I---1-I-s----3---.--5-1-- × TMS where TMS = 1---T-.--5- . The IEC curve of the VIT type is positioned so as to be the same with TMS = 1 or T = 1.5 s.
Timer hold
The adjustable timer hold T1 is used for: b detection of restriking faults (DT curve) b coordination with electromechanical relays (IDMT curve). b Timer hold may be inhibited if necessary. Equation for IDMT timer hold curve Equation: tr(I) = 1--------T----1-I----I-s------2-- × T--- where T--- = TMS . T1 = timer hold setting (timer hold for I reset = 0 and TMS = 1) T = tripping time delay setting (at 10 Is) b = basic tripping curve value at -1---0----k--------1-- .
Detection of restriking faults with adjustable timer hold.
DE50754
DE50755
Timer hold dependent on current I.
Constant timer hold.
74
CRED301005EN
Protection functions
General Tripping curves
Implementing IDMT curves: examples of Problem 2.
problems to be solved.
Problem 1. Given the type of IDMT, determine the Is current and time delay T settings. Theoretically, the Is current setting corresponds to the
Given the type of IDMT, the Is current setting and a point k (Ik, tk) on the operation curve, determine the time delay setting T. On the standard curve of the same type, read the operation time tsk that corresponds to the relative current Ik/Is and the operation time Ts10 that corresponds to the relative current I/Is = 10.
maximum continuous current: it is generally the rated current of the protected equipment (cable, transformer). The time delay T corresponds to operation at 10 Is on
The time delay setting to be used so that the operation curve passes through the point k (Ik, tk) is:
ts
MT10215
the curve. This setting is determined taking into account the constraints involved in discrimination with
T = Ts10 × t--t-s--k--k--
the upstream and downstream protection devices.
The discrimination constraint leads to the definition of point A on the operation curve (IA, tA), e.g. the point
tk
k
that corresponds to the maximum fault current for the
downstream protection device.
tsk
Ts10
3
1
Ik/Is 10
I/Is
Another practical method: the table below gives the values of K = ts/ts10 as a function of I/Is. In the column that corresponds to the type of time delay, read the value K = tsk/Ts10 on the line for Ik/Is. The time delay setting to be used so that the operation curve
passes through point k (Ik, tk) is: T = tk/k.
Example Data: b type of time delay: standard inverse time (SIT) b set point: Is b a point k on the operation curve: k (3.5 Is; 4 s)
Question: What is the time delay T setting (operation time at 10 Is)? Reading the table: SIT column, line I/Is = 3.5 therefore K = 1.858 Answer: The time delay setting is T = 4/1.858 = 2.15 s
PCRED301005EN
75
Protection functions
General Tripping curves
Problem 3. Given the Is current and time delay T settings for a type of time delay (standard inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse), find the operation time for a current value IA. On the standard curve of the same type, read the operation time tsA that corresponds to the relative current IA/Is and the operation time Ts10 that corresponds to the relative current I/Is = 10. The operation time tA for the current IA with the Is and T settings is tA = tsA x T/Ts10.
ts
Another practical method: the table below gives the values of K = ts/Ts10 as a function of I/Is. In the column that corresponds to the type of time delay, read the value K = tsA/Ts10 on the line for IA/Is, the operation time tA for the current IA with the Is and T settings is tA = K . T.
Example Data: b type of time delay: very inverse time (VIT) b set point: Is b time delay T = 0.8 s. Question: What is the operation time for the current IA = 6 Is? Reading the table: VIT column, line I/Is = 6, therefore k = 1.8
Answer: The operation time for the current IA is t = 1.80 x 0.8 = 1.44 s.
tA
3
T tsA
Ts10
1
IA/Is 10
I/Is
Table of K values
I/Is
SIT
VIT, LTI EIT
UIT
and IEC/A and IEC/B and IEC/C
1.0
3
1.1
24.700 (1) 90.000 (1) 471.429 (1)
1.2
12.901
45.000
225.000 545.905
1.5
5.788
18.000
79.200
179.548
2.0
3.376
9.000
33.000
67.691
2.5
2.548
6.000
18.857
35.490
3.0
2.121
4.500
12.375
21.608
3.5
1.858
3.600
8.800
14.382
4.0
1.676
3.000
6.600
10.169
4.5
1.543
2.571
5.143
7.513
5.0
1.441
2.250
4.125
5.742
5.5
1.359
2.000
3.385
4.507
6.0
1.292
1.800
2.829
3.616
6.5
1.236
1.636
2.400
2.954
7.0
1.188
1.500
2.063
2.450
7.5
1.146
1.385
1.792
2.060
8.0
1.110
1.286
1.571
1.751
8.5
1.078
1.200
1.390
1.504
9.0
1.049
1.125
1.238
1.303
9.5
1.023
1.059
1.109
1.137
10.0
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
10.5
0.979
0.947
0.906
0.885
11.0
0.959
0.900
0.825
0.787
11.5
0.941
0.857
0.754
0.704
12.0
0.925
0.818
0.692
0.633
12.5
0.910
0.783
0.638
0.572
13.0
0.895
0.750
0.589
0.518
13.5
0.882
0.720
0.546
0.471
14.0
0.870
0.692
0.508
0.430
14.5
0.858
0.667
0.473
0.394
15.0
0.847
0.643
0.442
0.362
15.5
0.836
0.621
0.414
0.334
16.0
0.827
0.600
0.388
0.308
16.5
0.817
0.581
0.365
0.285
17.0
0.808
0.563
0.344
0.265
17.5
0.800
0.545
0.324
0.246
18.0
0.792
0.529
0.307
0.229
18.5
0.784
0.514
0.290
0.214
19.0
0.777
0.500
0.275
0.200
19.5
0.770
0.486
0.261
0.188
20.0
0.763
0.474
0.248
0.176
(1) Values only suitable for IEC A, B and C curves.
RI
.062 2.534 2.216 1.736 1.427 1.290 1.212 1.161 1.126 1.101 1.081 1.065 1.053 1.042 1.033 1.026 1.019 1.013 1.008 1.004 1.000 0.996 0.993 0.990 0.988 0.985 0.983 0.981 0.979 0.977 0.976 0.974 0.973 0.971 0.970 0.969 0.968 0.967 0.966 0.965 0.964
IEEE MI (IEC/D) 22.461 11.777 5.336 3.152 2.402 2.016 1.777 1.613 1.492 1.399 1.325 1.264 1.213 1.170 1.132 1.099 1.070 1.044 1.021 1.000 0.981 0.963 0.947 0.932 0.918 0.905 0.893 0.882 0.871 0.861 0.852 0.843 0.834 0.826 0.819 0.812 0.805 0.798 0.792 0.786
IEEE VI (IEC/E) 136.228 65.390 23.479 10.199 6.133 4.270 3.242 2.610 2.191 1.898 1.686 1.526 1.402 1.305 1.228 1.164 1.112 1.068 1.031 1.000 0.973 0.950 0.929 0.912 0.896 0.882 0.870 0.858 0.849 0.840 0.831 0.824 0.817 0.811 0.806 0.801 0.796 0.792 0.788 0.784
IEEE EI (IEC/F) 330.606 157.946 55.791 23.421 13.512 8.970 6.465 4.924 3.903 3.190 2.671 2.281 1.981 1.744 1.555 1.400 1.273 1.166 1.077 1.000 0.934 0.877 0.828 0.784 0.746 0.712 0.682 0.655 0.631 0.609 0.589 0.571 0.555 0.540 0.527 0.514 0.503 0.492 0.482 0.473
IAC I
62.005 19.033 9.413 3.891 2.524 2.056 1.792 1.617 1.491 1.396 1.321 1.261 1.211 1.170 1.135 1.105 1.078 1.055 1.035 1.016 1.000 0.985 0.972 0.960 0.949 0.938 0.929 0.920 0.912 0.905 0.898 0.891 0.885 0.879 0.874 0.869 0.864 0.860 0.855 0.851 0.848
IAC VI
62.272 45.678 34.628 17.539 7.932 4.676 3.249 2.509 2.076 1.800 1.610 1.473 1.370 1.289 1.224 1.171 1.126 1.087 1.054 1.026 1.000 0.977 0.957 0.939 0.922 0.907 0.893 0.880 0.868 0.857 0.846 0.837 0.828 0.819 0.811 0.804 0.797 0.790 0.784 0.778 0.772
IAC EI
200.226 122.172 82.899 36.687 16.178 9.566 6.541 4.872 3.839 3.146 2.653 2.288 2.007 1.786 1.607 1.460 1.337 1.233 1.144 1.067 1.000 0.941 0.888 0.841 0.799 0.761 0.727 0.695 0.667 0.641 0.616 0.594 0.573 0.554 0.536 0.519 0.504 0.489 0.475 0.463 0.450
76
CRED301005EN
MT10528 MT10529
MT10539 MT10540
Protection functions
General Tripping curves
Standard inverse time (SIT) curve Very inverse time (VIT or LTI) curve RI curve
t (s) 100.00
Extremely inverse time (EIT) curve Ultra inverse time (UIT) curve
t (s) 1 000.00
10.00
curve (T = 1s)
100.00 10.00
curve (T = 1s)
1.00
0.10 1
IEEE curves
t (s) 10000.00
RI inverse time SIT
1.00
very inverse time VIT or LTI
I/Is
0.10
10
100
1
IAC curves
t (s) 1 000.00
extremely inverse EIT
ultra inverse UIT
I/Is
10
100
1000.00
100.00 10.00
MI VI
EI
1.00
0.10
1
10
100.00 10.00
I VI
EI
1.00
I/Is
0.10
100
1
10
I/Is 100
PCRED301005EN
3
77
3
78
CRED301005EN
Control and monitoring functions
Contents
Description Definition of symbols Assignment of logic inputs / outputs Circuit breaker / contactor control Logic discrimination Disturbance recording triggering Switching of groups of settings Indications Control matrix Self-tests and fail-safe position
80 81 82 83 87 89 90 91 93 94
4
PCRED301005EN
79
Control and monitoring functions
Description
Sepam performs the control and monitoring functions required for electrical network operation.
Predefined functions
The main control and monitoring functions are predefined and fit the most frequent cases of use. They are ready to use and are implemented by simple parameter setting after the necessary logic inputs / outputs are assigned. The predefined control and monitoring functions can be adapted for particular needs by customization of the control matrix using the SFT2841 software.
Control matrix
The control matrix is a simple way to assign data from: b protection functions b predefined control and monitoring functions b logic inputs to the following output data: b output relays b 9 LEDs on the front panel of Sepam b triggering of disturbance recording.
Operating principle
The processing of each control and monitoring function may be broken down into 3
phases:
b acquisition of input data:
4
v results of protection function processing v external logic data, connected to the logic inputs of an optional MES114 input / output module
v remote control orders (TC) received via the communication link
b actual processing of the control and monitoring function
b utilization of the processing results:
v activation of output relays to control an actuator
v information sent to the facility manager:
- by message and/or LED on the Sepam display and SFT2841 software
- by remote indication (TS) via the communication link.
DE51156
Logic inputs and outputs
The number of Sepam inputs / outputs must be adapted to fit the control and monitoring functions used. The 4 outputs included in the Sepam series 20 base unit may be extended by adding one MES114 modules with 10 logic inputs and 4 output relays. After selecting the MES114 type required by an application, the logic inputs must be
assigned to functions.
80
CRED301005EN
DE50675
DE50676
Control and monitoring functions
Definition of symbols
The symbols used in the different block diagrams describing the control and monitoring functions are defined on this page.
Logic functions
b "OR"
DE50681
Pulse mode operation
b "on" pulse: used to create a short-duration pulse (1 cycle) each time a signal appears
Equation: S = X + Y + Z. b "AND"
b "off" pulse: used to create a short-duration pulse (1 cycle) each time a signal disappears.
DE50682
Equation: S = X x Y x Z.
b exclusive "XOR"
4
S = 1 if one and only one input is set to 1 (S = 1 if X + Y + Z = 1).
b Complement These functions may use the complement of one or more input values.
Note: the disappearance of a signal may be caused by an auxiliary power failure.
Bistable functions
Bistable functions may be used to store values.
DE50683
Equation: S = X (S = 1 if X = 0).
Delay timers
Two types of delay timers: b "on" delay timer: used to delay the appearance of a signal by a time T
Equation: B = S + R x B.
b "off" delay timer: used to delay the disappearance of a signal by a time T.
DE50677
DE50678
DE50679
DE50680
PCRED301005EN
81
Control and monitoring functions
Assignment of logic inputs / outputs
The use of the preset control and monitoring functions requires exclusive parameter setting and particular wiring of the inputs according to their application and the type of Sepam. The advanced UMI or the SFT2841 software may be used to assign inputs and set the control and monitoring function parameters. Since an input may only be assigned to a single function, not all the functions are available at the same time. Example: if the logic discrimination function is used, the switching of groups of settings function may not be used.
Table of input/output assignment by application
Functions
S20
S24
T20
T24
M20
B21 - B22 Assignment
Logic inputs Open position
Closed position
Logic discrimination, receive blocking input Switching of groups of settings A/B
External reset
External tripping 4 (1)
External tripping 1 (1)
External network synchronization
External tripping 2 (1)
4
Motor reacceleration Downstream load Start up
External tripping 3 (1)
Buchholz alarm (1) (Buchholz alarm message)
Rotor rotation detection
Thermistor tripping (1)
Inhibit earth fault protection
End of charging position Thermostat alarm (1) (thermostat alarm message) Thermistor alarm (1) External tripping 5 and 50BF activation (1)
Inhibit remote control, excluding TC1 (1) Inhibit remote control, including TC1 (1) SF6-1
SF6-2 Change of thermal settings Inhibit thermal overload Inhibit recloser
b
b
b
b
b
b
I11
b
b
b
b
b
b
I12
b
b
b
b
I13
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
I14
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b (2)
b (2)
b
b
I21
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b (3)
b
b
I22
b
b
b
b
b
b (4)
b (4)
b
b
I23
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
I24
b
b
b
b
b
b(1)
b(1)
b
b
b
b
b
b
I25
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
I26
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Logic outputs Tripping Inhibit closing Watchdog Close order
b
b
b
b
b
b
O1
b
b
b
b
b
b
O2
b
b
b
b
b
b
O4
b
b
b
b
b
b
O11
Note: all of the logic inputs are available via the communication link and are accessible in the SFT2841 control matrix for other non predefined applications.
(1) These inputs have parameter setting with the prefix "NEG" for undervoltage type operation. (2) Buchholz/Gas trip message. (3) Thermostat trip message. (4) Pressure trip message.
82
CRED301005EN
Control and monitoring functions
Circuit breaker / contactor control ANSI code 94/69
Description
Sepam may be used to control breaking devices equipped with different types of closing and tripping coils. b circuit breaker with shunt trip or undervoltage tripping coil (parameter set on the front of the advanced UMI or in SFT2841) b latching contactor with shunt trip coil. Two breaking device control modes are available: b use of operating mechanism integrated in the circuit breaker / contactor This logical function processes all the circuit breaker closing and tripping conditions based on: v breaking device status information v remote control orders v protection functions v specific program logic for each application (e.g. recloser) v etc. This function also inhibits closing of the breaking device according to the operating conditions. b use of customized program logic A control and monitoring resource assignment matrix may be used to create customized program logic.
Operating mechanism integrated in the circuit breaker /
contactor
For operation in accordance with the block diagram, the Sepam must have the logic inputs required (an MES114 module must therefore be included) and the related
4
parameter setting and wiring must be done.
Remote control Circuit breaker/contactor tripping can be controlled remotely via the communication link using the following remote control orders: b TC1: Circuit breaker/contactor tripping b TC2: Circuit breaker/contactor closing b TC5: Sepam acknowledgment (reset) These orders can be globally inhibited by logic input I25. According to the parameter setting of logic input I25, the tripping remote control order TC1 can be activated at any time or it can be inhibited.
TS/TC equivalence for each protocol
Modbus DNP3
IEC 60870-5-103
TC
Binary Output ASDU, FUN, INF
TC1
BO0
20, 21, 1 (OFF)
TC2
BO1
20, 21, 1 (ON)
TC5
BO2
20, 160, 19
IEC 61850
LN.DO.DA CSWI1.POS.ctlVal CSWI1.POS.ctlVal LLN0.LEDRs.ctlVal
Circuit breaker / contactor control with lockout function (ANSI 86)
The ANSI 86 function traditionally performed by lockout relays may be carried out by Sepam using the predefined Circuit breaker / contactor control function, with latching of all tripping conditions (protection function outputs and logic inputs). With this function, Sepam performs the following: b grouping of all tripping conditions and breaking device control b latching of the tripping order with inhibition of closing until the cause of tripping disappears and is acknowledged by the user (see "Latching / acknowledgment") b indication of the cause of tripping: v locally by signal lamps ("Trip" and others) and by messages on the display v remotely by remote indications.
PCRED301005EN
83
Control and monitoring functions
Circuit breaker / contactor control ANSI code 94/69
Block diagram (1): Sepam S20, S23, S24, T20, T23, T24 or M20
DE80521
(I24) external tripping 5
4
(I25) Inhibit remote control, TC1 included
tripping due to protection
checkword bit 4
DE80523
(I25) pressure drop SF6.1 (I26) pressure drop SF6.2
(I21) external tripping 1 (I22) external tripping 2 (I23) external tripping 3 (I14) external tripping 4
(TC2) close order (I25) remote control disable
Block diagram (1): Sepam B21 (3) or B22
T0 T = 200 ms
trip circuit fault
(2)
open order
&
(I25) Inhibit remote control TC1 included
(I12) device closed
&
0T T = 200 ms
0T
&
T = 200 ms
(I12) device & close
O2
inhibit
closing
check-
word
tripping due bit 4
to protection
O1
tripping
(shunt/ undervoltage)
&
O11
close order
(1) The information used in the logic depends on the Sepam type, the presence of MES114 options and the parameter settings. (2) Usual scenario corresponding to the O2 "undervoltage" parameter setting. (3) Performs B20 type functions.
(TC1) open order
1 TC15
0 TC16
1 Open order
Monitoring Modbus S-LAN communication
Description
The Monitoring Modbus S-LAN communication function is used to trip the circuitbreaker in the event of loss of communication with the Modbus master. This function is inhibited by default. It is activated with remote control order TC15 and can be inhibited after activation with remote control order TC16. Activation of this function is saved on loss of the auxiliary power supply. Loss of communication with the Modbus master is detected by the Sepam unit when remote control order TC15 has not been rewritten by the Modbus master at the end of an adjustable time delay T. The value of time delay T is set by the Modbus communication to address 01F4. The setting range for the time delay is between 1 and 6553 s, in 0.1 s steps (default value 10 s).
84
CRED301005EN
DE80522
MT10188
Control and monitoring functions
Circuit breaker / contactor control Associated functions
Latching / acknowledgment
Description
The tripping outputs of all the protection functions and all the logic inputs may be latched individually. Logic outputs may not be latched. The logic outputs set up in pulse mode maintain pulse-type operation, even when linked to latched data. Latched data are saved in the event of a power failure. All latched data may be acknowledged locally on the UMI, or remotely by means of a logic input or via the communication link. The "Latching / acknowledgment" function associated with the "Circuit breaker / contactor control" function may be used to perform the ANSI 86 "lockout relay" function.
TS/TC equivalence for each protocol
Modbus DNP3
IEC 60870-5-103
TC
Binary Output
ASDU, FUN, INF
TC5
BO2
20, 160, 19
IEC 61850
LN.DO.DA LLN0.LEDRs.ctlVal
TC/circuit breaker position discrepancy
Description
This function detects a discrepancy between the last remote control order received and the actual position of the circuit breaker.
4
The information is accessible via remote indication TS42.
TS/TC equivalence for each protocol
Modbus DNP3
IEC 60870-5-103
TS
Binary Input
ASDU, FUN, INF
TS42
BI7 (B2X)
-
BI9 (Others)
-
TC
Binary Output
ASDU, FUN, INF
TC1
BO0
20, 21, 1 (OFF)
TC2
BO1
20, 21, 1 (ON)
IEC 61850
LN.DO.DA LN.DO.DA CSWI1.POS.ctlVal CSWI1.POS.ctlVal
Tripping
Description
Trip information can be accessed via the remote indication for Sepam check-word, bit 4. It indicates whether a Sepam internal or external protection has tripped.
TS/TC equivalence for each protocol
Modbus DNP3
IEC 60870-5-103
Binary Input
ASDU, FUN, INF
Checkword, bit 4
BI35 (B2X) BI61 (Others)
2, 160, 68 2, 160, 68
IEC 61850
LN.DO.DA PTRC1.Tr
PTRC1.Tr
MT10189
PCRED301005EN
85
Control and monitoring functions
Circuit breaker / contactor control Associated functions
MT10190
A
D
5 O1
+_
4
M1 I11
2
I12
4
5
Wiring for shunt trip unit.
MT10191
A
5 O1
+_
4
D
M 1
I11
4
I12
2
4 5
Wiring for undervoltage trip unit.
DE52238
Trip circuit supervision and open / closed matching
Description
This supervision is designed for trip circuits: b with shunt trip units The function detects: v circuit continuity v loss of supply v mismatching of position contacts. The function inhibits closing of the breaking device. b with undervoltage trip units The function detects mismatching of position contacts, coil supervision being unnecessary in this case. The information is accessible in the matrix and via the remote indication TS43.
Block diagram (1)
(1) With MES option. The function is activated if inputs I11 and I12 are set respectively as circuit breaker "open position" and circuit breaker "closed position".
TS/TC equivalence for each protocol
Modbus DNP3
IEC 60870-5-103
TS
Binary Input
ASDU, FUN, INF
TS43
BI6 (B2X)
1, 160, 36
BI8 (Others)
1, 160, 36
IEC 61850
LN.DO.DA XCBR1.EEHealth.stVal XCBR1.EEHealth.stVal
Open and close order supervision
Description
Following a circuit breaker open or close order, the system checks whether, after a 200 ms time delay, the circuit breaker has actually changed status. If the circuit breaker status does not match the last order sent, a "Control fault" message and remote indication TS45 are generated.
TS/TC equivalence for each protocol
Modbus DNP3
IEC 60870-5-103
TS
Binary Input
ASDU, FUN, INF
TS45
BI5 (B2X)
1, 20, 5
BI7 (Others)
1, 20, 5
IEC 61850
LN.DO.DA Command Termination Command Termination -
86
CRED301005EN
DE80349 MT10195
Control and monitoring functions
Logic discrimination ANSI code 68
Description
This function provides: b full tripping discrimination b a substantial reduction in delayed tripping of the circuit breakers located nearest the source (drawback of the classical time-based discrimination process). The system applies to the definite time (DT) and IDMT phase overcurrent and earth fault protection functions.
With this type of system, time delays are set in accordance with the device to be protected, without any concern for the discrimination aspect.
Operating principle
sending of BI
level "n+1"
O3
Sepam
td: X+0.9s td: X+0.6s
O3 output other level "n" Sepam
level "n" Sepam
+
O3
td: X+0.3s
receipt of BI
4
td: Xs
e.g.: Radial distribution with use of time-based discrimination (td: tripping time definite time curves).
td: Xs td: Xs
When a fault occurs in a radial network, the fault current flows through the circuit between the source and the location of the fault: b the protection units upstream from the fault are triggered b the protection units downstream from the fault are not triggered b only the first protection unit upstream from the fault should trip. Each Sepam is capable of sending and receiving blocking input orders except for motor Sepams (1) which can only send blocking input orders. When a Sepam is triggered by a fault current: b it sends a blocking input order to output O3 (2) b it trips the associated circuit breaker if it does not receive a blocking input order on the blocking input logic input (3). The sending of the blocking input lasts the time it takes to clear the fault. It is interrupted after a time delay that takes into account the breaking device operating time and protection unit reset time. This system minimizes the duration of the fault, optimizes discrimination and guarantees safety in downgraded situations (wiring or switchgear failure).
Pilot wire test
td: Xs
The pilot wire test may be performed using the output relay test function.
BI order td: Xs
(1) Motor Sepams are not affected by the receipt of a blocking input since they are designed for loads only. (2) Default parameter setting. (3) According to parameter setting and presence of an additional MES114 module.
e.g.: radial distribution with use of the Sepam logic discrimination system.
DE80350
PCRED301005EN
87
Control and monitoring functions
Logic discrimination ANSI code 68
Block diagram: Sepam S20, S23, S24, T20, T23 and T24
DE50375
DE50376
4
Block diagram: Sepam M20
(1) According to parameter setting (O3 by default). (2) Instantaneous action (inst) corresponds to protection "pick-up" signal information.
88
CRED301005EN
Control and monitoring functions
Disturbance recording triggering
Description
The recording of analog and logic signals may be triggered by different events, according to control matrix parameter setting or by manual action: b triggering by the grouping of all pick-up signals of the protection functions in service b triggering by the delayed outputs of selected protection functions b triggering by selected logic inputs b manual triggering by a remote control order (TC10) b manual triggering via the SFT2841 software tool.
Disturbance recording may be: b inhibited via the SFT2841 software or by remote control order (TC8) b validated via the SFT2841 software or by remote control order (TC9).
Block diagram
DE51139
4
TS/TC equivalence for each protocol
Modbus DNP3
IEC 60870-5-103
TC
Binary Output ASDU, FUN, INF
TC8
BO03
-
TC9
BO04
-
TC10
BO04
-
IEC 61850
LN.DO.DA RDRE1.RcdInh.ctlVal RDRE1.RcdInh.ctlVal RDRE1.RcdTrg.ctlVal
PCRED301005EN
89
Control and monitoring functions
Switching of groups of settings
Description
There are 4 relays for the phase overcurrent and earth fault protection functions, split into two groups of 2 relays, called group A and group B respectively. The use of the protection relays is determined by parameter setting. The switching of groups of settings function enables the group A or group B protection functions to be activated: b according to the status of logic input I13 v I13 = 0: activation of group A v I13 = 1: activation of group B b or via the communication link v TC3: activation of group A v TC4: activation of group B. The use of the switching of groups of settings functions does not exclude the use of the logic discrimination function.
Block diagram
DE80063
Choice via input I13
Input I13
& u 1 Group A
Choice via remote control
4
Group A (TC3)
& 1
Group B (TC4) 0
Choice via input I13 &
Input I13
Choice via remote control
Group B (TC4) Group A (TC3)
& 1
0
TS/TC equivalence for each protocol
Modbus DNP3
IEC 60870-5-103
TC
Binary Output ASDU, FUN, INF
TC8
BO03
-
TC9
BO04
-
TC10
BO05
-
u 1 Group B
IEC 61850
LN.DO.DA RDRE1.RcdInh.ctlVal RDRE1.RcdInh.ctlVal RDRE1.RcdTrg.ctlVal
90
CRED301005EN
Control and monitoring functions
Indications ANSI code 30
Events may be indicated on the front panel of Sepam by: b appearance of a message on the display of the advanced UMI b lighting up of one of the 9 yellow signal lamps.
Message type indication
Predefined messages All the messages connected to the standard Sepam functions are predefined and available in two language versions: b in English, factory messages, not modifiable b in the local language, according to the version delivered. The language version is chosen at the time of Sepam parameter setting. The messages are visible on the display units of Sepams equipped with the advanced UMI and in the SFT2841 Alarms screen. b the number and type of predefined messages depend on type of Sepam. The table below gives the complete list of all predefined messages.
List of messages (1)
Functions
English (factory)
French
Phase overcurrent
PHASE FAULT
DEFAUT PHASE
Earth fault Inhibit earth fault overcurrent
EARTH FAULT E/F PROT. INHIBIT
DEFAUT TERRE INHIB. PROT TERRE
Breaker failure Thermal overload
BREAKER FAILURE THERMAL ALARM THERMAL TRIP
DEF. DISJONCT. ECHAUFT. ALARME ECHAUFT. DECLT.
START INHIBIT
DEMARRAGE INHIBE
Negative sequence / unbalance
UNBALANCE
DESEQUILIBRE
Locked rotor / Locked rotor on start Excessive starting time
ROTOR BLOCKING STRT LOCKED ROTR.
LONG START
BLOCAGE ROTOR BLOC ROTOR DEM
4
DEMARRAGE LONG
Starts per hour
START INHIBIT
DEMARRAGE INHIBE
Phase undercurrent
UNDER CURRENT
COURANT <<
Phase-to-phase overvoltage
OVERVOLTAGE
TENSION >>
Phase-to-phase undervoltage
UNDERVOLTAGE
TENSION <<
Positive sequence undervoltage
UNDERVOLTAGE
TENSION <<
Phase-to-neutral undervoltage
UNDERVOLT. V1
TENSION << V1
UNDERVOLT. V2
TENSION << V2
UNDERVOLT. V3
TENSION << V3
Neutral voltage displacement
Vo FAULT
DEFAUT Vo
Overfrequency
OVER FREQ.
FREQUENCE >>
Underfrequency
UNDER FREQ.
FREQUENCE <<
Rate of change of frequency Temperature monitoring (2)
ROCOF OVER TEMP. ALM OVER TEMP. TRIP
DERIV. FREQ.
T° ALARME T°. DECLT.
Thermostat (3)
Buchholz (3)
Pressure (3) Thermistor PTC/NTC
Trip circuit supervision Circuit breaker / contactor control Recloser
RTD'S FAULT THERMOST. ALARM THERMOST. TRIP BUCHHOLZ ALARM BUCHH/GAS TRIP PRESSURE TRIP THERMIST. ALARM THERMIST. TRIP TRIP CIRCUIT CONTROL FAULT PERMANENT FAULT
DEFAUT SONDES THERMOT. ALARME THERMOST. DECLT.
BUCHH ALARME BUCHH/GAZ DECLT. PRESSION DECLT.
THERMIST. ALARME THERMIST. DECLT. CIRCUIT DECLT. DEFAUT COMDE. DEFAUT PERMANT.
Recloser
CLEARED FAULT
DEFAUT ELIMINE
(1) According to type of Sepam and Sepam equipped with advanced UMI, or SFT2841. Messages by default, the wording of the messages may be changed (please consult us). (2) RTD fault message: refer to the maintenance chapter. (3) According to parameter setting of the logic inputs I21 to I24 (T20, T23, T24 type).
PCRED301005EN
91
Control and monitoring functions
Indications ANSI code 30
DE51148
Alarm message on the advanced UMI.
4
Message processing on the advanced UMI display
When an event occurs, the related message appears on the advanced UMI display. The user presses the clear key to clear the message and be able to consult all the
advanced UMI screens in the normal fashion. The user must press the reset key to acknowledge latched events (e.g. protection outputs). The list of messages remains accessible in the alarm history ( key), in which the last 64 messages are stored. To delete the messages stored in the alarm history: b display the alarm history on the advanced UMI b press the clear key.
Signal lamp type indication
The 9 yellow signal lamps on the front of Sepam are assigned by default to the following events:
Signal lamp
Event
Label on front panel
LED 1
Tripping of protection 50/51 unit 1
I>51
LED 2
Tripping of protection 50/51 unit 2
I>>51
LED 3
Tripping of protection 50N/51N unit 1
Io>51N
LED 4
Tripping of protection 50N/51N unit 2
Io>>51N
LED 5
Ext
LED 6
LED 7
Circuit breaker open (I11) (1)
0 off
LED 8
Circuit breaker closed (I12) (1)
I on
LED 9
Tripping by circuit breaker control
Trip
(1) Assignment by default with MES114.
The default parameter setting may be personalized using the SFT2841 software: b the assignment of signal lamps to events is to be defined in the control matrix screen b editing and printing of personalized labels are proposed in the "Sepam" menu.
92
CRED301005EN
PE50610
Control and monitoring functions
Control matrix
The control matrix is used for simple assignment of the logic outputs and signal lamps to information produced by the protection units, program logic and logic inputs. Each column creates a logic OR between all the lines selected. The following data are managed in the control matrix and may be set using the SFT2841 software tool.
SFT2841: control matrix.
Data
All of the application protection functions 79 - cleared fault 79 - permanent fault Logic inputs I11 to I14 and I21 to I26 BI transmission TCS CB control fault Sensor fault Pick-up Watchdog
Meaning
Comments
Protection time-delayed output and additional outputs when applicable
The recloser function has sucessfully reclosed Impulse type output
The circuit breaker is definitively open after the Impulse type output
reclosing cycles
According to configuration Sending of the blocking information to the
If MES114 module is configured O3 by default
4
following Sepam in logic discrimination chain
Trip circuit fault or mismatching of CB position contacts
If the circuit breaker / contactor control function is activated
A circuit breaker open or close order has not been executed
Hardware problem on an MET module or on an RTD
Logical OR of the instantaneous output of all protection units
Monitoring of Sepam operation
Always on O4 if used
PCRED301005EN
93
Control and monitoring functions
Self-tests and fail-safe position
Presentation
The reliability of a device is the property that allows its users to have well-placed confidence in the service it delivers.
For a Sepam protection relay, operational reliability consists of ensuring the safety and availability of the installation. This means avoiding the following 2 situations: b Nuisance tripping of the protection
Continuity of the electrical power supply is as vital for a manufacturer as it is for an electricity distribution company. Nuisance tripping caused by the protection can result in considerable financial losses. This situation affects the availability of the installation. b Failure of the protection to trip
The consequences of a fault that is not eliminated can be catastrophic. For safety of operation, the protection relay must detect faults in the power supply as quickly as possible, using discrimination. This situation affects the safety of the installation.
Self-tests and monitoring functions
On initialization and cyclically during operation, Sepam runs a series of self-tests.
These self-tests are designed to detect any failure in its internal and external circuits
so as to ensure Sepam's reliability. These failures are classified into 2 categories,
major failures and minor failures: b A major failure reaches the hardware resources used by the protection functions
4
(program memory and analog input for example). This type of failure risks resulting in failure to trip on a fault or nuisance tripping. In
this case, Sepam must go into the fail-safe position as quickly as possible.
b A minor failure affects Sepam's peripheral functions (display, communication).
This type of failure does not prevent Sepam from protecting the installation and
providing continuity of service. Sepam then operates in downgraded mode.
The classification of failures into 2 categories improves both safety and availability of
the installation.
The possibility of a Sepam major failure must be taken into account when selecting the trip command type to maximize availability or safety of the installation (see "Selecting the trip command and examples of use" page 97).
In addition to the self-tests, the user can activate the trip circuit and closing circuit supervision function to improve the installation monitoring.
This function sends an alarm message to the Sepam display unit and a data item is automatically available to the communication to alert the user.
94
CRED301005EN
Control and monitoring functions
Self-tests and fail-safe position
Self-tests
The self-tests are run when Sepam is initialized and/or during its operation.
List of self-tests which place Sepam in the fail-safe position
Failures which have caused this are deemed to be major ones.
Function
Test type
Execution period
Power supply
Power supply presence
During operation
CPU
Processor
On initialization and during operation
RAM memory
On initialization and during operation
Program memory
Checksum
During operation
Parameter memory
Checksum
On initialization
Analog inputs
Current
During operation
Voltage
During operation
Connection
CCA630, CCA634, CCA670, CCT640
On initialization and during operation
MES114
On initialization and during operation
List of self-tests which do not place Sepam in the fail-safe
4
position
Failures which have caused this are deemed to be minor ones.
Function
UMI
Analog output
Temperature inputs
Test type
Module presence Module presence Module presence
Execution period
On initialization and during operation On initialization and during operation On initialization and during operation
PCRED301005EN
95
Control and monitoring functions
Self-tests and fail-safe position
DE80252
DE80251
Relay output
Watchdog Permanent internal failure.
4
Relay output
Fail-safe position
When Sepam is in working order, it runs self-tests continuously. Detection of a major failure places Sepam in the fail-safe position.
State of Sepam in the fail-safe position
b All the output relays are forced to the idle state b All protection functions are inhibited b The watchdog output indicates failure (output in the idle state) b A red LED on the Sepam front panel is on and a diagnostic message appears on the Sepam display unit (see "Indications" page 91).
How Sepam deals with failures
b Minor failure: Sepam switches to downgraded operation. The failure is indicated on the Sepam display unit and also by the communication. Sepam continues to protect the installation. b Major failure: Sepam switches to the fail-safe position and attempts a restart during which it again runs its self-tests. There are 2 possible scenarios: v The internal failure is still present. It is a permanent failure. Intervention on Sepam is required. Only removing the cause of the failure, followed by de-energizing and then energizing Sepam, will allow the unit to exit the fail-safe position. v The internal failure is no longer present. It is a transient failure. Sepam restarts so that it can continue to protect the installation. Sepam has been in the fail-safe position for 5 to 7 s.
DE80253
Watchdog Transient internal failure.
5 to 7 seconds
Relay output
Watchdog
Counter
01 2 0 1 2 3 45
Sepam de-energized
Repeated transient internal failures.
Limiting the number of transient failure detections
Each time a transient internal failure appears, Sepam increments an internal counter. The fifth time the failure occurs, Sepam is placed in the fail-safe position. Deenergizing Sepam reinitializes the failure counter. This mechanism can be used to avoid keeping a Sepam running that is subject to repeated transient failures.
96
CRED301005EN
Control and monitoring functions
Self-tests and fail-safe position
NOTICE
RISK OF UNPROTECTED INSTALLATION Always connect the watchdog output to a monitoring device when the selected trip command does not result in the installation tripping when Sepam fails.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Selecting the trip command and examples of use
An analysis of the operational reliability of the whole installation should determine whether availability or safety of this installation should be prioritized if Sepam is in the fail-safe position. This information is used to determine the choice of trip command as outlined in the table below.
Selecting the trip command
Diagram Control
Event
Trip
1
Shunt trip breaker Sepam failure or No
or mechanical loss of the
latching contactor auxiliary power
supply
Advantage Disadvantage
Availability of Installation not the installation protected until
remedial intervention (1)
2
Breaker with
Sepam failure or Yes
Safety of the Installation not
undervoltage trip loss of the
installation available until
coil (fail-safe) auxiliary power
remedial
supply
intervention
3
Breaker with
Sepam failure No
Availability of Installation not
undervoltage trip
the installation protected until
coil (not fail-safe)
remedial
intervention (1)
Loss of auxiliary Yes power supply
Safety of the Installation not installation available until
remedial
4
intervention
(1) It is essential to use the watchdog, see the warning notice opposite.
Example of use with shunt trip coil (diagram 1)
8
Inhibit closing O2
7
Closing
L2
O11
3
Trip
5
O1
4
Breaker closed
4M
5
I12
Breaker open
1M
2
I11
N/O closing
coil
Shunt trip
coil
Setting the Sepam output parameters: O1: N/O O2: N/C O11: N/O
DE80351
PCRED301005EN
97
Control and monitoring functions
Self-tests and fail-safe position
8
Inhibit closing O2
7
Closing
L 2
O11
3
Example of use with undervoltage trip coil with fail-safe condition (diagram 2)
Trip
5
O1
4
Breaker closed
4M
5
I12
Breaker open
1M
2
I11
DE80352
4
N/O closing coil
DE80353
8
Inhibit closing O2
7
Closing
L
2
O11
3
= 0
Undervoltage trip coil
Setting the Sepam output parameters: O1: N/C O2: N/C O11: N/O
Example of use with undervoltage trip coil without fail-safe condition (diagram 3)
Trip
5
O1
4
Breaker closed
4M
5
I12
Breaker open
1M
2
I11
N/O closing coil
= 0
Undervoltage trip coil
Setting the Sepam output parameters: O1: N/O O2: N/C O11: N/O
98
CRED301005EN
Control and monitoring functions
Self-tests and fail-safe position
Using the watchdog
The watchdog is extremely important in the monitoring system, as it indicates to the user that the Sepam protection functions are working correctly. When Sepam detects an internal failure, a LED flashes automatically on the Sepam front panel regardless of whether the watchdog output is connected correctly. If the watchdog output is not correctly connected to the system, this LED is the only way of knowing that Sepam has failed. We therefore strongly recommend connecting the watchdog output at the highest level of the installation so that an effective alarm is generated when necessary. For example, an audible alarm or flashing alarm lamp can be used to warn the operator.
Watchdog output No failure detected Failure detected
status
Watchdog output connected correctly to the control system
The protection functions are in working order
b The protection functions are not working. b Sepam is in the fail-safe position. b The Sepam alarm LED flashes. b The watchdog output activates a system
alarm. b The operator is warned that he needs to
intervene.
Watchdog output not connected
The protection functions are in working order
b The protection functions are not working. b Sepam is in the fail-safe position. b The Sepam alarm LED flashes. b The need of maintenance is detected only
if an operator controls the front panel of the digital relay.
4
PCRED301005EN
99
4
100
CRED301005EN
Modbus communication Presentation
Presentation
102
Modbus protocol
103
Configuring the communication interfaces
104
Commissioning and diagnosis
106
Data addresses and encoding
108
Time-tagging of events
117
Access to remote settings
122
Disturbance recording
132
Reading Sepam identification
134
5
PCRED301005EN
101
Modbus communication Presentation
General
Modbus communication allows Sepam to be connected to a supervisor or any other device with a master Modbus communication channel. Sepam is always a slave station.
Sepam is connected to a Modbus communication network via a communication interface. There is a choice of two types of communication interface: b communication interfaces to connect Sepam to a single network: v ACE949-2, for connection to a 2-wire RS 485 network v ACE959, for connection to a 4-wire RS 485 network v ACE937, for connection to a fiber-optic star network. b communication interfaces to connect Sepam to two networks: v ACE969TP-2, for connection to: - one 2-wire RS 485 Modbus S-LAN supervision communication network - one 2-wire RS 485 E-LAN engineering communication network. v ACE969FO-2, for connection to: - one fiber-optic Modbus S-LAN supervision communication network - one 2-wire RS 485 E-LAN engineering communication network.
Data available
The data available depend on the type of Sepam.
Measurement readout
b phase and earth fault currents
b peak demand phase currents
b tripping currents
b cumulative breaking current
b phase-to-phase, phase-to-neutral and residual voltages
b frequency
b temperatures
5
b thermal capacity used b starts per hour and inhibit time b running hours counter
b motor starting current and time
b operating time before overload tripping
b waiting time after tripping
b operating time and number of operations
b circuit breaker charging time.
Program logic data readout b a table of 64 pre-assigned remote indications (TS) (depends on the type of Sepam) enables the readout of program logic data status b readout of the status of 10 logic inputs.
Remote control orders Writing of 16 impulse-type remote control orders (TC) in either direct mode or SBO (Select Before Operate) mode via 16 selection bits.
Other functions b reading of Sepam configuration and identification b time-tagging of events (synchronization via the network or externally via logic input I21), time-tagging within a millisecond b remote reading of Sepam settings b remote setting of protection units b remote control of the analog output (with MSA141 option) b transfer of disturbance recording data.
102
CRED301005EN
Modbus communication Modbus protocol
Characterization of exchanges
The Modbus protocol may be used to read or write one or more bits, one or more words, the contents of the event counters or the contents of the diagnosis counters.
PE80298
Protocol principle
master
Modbus functions supported
The Modbus protocol used by Sepam is a compatible sub-group of the RTU Modbus protocol. The functions listed below are handled by Sepam: b basic functions (data access): v function 1: reading of n output or internal bits v function 2: reading of n input bits v function 3: reading of n output or internal words v function 4: reading of n input words v function 5: writing of 1 bit v function 6: writing of 1 word v function 7: high-speed reading of 8 bits v function 8: reading of diagnosis counters v function 11: reading of Modbus event counters v function 15: writing of n bits v function 16: writing of n words. b communication-management functions: v function 8: Modbus diagnosis v function 11: reading of Modbus event counter v function 43: sub-function 14: reading of identification.
DE80299
request
reply
slave
slave
slave
Exchanges are initiated by the master and include a request by the master and a reply by the slave (Sepam). Requests by the master are either addressed to a given Sepam identified by its number in the first byte of the request frame, or addressed to all the Sepam (broadcasting).
master
broadcasting
The following exception codes are supported:
b 1: unknown function code
b 2: incorrect address
b 3: incorrect data b 4: not ready (cannot process request) b 7: not acknowledged (remote reading and setting).
5
Response time
The communication coupler response time (Tr) is less than 15 ms, including a 3-character silence (approximately 3 ms at 9600 bauds). This time is given with the following parameters: b 9600 bauds b format: 8 bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit.
Synchronization of exchanges
Any character that is received after a silence of more than 3 characters is considered as the beginning of a frame. A silence of at least 3 characters must be left on the line between two frames. Example: at 9600 bauds, this time is equal to approximately 3 milliseconds.
DE80300
slave
slave
Broadcast commands are necessarily write commands. No replies are transmitted by the Sepam.
slave
request
master
reply
slave
It is not necessary to have a detailed knowledge of the protocol unless the master is a central computer which requires the corresponding programming. All Modbus exchanges include 2 messages: a request by the master and a reply by the Sepam. All the frames that are exchanged have the same structure. Each message or frame contains 4 types of data:
slave
function
data
CRC 16
number
code
zones
check zone
b slave number (1 byte): this indicates the receiving Sepam (0 to FFh). If it is equal to zero, the request concerns all the slaves (broadcasting) and there is no reply message b function code (1 byte): this is used to select a command (read, write, bit, word) and to check that the reply is correct b data zones (n bytes): these zones contain the parameters relating to the function: bit, address, word address, bit value, word value, number of bits, number of words b check zone (2 bytes): this zone is used to detect transmission errors.
DE50378
PCRED301005EN
103
Modbus communication
Configuring the communication interfaces
PE50584
PE50583
SFT2841: Sepam Configuration screen.
5
Access to configuration parameters
The Sepam communication interfaces are configured using SFT2841 software. The configuration parameters can be accessed from the Communication configuration window in SFT2841. To access this window: b open the Sepam configuration window in SFT2841 b check the box for ACE9xx (communication interface) b click : the Communication configuration window appears b select the type of interface used: ACE949/ACE959/ACE937, ACE969TP or ACE969FO b select the Modbus communication protocol.
The configuration parameters will vary depending on the communication interface selected: ACE949/ACE959/ACE937, ACE969TP or ACE969FO. The table below specifies the parameters to be configured depending on the communication interface chosen.
Parameters to be configured
Physical layer parameters Fiber-optic parameters Modbus advanced parameters E-LAN parameters
ACE949 ACE959 ACE937 b
b
ACE969TP
ACE969FO
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Configuring the physical layer of the Modbus port
Asynchronous serial transmission is used with the following character format: b 8 data bits b 1 stop bit b parity according to parameter setting. The number of stop bits is always fixed at 1. If a configuration with Parity has been selected, each character will contain 11 bits (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1parity bit + 1 stop bit) If a No Parity configuration has been selected, each character will contain 10 bits (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1 stop bit). The configuration parameters for the physical layer of the Modbus port are: b slave number (Sepam address) b transmission speed b parity check type.
SFT2841: communication configuration window for ACE949.
Parameters Sepam address Speed
Parity
Authorized values
1 to 247
4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 bauds None, Even or Odd
Default value 1 19200 bauds
Even
Configuring the ACE969FO-2 fiber-optic port
The configuration for the physical layer of the ACE969FO-2 fiber-optic port is completed with the following 2 parameters: b link idle state: light-on or light-off b echo mode: with or without.
Fiber-optic parameters
Authorized values
Default value
Link idle state
Light Off or Light On
Light Off
Echo mode
Yes (fiber-optic ring)
No
or No (fiber-optic star)
Note: in echo mode, the Modbus master will receive the echo of its own request before the slave's reply. The Modbus master must be able to disregard this echo. Otherwise, it is impossible to create a Modbus fiber-optic ring.
104
CRED301005EN
PE50585
PE50586
Modbus communication
Configuring the communication interfaces
Configuring Modbus advanced parameters
The Sepam remote control mode is selected from the Advanced parameters window.
Advanced parameters Remote control mode
Authorized values
Direct or SBO (Select Before Operate) mode
Default value Direct
SFT2841: Modbus advanced parameters window.
Configuring the physical layer of the ACE969-2 E-LAN port
The E-LAN port on the ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2 communication interfaces is
a
2-wire RS 485 port.
The configuration parameters for the physical layer of the E-LAN port are: b Sepam address b transmission speed b parity check type.
The number of stop bits is always fixed at 1.
If a configuration with Parity has been selected, each character will contain 11 bits
(1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1parity bit + 1 stop bit)
If a No Parity configuration has been selected, each character will contain 10 bits (1 start bit + 8 data bits + 1 stop bit).
5
Parameters Sepam address Speed
Parity
Authorized values
1 to 247
4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 bauds None, Even or Odd
Default value 1 38400 bauds
Odd
SFT2841: communication configuration window for ACE969FO.
Configuration tips
b The Sepam address MUST be assigned before Sepam is connected to the communication network. b You are also strongly advised to set the other physical layer configuration parameters before making the connection to the communication network. b Modifying the configuration parameters during normal operation will not disturb Sepam but will reset the communication port.
PCRED301005EN
105
Modbus communication Commissioning and diagnosis
Installing the communication network
Preliminary study The communication network must first be the subject of a technical study to determine the following, according to the installation characteristics and constraints (geography, amount of information processed, etc.): b the type of medium (electrical or fiber optic) b the number of Sepam units per network b the transmission speed b the ACE interfaces configuration b the Sepam parameter settings.
Sepam user manual The communication interfaces must be installed and connected in accordance with the instructions in the Installation chapter of this manual.
Preliminary checks
The following preliminary checks must be made: b check the CCA612 cord connection between the ACE interface and the Sepam base unit b check the ACE Modbus communication port connection b check the complete configuration of the ACE b for the ACE969, check the auxiliary power supply connection.
Checking the operation of the ACE interface
You can use the following to check that an ACE interface is operating correctly: b the indicator LEDs on the front panel of the ACE b the information provided by the SFT2841 software connected to Sepam: v on the Diagnosis screen v on the Communication configuration screens.
Link activity LED for ACE949-2, ACE959 and ACE937
The link activity LED for ACE949-2, ACE959 and ACE937 interfaces flashes when
5
Sepam transmission or reception is active. Indicator LEDs on the ACE969 b green "on" LED: ACE969 energized
b red "key" LED: ACE969 interface status
v LED off: ACE969 configured and communication operational
v LED flashing: ACE969 configuration error or ACE969 not configured
v LED on: ACE969 error
b link activity LED: S-LAN Tx flashing, Sepam transmission active
b link activity LED: S-LAN Rx flashing, Sepam reception active.
PE50587
Diagnosis using SFT2841 software
Sepam diagnosis screen When connected to Sepam, the SFT2841 software informs the operator of the general Sepam status and of the Sepam communication status in particular. All Sepam status information appears on the Sepam diagnosis screen.
Sepam communication diagnosis The operator is provided with the following information to assist with identifying and resolving communication problems: b name of the protocol configured b Modbus interface version number b number of valid frames received (CPT9) b number of invalid (mistaken) frames received (CPT2).
SFT2841: Sepam series 20 diagnosis screen.
106
CRED301005EN
Modbus communication Commissioning and diagnosis
Link activity LED
The ACE interface link activity LEDs are activated by variations in the signal on the Modbus network. When the supervisor communicates with Sepam (during transmission or reception), these LEDs flash. After wiring, check the information given by the link activity LEDs when the supervisor operates.
Note: Flashing indicates that there is traffic passing to or from Sepam; it does not mean that the exchanges are valid.
Functional test
If there is any doubt about correct operation of the link: b run read/write cycles in the test zone b use Modbus diagnosis function 8 (sub-code 0, echo mode). The Modbus frames below, transmitted or received by a supervisor, are an example of a test performed when communication is set up.
Modbus diagnosis counters
Counter definition Sepam manages the Modbus diagnosis counters. These are: b CPT1: Number of valid frames received, whether the slave is involved or not b CPT2: Number of frames received with a CRC error or physical error (frames with more than 255 bytes, frames received with at least one parity, overrun, framing or line-break error) In the 2-wire RS 485 mode, the counter must not be taken into account (meaningless). CPT3: Number of exception responses generated (even if not transmitted, due to receipt of a broadcast request) b CPT4: Number of frames specifically addressed to the station (excluding broadcasting) b CPT5: Number of valid broadcast frames received b CPT6: Not significant b CPT7: Not significant b CPT8: Number of frames received with at least one character having a physical error (parity, overrun, framing or line break) b CPT9: Number of valid requests received and correctly executed.
Test zone
Read
Transmission
01 03 0C00 0002 C75B
Reception
01 03 04 0000 0000 FA33
Write
Transmission
01 10 0C00 0001 02 1234 6727
Reception
01 10 0C00 0001 0299
Read
Transmission
01 03 0C00 0001 875A
Reception
01 03 02 1234 B533
Function 8 - Modbus diagnosis, echo mode
Transmission
01 08 0000 1234 ED7C
Reception
01 08 0000 1234 ED7C
Counter reset The counters are reset to 0: b when they reach the maximum value FFFFh (65535) b when they are reset by a Modbus command (function 8) b when Sepam auxiliary power is lost b when communication parameters are modified.
Using the counters
Modbus diagnosis counters help to detect and resolve communication problems.
They can be accessed by the dedicated read functions (Modbus protocol functions
8 and 11).
CPT2 and CPT9 counters can be displayed on SFT2841
("Sepam Diagnosis" screen). An incorrect speed (or parity) increments CPT2.
5
Non-reception is signaled by the lack of change on CPT9.
Even in echo mode, Sepam recalculates and checks the CRC sent by the master: b If the CRC received is valid, Sepam replies b If the CRC received is invalid, Sepam does not reply.
Operating anomalies
It is advisable to connect the Sepam units to the Modbus network one by one. Make sure that the supervisor is sending frames to the relevant Sepam by checking the activity on the RS 232 - RS 485 converter or the fiber-optic converter if there is one, and on the ACE module.
RS 485 network b check the wiring on each ACE module b check the tightness of the screw terminals on each ACE module b check the connection of the CCA612 cord linking the ACE module to the Sepam base unit b check that polarization is only at one point and that impedance matching is at both ends of the RS 485 network b check the auxiliary power supply connection to the ACE969TP-2 b check that the ACE909-2 or ACE919 converter used is connected, powered and set up correctly.
Fiber-optic network b check the connections on the ACE module b check the connection of the CCA612 cord linking the ACE module to the Sepam base unit b check the auxiliary power supply connection to the ACE969FO-2 b check that the converter or fiber-optic star used is connected, powered and set up correctly b for a fiber-optic ring, check that the Modbus master can handle the echo of its requests correctly.
In all cases b check all the ACE configuration parameters on SFT2841 b check the CPT2 and CPT9 diagnostic counters on the SFT2841 ("Sepam Diagnosis" screen).
PCRED301005EN
107
Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding
Presentation
Data which are similar from the monitoring and control application viewpoint are grouped together in adjacent address zones:
Hexadecimal Ending
Modbus functions
starting
address
enabled
address
Synchronization zone
0002
0005
3, 16
Identification zone
0006
000F
3
First event table
Exchange word
0040
0040
3, 6, 16
Events (1 to 4)
0041
0060
3
Second event table
Exchange word
0070
0070
3, 6, 16
Events (1 to 4)
0071
0090
3
Data
States
0100
0105
3, 4
1, 2*
Measurements
0106
0131
3, 4
Remote control orders
01F0
01F0
3, 4, 6, 16
1, 2, 5, 15*
Remote control confirmation
01F1
01F1
3, 4, 6, 16
1, 2, 5, 15*
Test zone
0C00
0C0F
3, 4, 6, 16
1, 2, 5, 15
Protection settings
Reading
2000
207C
3
Reading request
2080
2080
3, 6, 16
Remote settings
2100
217C
3, 6
Disturbance recording
5
Choice of transfer function Identification zone
2200 2204
2203 2228
3, 16 3
Fault rec. exchange word
2300
2300
3, 6, 16
Fault rec. data
2301
237C
3
Application
Configuration
FC00
FC02
3
Application identification
FC10
FC22
3
N.B. Non-addressable zones may reply by an exception message or else supply non-significant data.
(*) these zones may be accessed in word mode or in bit mode. The address of bit i (0 y i y F) of address word J is then (J x 16) + i.
e.g. 0C00 bit 0 = C000 0C00 bit 7 = C007.
108
CRED301005EN
Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding
Data encoding
For all formats If a measurement overruns the maximum permissible value for the related format, the value read for the measurement will be the maximum permissible value for the format.
Format 16 NS All information is encoded in a 16-bit word, in absolute value (unsigned), binary format. The zero bit (b0) is the least significant bit in the word.
Format 16 S signed measurements (temperatures, ...) The information is encoded in a 16-bit word as a complement of 2. Example: b 0001 represents +1 b FFFF represents -1.
Format B: Ix Rank i bit in the word, with i between 0 and F.
Examples
F
E
D
C
B
A
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Logic
Word address 0105
inputs
26 25 24 23 22 21 14 13 12 11
Bit address 105x
TS1 to TS16
Word address 0101
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit address 101x
TS49 to TS64
Word address 0104 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49
Bit address 104x
TC1 to
Word address 01F0
TC16
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit address 1F0x
STC1 to Word address 01F1
STC16
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Bit address 1F1x
5
Format X: Sepam check-word This format applies only to the Sepam check-word that may be accessed at the word address 100h. This word contains various items of information relating to: b Sepam operating mode b time-tagging of events. Each data item contained in the Sepam check-word may be accessed bit by bit, from address 1000 for the bit b0 to 100F for the bit b15. b bit 15 event present b bit 14 Sepam in "data loss" status b bit 13 Sepam not synchronous b bit 12 Sepam time not correct b bit 11 S-LAN communication monitoring active b bit 10 Sepam in local setting mode b bit 9 major fault in Sepam b bit 8 partial fault in Sepam b bit 7 setting group A in service b bit 6 setting group B in service b bit 4 remote indication of tripping by protection function b bit 3-0 mapping number (1 to 16). Other bits reserved (undetermined values).
Status changes of bits 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 13 and 14 of this word trigger the transmission of a time-tagged event. Bits 3 to 0 encode a "mapping number" (from 1 to 15) which is used to identify the contents of the Modbus addresses, the assignment of which varies depending on the application.
PCRED301005EN
109
Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding
Synchronization zone
Word address
Binary time (year)
0002
Binary time (months + days)
0003
Binary time (hours + minutes)
0004
Binary time (milliseconds)
0005
See "time-tagging of events" chapter for data format.
Synchronization zone
The synchronization zone is a table which contains the absolute date and time for the time-tagging function. Time messages should be written in a single block containing 4 words, using function 16: write word. Messages can be read word by word or by groups of words using function 3.
Access
Read/write Read Read Read
Modbus function enabled 3, 16 3 3 3
Identification zone
The identification zone contains system-type information pertaining to the identification of the Sepam equipment. Some of the information in the identification zone is also found in the configuration zone at the address FC00h.
Identification zone
Word address
Access
Modbus function
Format
Value
enabled
Manufacturer identification
0006
R
3
0100
Equipment
0007
R
3
0
Marking + equipment type
0008
R
3
Idem FC01
Modbus version
0009
R
3
Idem FC02
Application version
000A/B
R
3
Not managed
0
Sepam check-word
000C
R
3
Idem 0100
Synthesis zone
000D
R
3
Not managed
0
5
Command Extension address
000E 000F
R/W
3/16
R
3
Not managed
Init. to 0 FC00
This zone is provided to ensure compatibility with existing equipment. A more complete description is available starting at address FC00h in the configuration zone
or using the identification read function.
Events zone 1
Word address
Exchange word
0040
Event n°1
0041-0048
Event n°2
0049-0050
Event n°3
0051-0058
Event n°4
0059-0060
See "time-tagging of events" chapter for data format.
First events zone
The events zone is a table which contains a maximum of 4 time-tagged events. Events should be read in a single block containing 33 words using function 3. The exchange word can be written using functions 6 or 16, and read individually using function 3.
Access
Read/write Read Read Read Read
Modbus function enabled 3, 6, 16 3 3 3 3
Events zone 2
Word address
Exchange word
0070
Event n°1
0071-0078
Event n°2
0079-0080
Event n°3
0081-0088
Event n°4
0089-0090
See "time-tagging of events" chapter for data format.
Second events zone
The events zone is a table which contains a maximum of 4 time-tagged events. Events should be read in a single block containing 33 words using function 3. The exchange word can be written using functions 6 or 16 and read individually using function 3.
Access
Read/write Read Read Read Read
Modbus function enabled 3, 6, 16 3 3 3 3
110
CRED301005EN
Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding
Status
Sepam check-word TS1-TS16 TS17-TS32 TS33-TS48 TS49-TS64 Logic inputs
Word address
100 101 102 103 104 105
Status zone
The status zone is a table which contains the Sepam check-word, pre-assigned remote annunciation bits (TS), and logic inputs.
Bit address
1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050
Access
R R R R R R
Modbus function enabled 3/4 or 1, 2, 7 3/4 or 1, 2 3/4 or 1, 2 3/4 or 1, 2 3/4 or 1, 2 3/4 or 1, 2
Format
X B B B B B
Measurement zone (S20, S23, S24, T20, T23, T24 and M20 types)
Measurements I1 phase current (gain x 1)
Word address 106
Access R
Modbus function enabled 3/4
Format 16NS
Unit 0.1 A
I2 phase current (gain x 1)
107
R
3/4
16NS
0.1 A
I3 phase current (gain x 1)
108
R
3/4
16NS
0.1 A
I0 residual current (gain x 1)
109
R
3/4
16NS
0.1 A
Im1 average phase current (x 1)
10A
R
3/4
16NS
0.1 A
Im2 average phase current (x 1)
10B
R
3/4
16NS
0.1 A
Im3 average phase current (x 1)
10C
R
3/4
16NS
0.1 A
I1 phase current (gain x 10)
10D
R
3/4
16NS
1 A
I2 phase current (gain x 10)
10E
R
3/4
16NS
1 A
I3 phase current (gain x 10)
10F
R
3/4
16NS
1 A
I0 residual current (gain x 10)
110F
R
IM1 average phase current (x10)
111
R
IM2 average phase current (x10)
112
R
3/4
16NS
1 A
3/4
16NS
1 A
3/4
16NS
1 A
5
IM3 average phase current (x10)
113
R
3/4
16NS
1 A
IM1 peak demand phase current
114
R
3/4
16NS
1 A
IM2 peak demand phase current
115
R
3/4
16NS
1 A
IM3 peak demand phase current
116
R
3/4
16NS
1 A
Reserved
117
R
3/4
-
-
Itrip1 tripping current
118
R
3/4
16NS
10 A
Itrip2 tripping current
119
R
3/4
16NS
10 A
Itrip3 tripping current
11A
R
3/4
16NS
10 A
Itrip0 tripping current
11B
R
Cumulative breaking current
11C
R
3/4
16NS
1 A
3/4
16NS
1 (kA)2
Number of operations
11D
R
3/4
16NS
1
Operating time
11E
R
3/4
16NS
1 ms
Charging time
11F
R
3/4
16NS
1 sec
Reserved
120
R
3/4
-
-
Running hours counter
121
R
3/4
16NS
1 hr
Thermal capacity used
122
R
3/4
16NS
%
Operating time before overload tripping 123
R
3/4
16NS
1 min
Waiting time after overload tripping
124
R
3/4
16NS
1 min
Unbalance ratio
125
R
3/4
16NS
% Ib
Starting time / overload
126
R
3/4
16NS
0.1 sec
Starting current overload
127
R
3/4
16NS
1 A
Start inhibit time delay
128
R
3/4
16NS
1 min
Number of starts allowed
129
R
3/4
16NS
1
Temperatures 1 to 8
12A/131
R
3/4
16S
1 °C
Reserved
132/1EF
Prohibited
Note: Only the measurements related to the Sepam function are significant. The values of the others are zero.
PCRED301005EN
111
Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding
Measurements
U21 phase to phase voltage (x1) U32 phase to phase voltage (x1) U13 phase to phase voltage (x1) V1 phase to neutral voltage (x1) V2 phase to neutral voltage (x1) V3 phase to neutral voltage (x1) V0 residual voltage (x1) Positive sequence voltage (x1) Frequency U21 phase to phase voltage (x10) U32 phase to phase voltage (x10) U13 phase to phase voltage (x10) V1 phase to neutral voltage (x10) V2 phase to neutral voltage (x10) V3 phase to neutral voltage (x10) V0 residual voltage (x10) Positive sequence voltage (x10) Reserved Reserved
Word address
106 107 108 109 10A 10B 10C 10D 10E 10F 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117/131 132/1EF
Measurement zone (B20, B21, B22 types)
Access
R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R Prohibited
Modbus function enabled 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4 3/4
Format
16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS 16NS
Unit
1 V 1 V 1 V 1 V 1 V 1 V 1 V 1 V 0.01 Hz 1 V 1 V 1 V 1 V 1 V 1 V 1 V 1 V init. to 0
Accuracy
The accuracy of the measurements depends on the order of the unit: it is equal to the value of the point divided by 2.
Examples I1 U21
Unit = 1 A Unit = 10 V
Accuracy = 1/2 = 0.5 A Accuracy = 10/2 = 5 V
5
Remote control zone
The remote control zone is a table which contains the pre-assigned remote control
bits (TC). The zone may be read or written using the word functions or bit functions.
See section on remote control orders.
Remote controls TC1-TC16
STC1-STC16
Control of analog output Reserved S-LAN communication monitoring Time delay Reserved
Word address
01F0 01F1 01F2 01F3
01F4 01F5/0BFF
Bit address
Access
1F00 1F10
R/W
R/W
R/W Prohibited
R/W Prohibited
Modbus function Format enabled
3/4/6/16
B
1/2/5/15
3/4/6/16
B
1/2/5/15
3/4/6/16
16S
3/6/16
16NS
Unit 0.1 sec
Protection settings
Setting read buffer Setting read request Remote setting request buffer See section on protection settings.
Word address
2000/207C 2080 2100/217C
Protection setting zone
The protection setting zone is an exchange table which is used to read and set protections.
Access
R R/W R/W
Modbus function
enabled
3
3/6/16
-
3/16
112
CRED301005EN
Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding
Disturbance recording
Choice of transfer function Identification zone Fault rec. exchange word Fault rec. data See section on fault recorder.
Word address
2200/2203 2204/2228 2300 2301/237C
Fault recorder zone
The fault recorder zone is an exchange table which is used to read records.
Access
R/W R R/W R
Modbus function enabled 3/16 3 3/6/16 3
Test zone Test
Word address
0C00 0C0F
Bit address
C000-C00F C0F0-C0FF
Test zone
The test zone is a 16-word zone that may be accessed via the communication link by all the functions, in both read and write modes, to facilitate communication testing at the time of commissioning or to test the link.
Access
read/write read/write
Modbus function enabled 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 15, 16 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 15, 16
Format
none none
init. to 0 init. to 0
Configuration zone
The configuration zone contains information pertaining to the hardware and software configuration of the Sepam.
Configuration zone
Word address
Access
Modbus function Format
enabled
Modbus address
FC00
R
3
(slave no.)
Sepam type (MSB) /
FC01
R
3
(1)
hardware config. (LSB)
Coupler type (MSB)/
FC02
R
3
(2)
5
version (LSB)
application identification
Type of application (S20, M20, etc.)
FC10/15
R
3
ASCII
12 characters
application version
FC16/18
R
3
ASCII
6 characters
application marking
FC19/22
R
3
ASCII
20 characters
(1) FC01 word:MSB = 10h (Sepam ) LSB = hardware configuration
(2) FC02 word:MSB = 01h (Sepam ) LSB = XY (communicationversion X,Y)
Bit Option
7 UD/UX
6 reserved
UX model
0
0
UX model
1
0
(3) or MET148. x = 1 if option included
y = 1 if option included, exclusive options
z = 1 if Vac set up.
5 MES114E/ MES114F z
z
4 DSM303
x 0
3 MSA141
x x
2 MET148-2 (3)
x x
1 MES114
y y
0 MES108
y y
PCRED301005EN
113
ModModbus communication
5
Data addresses and encoding
Use of remote annunciation
Sepam provides the communication link with 64 remote annunciation bits (TS). The TS are pre-assigned to protection and control functions which depend on the Sepam model. The TS can be read using the bit or word functions. Each TS transition is time-tagged and stored in the event stack (see section Time-tagging of events).
Address word 0101: TS1 to TS16 (bit address 1010 to 101F)
TS Use
S20 S24 T20 T24 M20 B21 B22
1 Protection 50/51 relay 1 group A
bbbbb
2 Protection 50/51 relay 2 group A
bbbbb
3 Protection 50/51 relay 1 group B
bbbbb
4 Protection 50/51 relay 2 group B
bbbbb
5 Protection 50N/51N relay 1 group A
bbbbb
6 Protection 50N/51N relay 2 group A
bbbbb
7 Protection 50N/51N relay 1 group B
bbbbb
8 Protection 50N/51N relay 2 group B
bbbbb
9 Protection 49 RMS alarm set point
bbb
10 Protection 49 RMS tripping set point
bbb
11 Protection 37
b
12 Protection 46
bbbbb
13 Protection 48/51LR/14 (locked rotor)
b
14 Protection 48/51LR/14
b
(locked rotor on start)
15 Protection 48/51LR/14 (excessive starting time)
b
16 Protection 66
b
Address word 0102: TS17 to TS32 (bit address 1020 to 102F)
TS Use 17 Protection 27D/47 relay 1 18 Protection 27D/47 relay 2 19 Protection 27 relay 1 20 Protection 27 relay 2 21 Protection 27R 22 Protection 59 relay 1 23 Protection 59 relay 2 24 Protection 59N relay 1 25 Protection 59N relay 2 26 Protection 81H 27 Protection 81L relay 1 28 Protection 81L relay 2 29 Protection 27S phase 1 (1) 30 Protection 27S phase 2 (1) 31 Protection 27S phase 3 (1) 32 Protection 81R
S20 S24 T20 T24 M20 B21 B22 bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb bb b
(1) Not available on the B20 application.
Note: Applications S24 and T24 perform the functions of applications S23 and T23 respectively and, in addition, the phase overcurrent and earth fault cold load pick-up functions.
114
CRED301005EN
Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding
Address word 0103: TS33 to TS48 (bit address 1030 to 103F)
TS Use
S20 S24 T20 T24 M20 B21 B22
33 Protection 50BF 34 Recloser in service 35 Recloser in progress 36 Recloser permanent trip 37 Recloser successful trip
b
b
bb
bb
bb
bb
38 Send blocking input 39 Remote setting inhibited 40 Remote control inhibited 41 Sepam not reset after fault
bbbbb bbbbbbb bbbbbbb bbbbbbb
42 Remote control/position discrepancy
bbbbbbb
43 Matching fault or Trip Circuit Supervision
44 Disturbance recording memorized
bbbbbbb bbbbbbb
45 Control fault
bbbbbbb
46 Disturbance recording inhibited
bbbbbbb
47 Thermal protection inhibited
bbb
48 RTD fault
bbb
Address word 0104: TS49 to TS64 (bit address 1040 to 104F)
TS Use
S20 S24 T20 T24 M20 B21 B22
49 Protection 38/49T alarm set point sensor 1
bbb
50 Protection 38/49T tripping set point sensor 1
bbb
51 Protection 38/49T alarm set point sensor 2
bbb
52 Protection 38/49T tripping set point sensor 2
bbb
53 Protection 38/49T alarm set point sensor 3
bbb
54 Protection 38/49T tripping set point sensor 3 55 Protection 38/49T alarm set point sensor 4
bbb bbb
5
56 Protection 38/49T tripping set point sensor 4
bbb
57 Protection 38/49T alarm set point sensor 5
bbb
58 Protection 38/49T tripping set point sensor 5
bbb
59 Protection 38/49T alarm set point sensor 6
bbb
60 Protection 38/49T tripping set point sensor 6
bbb
61 Protection 38/49T alarm set point sensor 7
bbb
62 Protection 38/49T tripping set point sensor 7
bbb
63 Protection 38/49T alarm set point sensor 8
bbb
64 Protection 38/49T tripping set point sensor 8
bbb
Address check-word 0100: bit 4 (bit address 1004)
Use
S20 S24 T20 T24 M20 B21 B22
Bit 4 Tripping by protection function
bbbbbbb
Note: Applications S24 and T24 perform the functions of applications S23 and T23 respectively and, in addition, the phase overcurrent and earth fault cold load pick-up functions.
PCRED301005EN
115
Modbus communication Data addresses and encoding
Use of remote control orders
Address word 01F0: TC1 to TC16 (bit address 1F00 to 1F0F)
Remote control orders are pre-assigned to protection, TC Use
S20 S24 T20 T24 M20 B21 B22
control and metering functions.
1 Tripping
bbbbbbb
Remote control orders may be carried out in two modes: b direct mode b confirmed SBO (select before operate) mode.
2 Closing
3
Switching to setting group A (3)
4
Switching to setting group B (3)
5 Sepam reset
bbbbbbb bbbbb bbbbb bbbbbbb
All the remote control orders can be inhibited by logic
6
Peak demand current zero reset (3)
bbbbb
input I25 on the MES114 module.
7 Inhibit thermal protection (3)
bbb
According to the parameter setting of logic input I25,
8 Inhibit disturbance recording triggering (OPG (1)) b b b b b b b
the tripping remote control order TC1 can be activated 9 Confirm disturbance recording triggering (OPG (1)) b b b b b b b
at any time or can be inhibited.
10 Manual disturbance recording triggering (OPG (1)) b b b b b b b
Logic input I25 can be set up according to 2 modes:
11 Enable recloser (3)
bb
b Inhibited if the input is set to 1 ("POS" prefix)
12 Disable recloser (3)
bb
b Inhibited if the input is set to 0 ("NEG" prefix)
13 Confirm thermal protection (3)
bbb
14 Reserved
The device tripping and closing and recloser enable
15 Activate S-LAN communication monitoring (2)(3) b b b b b b b
and disable remote control orders are acknowledged if 16 Inhibit S-LAN communication monitoring (3) b b b b b b b
the "CB control" function is validated and if the inputs (1) OPG : French acronym for disturbance recording.
necessary for the logic are present on the MES114 (or MES108) optional module.
(2) TC15 Remote control order follows the same TC1 inhibition mode. (3)The maximum number of remote controls is limited to 1,000,000 over the life of the product.
Direct remote control order
Note: Applications S24 and T24 perform the functions of applications S23 and T23 respectively and, in addition, the phase overcurrent and earth fault cold load pick-up functions.
The remote control order is executed when it is written
in the remote control word. The program logic resets it Analog output remote control
to zero after the remote control order is acknowledged. The analog output of the MSA141 module may be set up for remote control
Confirmed SBO remote control order (Select Before via the Modbus communication module (word address 01F2). The working
Operate)
range of the numerical value transmitted is defined by the parameter
In this mode, remote control orders involve two steps: setting of the "min. value" and "max. value" of the analog output.
5
b selection by the master of the order to be sent by writing of the bit in the STC word and checking of the selection by rereading the word
This function is not affected by remote control inhibition conditions.
b execution of the order to be sent by writing of the bit
in the TC word.
The remote control order is executed if the bit in the
STC word and the bit in the associated word are set;
the program logic resets the bit STC and TC bits to zero
after the remote control order is acknowledged.
Deselection of the STC bit takes place:
b if the master deselects it by writing in the STC word
b if the master selects (write bit) a bit other than the
one already selected
b if the master sets a bit in the TC word which does not
match the selection. In this case, no remote control
order is executed.
116
CRED301005EN
Modbus communication Time-tagging of events
Presentation
The communication system time-tags the data prcessed by Sepam. The time-tagging function assigns a date and precise time to status changes so that they can be accurately classified with over time. Timetagged data are events that can be processed in the control room by the remote monitoring and control system using the communication protocol for data logging and chronological reports. Sepam time-tags the following data: b logic inputs b remote annunciation bits b information pertaining to Sepam equipment (see
Initialization of the time-tagging function Each time the communication system is initialized (energizing of Sepam), the events are generated in the following order: b appearance of "data loss" b appearance of "incorrect time" b appearance of "not synchronous" b disappearance of "data loss". The function is initialized with the current values of the remote annunciation and logic input status without creating any events related to these data. After the initialization phase, event detection is activated. It can only be interrupted by saturation of the internal event storage queue or by the presence of a major fault in Sepam.
Sepam check-word).
Date and time
Time-tagging is carried out systematically. Chronological sorting of the time-tagged events is performed by the remote monitoring and control system.
Presentation An absolute date and time are managed internally by Sepam, consisting of the information Year: Month: Day: Hour: minute: millisecond. The date and time format is standardized (ref: IEC 60870-5-4).
Time-tagging Sepam time-tagging uses absolute time (see section on date and time). When an event is detected, it is tagged with the absolute time given by Sepam's internal clock. All the Sepam internal clocks must be synchronized so as to avoid drifts and all be the same to allow interSepam chronological sorting. Sepam has two mechanisms for managing its internal clock: b time-setting: for initializing or modifying the absolute time. A special Modbus message, called "time message", is used to
Backup The Sepam internal clock is backed up for 24 hours. After a power outage lasting
longer than 24 hours, the time will need to be reset.
The duration of the Sepam date and time backup if the power supply fails depends
on the ambient temperature and age of the Sepam.
Typical backup periods: b at 25° v 24 hrs for 7 years v 18 hrs after 10 years v 14 hrs after 15 years
b at 40° v 24 hrs for 3 years v 16 hrs after 10 years v 10 hrs after 15 years
Setting the time
time-set each Sepam b synchronization: to avoid Sepam internal clock drifts and ensure inter-
Sepam's internal clock can be set in one of 3 ways: b by the supervisor, via the Modbus link b by the SFT2841, "General characteristics" screen
5
Sepam synchronization.
b from the display unit of Sepam units equipped with the advanced UMI
Internal clocks can be synchronized according to two
principles: b internal synchronization:
The time associated with an event is encoded on 8 bytes as follows:
0 0 0 0 M M M M 0 0 0 D D D D D word 2
via the communication network without any additional 0 0 0 H H H H H 0 0 mn mn mn mn mn mn word 3
cabling, b external synchronization:
ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms word 4
via a logic input with additional cabling. At the time of commissioning, the user sets the synchronization mode parameter.
Y - 1 byte for years: varies from 0 to 99 years. The remote monitoring and control system must ensure that the year 00 is greater than 99.
M - 1 byte for months: varies from 1 to 12.
D - 1 byte for days: varies from 1 to 31.
H - 1 byte for hours: varies from 0 to 23.
mn - 1 byte for minutes: varies from 0 to 59.
ms - 2 bytes for milliseconds: varies from 0 to 59999.
This information is encoded in binary form. Sepam is time-set via the "write word"
function (function 16) at the address 0002 with a mandatory 4-word time message.
The bits set to "0" in the description above correspond to format fields which are not
used and not generated by Sepam.
Since these bits can be transmitted to Sepam with random values, Sepam performs
the necessary disabling.
Sepam does not check the consistency or validity of the date and time received.
Synchronization clock
A synchronization clock is required for setting the date and time of Sepam. Schneider Electric has tested the following equipment: Gorgy Timing, ref. RT 300, equipped with the M540 module.
PCRED301005EN
117
Modbus communication Time-tagging of events
Reading of events
Sepam provides the master or masters with two event tables. The master reads the event table and acknowledges by writing the exchange word. Sepam updates its event table.
The events sent by Sepam are not sorted chronologically.
Exchange word The exchange word is used to manage a special protocol to be sure not to lose events following a communication problem. The event table is numbered for this purpose. The exchange word includes two fields: b most significant byte = exchange number (8 bits): 0..255.
b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b09 b08
Structure of the first event table: b exchange word 0040h b event number 1 0041h ... 0048h b event number 2 0049h ... 0050h b event number 3 0051h ... 0058h b event number 4 0059h ... 0060h
Exchange number: 0 .. 255
Description of the MS byte of the exchange word.
The exchange number contains a numbering byte which identifies the exchanges. The exchange number is initialized to zero when Sepam is energized. When it reaches its maximum value (FFh), it automatically returns to 0. Sepam numbers the exchanges and the master acknowledges the numbering.
Structure of the second event table: b exchange word 0070h b event number 1 0071h ... 0078h b event number 2
b least significant byte = number of events (8 bits): 0..4
b07 b06 b05 b04 b03 b02 b01 b00
0079h ... 0080h b event number 3
Number of events: 0 .. 4
0081h ... 0088h b event number 4
Description of LS byte of the exchange word.
0089h ... 0090h
5
The master necessarily reads a block of 33 words starting at the address 0040h/0070h, or one word at the address 0040h/0070h.
Sepam indicates the number of significant events in the event table in the least significant byte of the exchange word. Each non-significant event word is initialized to zero.
Event table acknowledgment To inform Sepam that the block read by the master has been correctly received, the master writes the number of the last exchange made in the "Exchange number" field, and resets the "Number of events" field of the exchange word to zero. After acknowledgment, the 4 events in the event table are initialized to zero and the old, acknowledged events are erased in Sepam. Until the exchange word written by the master becomes "X,0" (with X = number of the previous exchange that the master wishes to acknowledge), the exchange word in the table remains at "X, number of previous events". Sepam only increments the exchange number when new events are present (X+1, number of new events). If the event table is empty, Sepam performs no processing operations when the master reads the event table or the exchange word. The data are encoded in binary form.
Clearing an event queue Writing a value "xxFFh" in the exchange word (any exchange number, event number = FFh) reinitializes the corresponding event queue (all stored events not yet transmitted are deleted).
Sepam in data loss (1) / no data loss (0) status Sepam has an internal storage queue with a capacity of 64 events. If the queue becomes saturated, a "data loss" event is inserted by Sepam when each event table is read. The detection of events stops and the most recent events are lost. Data loss is managed independently for each of the two event tables. When the tables are read at different rates, data loss may occur at different times for each table or even, in some cases, appear only on the slowest channel.
Note: the "data loss" bit of the Sepam check word corresponds to the status of the first reading table (compatibility with earlier versions).
118
CRED301005EN
Modbus communication Time-tagging of events
Description of event encoding
An event is encoded in 8 words with the following structure:
Most significant byte
Least significant byte
Word 1: type of event
08
00
For remote annunciation, internal
data, logic inputs
Word 2: event address
Refer to bit addresses 1000 to 105F
Word 3: reserved
00
00
Word 4: falling edge: disappearance or rising edge: appearance
00
00
Falling edge
00
01
Rising edge
Word 5: year
00
0 to 99 (year)
Word 6: month-day
1 to 12 (month)
1 to 31 (day)
Word 7: hours-minutes
0 to 23 (hours)
0 to 59 (minutes)
Word 8: milliseconds
0 to 59999
5
PCRED301005EN
119
Modbus communication Time-tagging of events
DE80320
Architecture for "internal synchronization" via the communication network.
Synchronization
Sepam accommodates two synchronization modes: b "internal via the network" synchronization mode by the broadcasting of a "time message" frame via the communication network. Slave number 0 is used for broadcasting b "external" synchronization mode via a logic input. The synchronization mode is selected at the time of commissioning via SFT2841.
Internal synchronization via the network mode The "time message" frame is used for both time-setting and synchronization of Sepam. In this case, it must be sent regularly at brief intervals (between 10 and 60 seconds) in order for synchronous time to be obtained. Sepam's internal clock is reset each time a new time frame is received, and synchronization is maintained if the difference in synchronism is less than 100 milliseconds. With internal synchronization via the network, accuracy is linked to the master and its mastery of time frame transmission in the communication network. Sepam is synchronized without delay at the end of the receipt of the frame. Time changes are made by sending a frame to Sepam with the new date and time. Sepam then switches into a transitional non-synchronous status. When Sepam is in synchronous status, if no "time message" is received for 200 seconds, the appearance of the "not synchronous" event is triggered.
5
120
CRED301005EN
DE80321
Modbus communication Time-tagging of events
Synchronization (cont'd)
External synchronization via a logic input mode Sepam can be synchronized externally by means of a logic input (I21) (the MES114 module is required). The synchronisation pulse is determined by the rising edge of the logic input. Sepam can adapt to all synchronization pulse periods from 10 to 60 s, by 10 s steps. The shorter the synchronization period, the more accurate time-tagging of status changes is. The first time frame is used to initialize Sepam with the absolute date and time (the following frames are used for the detection of any time changes). The synchronization pulse is used to reset Sepam's internal clock. In the initialization phase, when Sepam is in "non-synchronous" mode, resetting is allowed, within an amplitude of ±4 seconds. In the initialization phase, the resetting process (switching of Sepam into "synchronous" mode) is based on a measurement of the difference between Sepam's current time and the nearest ten second period. This measurement is taken at the time of the receipt of the synchronization pulse following the initialization time frame. Resetting is allowed if the difference is less than or equal to 4 seconds, in which case Sepam switches to "synchronous" mode. As of that time (after the switching to "synchronous" mode), the resetting process is based on the measurement of a difference (between Sepam's current time and the nearest ten second period at the time of the receipt of a synchronization pulse), which is adapted to match the synchronization pulse period.
Architecture for "external synchronization" via a logic input.
The synchronization pulse period is determined automatically by Sepam when it is energized, based on the first two pulses received: the synchronization pulse must therefore be operational before Sepam is energized.
The synchronization function only operates after Sepam has been time-set, i.e.
after the disappearance of the "incorrect time" event.
Any time changes greater than ±4 seconds in amplitude are made by sending a new
time frame. The switch from summer time to winter time (and vice versa) is made in
this way as well. There is a temporary loss of synchronism when the time is changed.
5
The external synchronization mode requires additional equipment, a
"synchronization clock " to generate a precise periodic synchronization time pulse.
If Sepam is in "correct time and synchronous" status, and if the difference in
synchronism between the nearest ten second period and the receipt of the
synchronization pulse is greater than the synchronism error for 2 consecutive
synchronization pulses, it switches into non-synchronous status and generates the
appearance of a "not synchronous" event.
Likewise, if Sepam is in "correct time and synchronous" status, the failure to receive
a synchronization pulse for 200 seconds generates the appearance of a "not
synchronous" event.
PCRED301005EN
121
Modbus communication Access to remote settings
5
122
Reading of remote settings (remote reading)
Settings accessible for remote reading Reading of the settings of all the protection functions may be accessed remotely.
Exchange principle Remote reading of settings takes place in two steps: b first of all, the master indicates the code of the function for which it wishes to know the settings by means of a "request frame". The request is acknowledged, in the Modbus sense of the term, to free the network b the master then reads a reply zone to find the required information by means of a "reply frame". Each function has its own particular reply zone contents. The time needed between the request and the reply is linked to Sepam's low priority cycle time and may vary by several tens to several hundreds of milliseconds.
Request frame The request is made by the master using a "write word" (function 6 or 16) operation at the address 2080h of a 1-word frame consisting of the following:
2080h
B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00
Function code
Relay number
The content of the address 2080h may be read using a Modbus "read word" (function 3). The function code field may have the following values: b 01h to 99h (BCD encoding) for protection functions. The relay number field is used as follows: b for protection, it indicates the relay involved, varying from 1 to N, N being the maximum number of relays available in the Sepam b when only one relay is available, this number field is not controlled.
Exception replies In addition to the usual cases, Sepam can send Modbus type 07 exception replies (not acknowledged) if another remote reading request is being processed.
Reply frame The reply, sent back by the Sepam, fits into a zone containing a maximum of 125 words at the address 2000h which is composed the following:
2000h/207Ch
B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00
Function code
Relay number
Settings
..............
(special field for each function)
..............
This zone is read by a "read word" operation (function 3) at the address 2000h.
The length of the exchange may include: b the first word only (validity test) b the maximum size of the zone (125 mots) b the usable size of the zone (determined by the function being addressed).
However, reading must always begin at the first word in the zone (any other address
triggers an exception reply "incorrect address").
The first word in the zone (function code and relay number) may have the following
values: b xxyy: with v function code xx different from 00 and FFh v relay number yy different from FFh.
The settings are available and validated. They word is a copy of the "request frame".
The zone contents remain valid until the next request is made.
The other word are not significant. b FFFFh: the "request frame" has been processed, but the results in the
"reply frame" are not yet available. It is necessary to repeat "reply frame" reading.
The other words are not significant. b xxFFh: with function code xx different from 00 and FFh. The function for which the
remote reading request has been made is not valid. The function is not included in
the particular Sepam, or remote reading of it is not authorized: refer to the list of
functions which accommodate re
CRED301005EN
PCRED301005EN - 07/2012
Modbus communication Access to remote settings
NOTICE
RISK OF UNINTENDED OPERATION b The device must only be configured and set by qualified personnel, using the results of the installation protection system study. b During commissioning of the installation and following any modification, check that the Sepam configuration and protection function settings are consistent with the results of this study.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Remote setting
Data that can be remotely set Writing of the settings of all the protection functions may be accessed remotely.
Exchange principle Remote setting is allowed for Sepam units. Remote setting is carried out for a given function, relay by relay. It takes place in two steps: b first of all, the master indicates the function code and relay number, followed by the values of all the settings in the a "write request frame". The request is acknowledged to free the network b the master then reads a reply zone to find the required information by means of a "reply frame", a reply zone designed for checking that the settings have been processed. Each function has its own particular reply zone contents. The contents are same as those of the reply frame. To use remote setting, it is necessary to make all the settings for the function concerned, even if some of them have not changed.
Request frame The request is made by the master using a "write n words" (function 16) operation at the address 2100h. The zone to be written contains a maximum of 123 words. It contains the values of all the settings. It consists of the following:
2100h
B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00
Function code
Relay number
Settings
..............
(special field for each function)
..............
The content of the address 2100h may be read using a "read n words" (function 3). The function code field may have the following values: b 01h to 99h (BCD encoding) for the list of protection functions F01 to F99.
5
The relay number field is used as follows: b for protection, it indicates the relay involved, varying from 1 to N, N being the
maximum number of relays available in the Sepam. It may never be equal to 0.
Exception reply In addition to the usual cases, Sepam can send type 07 exception replies (not acknowledged) if: b another remote reading or setting request is being processed b the remote setting function is inhibited.
PCRED301005EN
123
Modbus communication Access to remote settings
Reply frame The reply sent back by the Sepam is the same as the remote reading reply frame. It fits into a zone containing a maximum of 125 words at the address 2000h and is composed of the effective settings of the function following a semantic check:
2000h-207Ch
B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00
Function code
Relay number
Settings
..............
(special field for each function)
..............
This zone is read by a "read n words" operation (function 3) at the address 2000h.
The length of the exchange may unclude: b the first word only (validity test) b the maximum size of the reply zone (125 words) b the usable size of the reply zone (determined by the function being addressed).
However, reading must always begin at the first word in the address zone
(any other address triggers an exception reply "incorrect address").
The first word in the reply zone (function code and relay number) has the same
values as those described for the remote reading reply frame. b xxyy: with: v function code xx different from 00 and FFh v relay number yy different from FFh.
The settings are available and validated. The word is a copy of the "request frame".
The zone contents remain valid until the next request is made. b 0000h: no "request frame" has been formulated yet, as it is the case, in particular,
when the Sepam is switched on.
The other words are not significant. b FFFFh: the "request frame" has been processed, but the results in the "reply
5
frame" are not yet available. It is necessary to repeat "reply frame" reading. The other words are not significant. b xxFFh: with function code xx different from 00 and FFh. The function for which the
remote reading request has been made is not valid. The function is not included in
that particular Sepam, or access to settings is impossible, both in read and write
mode.
124
CRED301005EN
Modbus communication Access to remote settings
Description of settings
Data format All the settings are transmitted in signed 32-bit whole number form (encoding, as a complement of 2). Particular setting value: 7FFF FFFFh means that the setting is outside the validity range.
1 The Enabled or Disabled setting is encoded as follows: 0 = Disabled, 1 = Enabled
2 The tripping curve setting is encoded as follows:
0 = definite
1 = standard inverse time
9 = IEC VIT/
2 = long time inverse
10 = IEC EIT/C
3 = very inverse time
11 = IEEE Mod. inverse
4 = extremely inverse time
12 = IEEE Very inverse
5 = ultra inverse time
13 = IEEE Extr. inverse
6 = RI
14 = IAC inverse
7 = IEC SIT/A
15 = IAC very inverse
8 = IEC LTI/B
16 = IAC extr. inverse
3 The setting of the timer hold curve is encoded as follows: 0 = definite time 1 = IDMT
4 The H2 restraint variable is encoded as follows: 0 = H2 restraint 1 = no H2 restraint
5 The tripping curve setting is: 0 = definite time 1 = IDMT
6 The negative sequence factor is:
0 = None (0) 1 = Low (2.25) 2 = Average (4.5)
5
3 = High (9)
7 Acknowledgment of the ambient temperature is encoded as follows:
0 = No 1 = Yes
8 Not used
9 The inhibition input setting is encoded as follows:
0 = No inhibition 1 = Inhibit recloser by logic input I26
10 Not used
11 The activation mode of each of the cycles is encoded as follows:
Correspondence between bit position and protection according to the table below:
Bit
Activation by
0
Inst O/C 1
1
Time-delayed O/C 1
2
Inst O/C 2
3
Time-delayed O/C 2
4
Inst E/F 1
5
Time-delayed E/F 1
6
Inst E/F 2
7
Time-delayed E/F 2
The bit status is encoded as follows: 0 = No activation by the protection 1 = Activation by the protection.
12 The time delay unit for the CLPU functions is encoded as follows: 0 = millisecond 1 = second 2 = minute
PCRED301005EN
125
Modbus communication Access to remote settings
General characteristics settings (read only)
Function number: 3002
Setting Data
Format/Unit
1
Rated frequency
0 = 50 Hz 1 = 60 Hz
2
Remote setting enabled
1 = disabled
3
Sepam working language
0 = English 1 = Customized language
4
Number of period before
1
disturbance recording
5
Active setting groupe
0 = Setting group A 1 = Setting group B 2 = setting group A and B 3 = Choice by input I13 4 = Choice by remote control 5 = Logic discrimination
6
Setting mode
0 = TMS 1 = 10I/Is
7
Type of phase current sensor
0 = 5 A CT 1 = 1 A CT 2 = LPTC
8
Number of CTs
0 = 3 TC (I1, I2, I3) 1 = 2 TC (I1, I3)
9
Rated current
A
10
Base current
A
11
Residual current mode
0 = 3I sum 1 = 2 A rated CSH 2 = 20 A rated CSH 3 = 1 A CT 4 = 5 A CT 5 = ACE990 Range 1 6 = ACE990 Range 2
12
Rated residual current Ino
A
5
13
Integration period
0 = 5 mn 1 = 10 mn 2 = 15 mn
3 = 30 mn
4 = 60 mn
14
Reserved
15
Rated primary voltage Unp
V
16
Rated secondary voltage Uns
0 = 100 V 1 = 110 V 2 = 115 V 3 = 120 V 4 = 200 V 5 = 230 V 6 = Numerical value, see setting 19
17
Voltages mesured by VTs
0 = 3 V (V1, V2, V3) 1 = 2 U (U21, U32) 2 = 1 U (U21)
18
Residual voltage mode
0 = none 1 = 3 V sum 2 = external VT --Uns/3 3 = external VT --Uns/3
19
Secondary rated voltage Uns
V
126
CRED301005EN
Modbus communication Access to remote settings
Protection settings
They are organized according to increasing ANSI codes.
ANSI 27 - Phase-to-phase undervoltage Function number: 10xx Relay 1: xx = 01 Relay 2: xx = 02
Setting Data
1
Enabled or disabled
2
Us set point
3
Tripping time delay
4 to 8
Reserved
Format/Unit 1 % Unp 10 ms
ANSI 27D/47 - Positive sequence undervoltage Function number: 08xx Relay 1: xx = 01 Relay 2: xx = 02
Setting Data
1
Enabled or disabled
2
Vsd set point
3
Tripping time delay
4 to 8
Reserved
Format/Unit 1 % Unp 10 ms
ANSI 27R - Remanent undervoltage
Function number: 0901
Setting 1
Data Enabled or disabled
Format/Unit 1
2
Us set point
% Unp
3 4 to 8
Tripping time delay Reserved
10 ms
5
ANSI 27S - Phase-to-neutral undervoltage
Function number: 1801
Setting Data
Format/Unit
1
Enabled or disabled
1
2
Vs set point
% Vnp
3
Tripping time delay
10 ms
4 to 8
Reserved
ANSI 37 - Phase undercurrent Function number: 0501
Setting Data
1
Enabled or disabled
2
Is set point
3
Tripping time delay
Format/Unit 1 % lb 10 ms
ANSI 38/49T - Temperature monitoring Function number: 15xx Relay 1: xx = 01 Relay 2: xx = 02 Relay 3: xx = 03 Relay 4: xx = 04 Relay 5: xx = 05 Relay 6: xx = 06 Relay 7: xx = 07 Relay 8: xx = 08
Setting Data
1
Enabled or disabled
2
Alarm set point
3
Trip set point
4 to 8
Reserved
Format/Unit 1 °C
°C
PCRED301005EN
127
Modbus communication Access to remote settings
ANSI 46 - Negative sequence / unbalance Function number: 0301
Setting Data
1
Enable or disabled
2
Tripping curve
3
Is set point
4
Tripping time delay
Format/Unit 1 5 % Ib 10 ms
ANSI 48/51LR/14 - Locked rotor, excessive starting time
Function number: 0601
Setting Data
Format/Unit
1
Enabled or disabled
1
2
Is set point
% Ib
3
Excessive starting time delayB (ST)
10 ms
4
Locked rotor time delay (LT)
10 ms
5
Locked rotor on start time delay (LTS)
10 ms
ANSI 49RMS - Thermal overload Function number: 0401
Setting Data
Format/Unit
1
Enable or disabled
1
2
Negative sequence factor
6
3
Is set point for switching from group A/group B
% Ib
4
Accounting for ambient temperature
7
5
Maximum equipment temperature
° C
6
Reserved
7
Reserved
8
Group A - heatrise alarm set point
%
9
Group A - Heat rise tripping set point
%
5
10
Group A - heating time constant
11
Group A - cooling time constant
minutes minutes
12
Group A - initial heatrise value
%
13
Group B - enabled or disabled
1
14
Group B - heatrise alarm set point
%
15
Group B - heatrise tripping set point
%
16
Group B - heating time constant
minutes
17
Group B - cooling time constant
minutes
18
Group B - initial heatrise value
%
ANSI 50/51 - Phase current Function number: 01xx Relay 1: xx = 01 Relay 2: xx = 02
Setting Data
1
Reserved
2
Group A - tripping curve
3
Group A - Is set point
4
Group A - tripping time delay
5
Group A - timer hold curve
6
Group A - timer hold delay
7
Group B - H2 restraint
8
Group B - Isc min
9
ON/OFF
10
Group B - tripping curve
11
Group B - Is set point
12
Group B - tripping time delay
13
Group B - timer hold curve
14
Group B - timer hold delay
15
Group B - H2 restraint
16
Group B - Isc min
Format/Unit
2 0.1 A 10 ms 3 10 ms 4 0,1 A 1 2 0.1 A 10 ms 3 10 ms 4 0.1 A
128
CRED301005EN
Modbus communication Access to remote settings
ANSI 50BF - Breaker failure Function number: 2101
Setting Data
1
ON or OFF
2
Is set point
3
Tripping time delay
4
Use close position of circuit breaker
Format/Unit 1
0.1 A 10 ms 0 = No 1 = Yes
ANSI 50N/51N or 50G/51G - Earth fault Function number: 02xx Relay 1: xx = 01 Relay 2: xx = 02
Setting Data
1
Reserved
2
Group A - tripping curve
3
Group A - Is0 set point
4
Group A - tripping time delay
5
Group A - timer hold curve
6
Group A - timer hold delay
7
Group A - H2 restraint
8
Reserved
9
ON/OFF
10
Group B - tripping curve
11
Group B - Is0 set point
12
Group B - tripping time delay
13
Group B - timer hold curve
14
Group B - timer hold delay
15
Group B - H2 restraint
16
Reserved
ANSI 59 - Phase-to-phase overvoltage Function number: 11xx
Relay 1: xx = 01 Relay 2: xx = 02
Setting 1
Data Enabled or disabled
2
Us set point
3
Tripping time delay
4 to 8
Reserved
Format/Unit
2 0.1 A 10 ms 3 10 ms 4
1 2 0.1 A 10 ms 3 10 ms 4
5
Format/Unit 1 % Unp 10 ms
ANSI 59N - Neutral voltage displacement Function number: 12xx Relay 1: xx = 01 Relay 2: xx = 02
Setting Data
1
Enabled or disabled
2
Vs0 set point
3
Tripping time delay
4 to 8
Reserved
Format/Unit 1 % Unp 10 ms
ANSI 66 - Starts per hour Function number: 0701
Setting Data
1
Enabled or disabled
2
Period of time
3
Total number of starts
4
Number of consecutive hot starts
5
Number of consecutive starts
6
Time delay between starts
Format/Unit 1 hours 1 1 1 minutes
PCRED301005EN
129
Modbus communication Access to remote settings
ANSI 79 - Recloser function Function number: 1701
Setting Data
1
Recloser --enabled or disabled
2
Recloser inhibition by input I26
3
Number of cycles
4
Recloser --disengaging time delay
5
Recloser --inhibition time delay
6
Reserved
7
Cycle 1 --activation mode
8
Cycle 1 --isolation time delay
9
Reserved
10
Cycle 2 --activation mode
11
Cycle 2 --isolation time delay
12
Reserved
13
Cycle 3 --activation mode
14
Cycle 3 --isolation time delay
15
Reserved
16
Cycle 4 --activation mode
17
Cycle 4 --isolation time delay
Format/Unit 1 9 1 to 4 10 ms 10 ms
11 10 ms
11 10 ms
11 10 ms
11 10 ms
ANSI 81H - Overfrequency Function number: 1301
Setting Data
1
Enabled or disabled
2
Fs set point
3
Tripping time delay
4 to 8
Reserved
Format/Unit 1 0.1 Hz 10 ms
ANSI 81L - Underfrequency
5
Function number: 14xx Relay 1: xx = 01
Relay 2: xx = 02
Setting Data
Format/Unit
1
Enabled or disabled
1
2
Fs set point
0.1 Hz
3
Tripping time delay
10 ms
4 to 8
Reserved
ANSI 81R - Rate of change of frequency
Function number: 1601
Setting Data
1
Enabled or disabled
2
dFs/dt set point
3
Tripping time delay
4 to 8
Reserved
Format/Unit 1 0.1 Hz/s 10 ms
130
CRED301005EN
Modbus communication Access to remote settings
CLPU 50/51 and CLPU 50N/51N function parameter settings
Function number: 3006
Setting Data
Format/Unit
1
Time before activation (Tcold)
10 ms
2
Pick-up threshold CPUs
% In
3
Global action CLPU 50/51 setting
0 = blocking
1 = multiplication
4
Global action CLPU 50N/51N setting
0 = blocking
1 = multiplication
5
Unit 1/Group A 50/51: pick-up time delay T
(1)
6
Unit 1/Group A 50/51: pick-up time delay T unit
12
7
Unit 1/Group A 50/51: multiplying factor M
% Is
8
Unit 1/Group A 50/51: ON or OFF
1
9
Unit 1/Group B 50/51: pick-up time delay T
(1)
10
Unit 1/Group B 50/51: pick-up time delay T unit
12
11
Unit 1/Group B 50/51: multiplying factor M
% Is
12
Unit 1/Group B 50/51: ON or OFF
1
13
Unit 2/Group A 50/51: pick-up time delay T
(1)
14
Unit 2/Group A 50/51: pick-up time delay T unit
12
15
Unit 2/Group A 50/51: multiplying factor M
% Is
16
Unit 2/Group A 50/51: ON or OFF
1
17
Unit 2/Group B 50/51: pick-up time delay T
(1)
18
Unit 2/Group B 50/51: pick-up time delay T unit
12
19
Unit 2/Group B 50/51: multiplying factor M
% Is
20
Unit 2/Group B 50/51: ON or OFF
1
21
Unit 1/Group A 50N/51N: pick-up time delay T0
(1)
22
Unit 1/Group A 50N/51N: pick-up time delay T0 unit
12
23
Unit 1/Group A 50N/51N: multiplying factor M0
% Is0
24
Unit 1/Group A 50N/51N: ON or OFF
1
25
Unit 1/Group B 50N/51N: pick-up time delay T0
26
Unit 1/Group B 50N/51N: pick-up time delay T0 unit
27
Unit 1/Group B 50N/51N: multiplying factor M0
(1)
12 % Is0
5
28
Unit 2/Group B 50N/51N: ON or OFF
1
29
Unit 2/Group A 50N/51N: pick-up time delay T0
(1)
30
Unit 2/Group A 50N/51N: pick-up time delay T0 unit
12
31
Unit 2/Group A 50N/51N: multiplying factor M0
% Is0
32
Unit 2/Group A 50N/51N: ON or OFF
1
33
Unit 2/Group B 50N/51N: pick-up time delay T0
(1)
34
Unit 2/Group B 50N/51N: pick-up time delay T0 unit
12
35
Unit 2/Group B 50N/51N: multiplying factor M0
% Is0
36
Unit 2/Group B 50N/51N: ON or OFF
1
(1) numerical value, see time delay T (or T0) unit setting.
PCRED301005EN
131
Modbus communication Disturbance recording
Presentation
The disturbance recording function is used to record analog and logical signals during a time interval. Sepam can store two records. Each record comprises two files: b configuration file with suffix .CFG b data file with suffix .DAT. The data of each record may be transferred via the Modbus link. It is possible to transfer 1 or 2 records to a remote monitoring and control system. The record may be transferred as many times as possible, until it is overwritten by a new record. If a record is made by Sepam while the oldest record is
Reading the identification zone Given the volume of data to be transmitted, the master must ensure that there are data to be recovered and prepare the exchanges when necessary. The identification zone, described below, is read by the reading of N words starting at the address 2204h: b 2 reserve words forced to 0 b size of record configuration files encoded in 1 word b size of record data files encoded in 1 words b number of records encoded in 1 word b date of record (most recent) encoded in 4 words (see format below) b date of record (least recent) encoded in 4 words (see format below) b 24 reserve words. All of these data are consecutive.
being transferred, the oldest record is altered. If a command (e.g. a remote reading or remote setting request) is carried out during the transfer of a disturbance recording record, the record is not disturbed.
Time-setting Each record can be dated. Time-setting of Sepam is described in the "Timetagging of events" section.
Reading the contents of the different files
Request frame The master makes the request by writing the date of the record to be transferred (function 16) in 4 words starting at the address 2200h. It should be noted that requesting a new record amounts to stopping the transfers which are in progress. This is not the case for an identification zone transfer request.
2200h
B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00
Transferring records
O OOOOOOOY Y Y Y Y Y Y Y O OOOMMMMOOOD D D D D
The transfer requests are made record by record, i.e. one configuration file and one data file per record.
O
O O H H H H H O O mn mn mn mn mn mn
The master sends the commands in order to:
ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms ms
b find out the characteristics of the records stored in an
identification zone
b read the contents of the different files
b acknowledge each transfer
5
b reread the identification zone to ensure that the record still appears in the list of records available.
Y - 1 byte for years: varies from 0 to 99 years. The master must ensure that the year 00 is later than 99.
M - 1 byte for months: varies from 1 to 12. D - 1 byte for days: varies from 1 to 31. H - 1 byte for hours: varies from 0 to 23. mn - 1 byte for minutes: varies from 0 to 59.
ms - 2 bytes for milliseconds: varies from 0 to 59999.
Reply frame Reading of each portion of configuration and data file records by a reading frame (function 3) of 125-words starting at the address 2300h.
2300h
B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B09 B08 B07 B06 B05 B04 B03 B02 B01 B00
Exchange number
..............
Number of usable bytes in the data zone
Data zone
..............
Reading should always begin with the first word in the address zone (any other address triggers an exception reply "incorrect address"). The configuration and data files are read in their entirety in Sepam. They are transferred adjacently.
132
CRED301005EN
Modbus communication Disturbance recording
If the master requests more exchanges than necessary, the exchange number
remains unchanged and the number of usable bytes is forced to 0. To guarantee the
data transfers, it is necessary to allow a response time of about 500 ms between
each reading operation at 2300h.
The first word transmitted is an exchange word. The exchange word comprises two
fields: b the most significant byte contains the exchange number. It is incremented by 1 by
the Sepam each time a successful transfer takes place. When it reaches the value
FFh, it automatically goes back to zero b the least significant byte contains the number of usable bytes in the data zone. It
is initialized to zero after energizing and must be different from FFh.
The exchange word may also have the following values: b xxyy: the number of usable bytes in the data zone yy must be different from FFh b 0000h: no "read requeste frame" has been formulated yet, as it is the case in
particular, when the Sepam is switched on. The other words are not significant, b FFFFh: the "request frame" has been processed, but the results in the reply zone
are not yet available.
It is necessary to repeat "reply frame" reading.
The other words are not significant.
The words which follow the exchange word make up the data zone.
Since the configuration and data files are adjacent, a frame may contain the end of
the configuration file and the beginning of the data file of a record.
It is up to the remote monitoring and control system software to reconstruct the files
in accordance with the transmitted number of usable bytes and the size of the files
indicated in the identification zone.
Acknowledging a transfer
To inform the Sepam that a record block that it has just read has been received
correctly, the master must write the number of the last exchange that it has carried
out in the "exchange number" filed and set the "number of usable bytes in the data
zone" of the exchange word to zero.
The Sepam only increments the exchange number if new acquisition bursts are
present. Rereading the identification zone
5
To ensure that the record has not been modified, during its transfer by a new record,
the master rereads the contents of the identification zone and ensures that the
recovered record date is still present.
PCRED301005EN
133
Modbus communication Reading Sepam identification
Presentation
The "Read Device Identification" function is used to access in a standardized manner the information required to clearly identify a device. The description is made up of a set of objects (ASCII character strings). Sepam series 20 accepts the "read identification" function (conformity level 02). For a complete description of the function, go to www.modbus.org. The description below covers a subset of the function, adapted to Sepam series 20.
Implementation
Request frame The request frame is made of the following components.
Field
Size (bytes)
Slave number
1
43 (2Bh)
1
Generic access function code
14 (0Eh)
1
Read device identification
01 or 02
1
Type of read
00
1
Object number
CRC16
2
The type of read is used to select a simplified (01) or a standard (02) description.
Sepam series 20 identification The objects making up the Sepam series 20 identification are listed below.
Reply frame The reply frame is made of the following components.:
Field
Size (bytes)
Number Type
Value
Slave number
1
0
VendorName
"Merlin Gerin" or
"Schneider Electric"
43 (2Bh) 14 (0Eh)
1
Generic access function code
1
Read device identification
1
ProductCode
Application EAN13 code
01 or 02
1
Type of read
2
MajorMinorRevision Application version number
(Vxxyy)
02
1
Conformity level
00
1
Continuation-frame flag (none for Sepam)
3
VendorURL
"www.schneider-electric.com"
00
1
Reserved
5 4 5
ProductName ModelName
"Sepam series 20"
Application name (e.g. "M20 Motor")
n
1
Number of objects (according to read type)
0bj1
1
Number of first object
lg1
1
Length first object
6
UserAppName Sepam marking
txt1
lg1 ASCII string of first object
.....
...
objn
1
Number nth object
lgn
1
Length nth object
txtn
Ign ASCII string of nth object
CRC16
2
Exception frame If an error occurs during request processing, a special exception frame is sent.
Field
Size (bytes)
Slave number
1
171 (ABh)
1
Generic access exception (2Bh + 80h)
14 (0Eh)
1
Read device identification
01 or 03
1
Type of error
CRC16
2
134
CRED301005EN
Installation
Contents
Safety and Cyber-security instructions
136
Before starting
Precautions
137
Equipment identification
138
Base unit
141
Dimensions
141
Assembly
142
Description
143
Connection
144
Connection of current inputs
145
Other phase current input connection schemes
146
Other residual current input connection schemes
147
Raccordement des entrées courant différentiel résiduel en
basse tension
149
Connections of input voltage
151
Other voltage input connection schemes
152
Raccordement des entrées phase en basse tension
153
1 A/5 A current transformers
154
Voltage transformers
156
LPCT type current sensors
157
CSH120, CSH200 and CSH300 Core balance CTs
160
CSH30 interposing ring CT
162
ACE990 Core balance CT interface
164
MES114 modules
166
Optional remote modules
169
Connection
MET148-2 Temperature sensor module DSM303 Remote advanced UMI module Communication accessory selection guide
170
6 174
176
Connection of communication interfaces
177
Connection cords
ACE949-2 2-wire RS 485 network interface
178
ACE959 4-wire RS 485 network interface
179
ACE937 fiber optic interface
180
ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2 Multi-protocol interfaces 181 Description 183 Connection 184
ACE909-2 RS 232/RS 485 converter
186
ACE919CA and ACE919CC RS 485/RS 485 converters 188
ECI850 IEC 61850 Sepam server
190
PCRED301005EN
135
Installation
6
136
Safety and Cyber-security instructions Before starting
This page contains important safety and cyber-security instructions that must be followed precisely before attempting to install, repair, service or maintain electrical equipment. Carefully read and follow the safety and cyber-security instructions described below.
Safety instructions
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC, BURNS OR EXPLOSION b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions. b NEVER work alone. b Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off. b Before performing visual inspections, tests, or maintenance on this equipment, disconnect all sources of electric power. Assume that all circuits are live until they have been completely de-energized, tested and tagged. Pay particular attention to the design of the power system. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. b Beware of potential hazards, wear personal protective equipment, carefully inspect the work area for tools and objects that may have been left inside the equipment. b The successful operation of this equipment depends upon proper handling, installation, and operation. Neglecting fundamental installation requirements can lead to personal injury as well as damage to electrical equipment or other property. b Handling this product requires relevant expertise in the field of protection of electrical networks. Only competent people who have this expertise are allowed to configure and set up this product. b Before performing Dielectric (Hi-Pot) or Megger testing on any equipment in which the relay is installed, disconnect all input and output wires to the relay. High voltage testing can damage electronic components contained in the Sepam unit. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
Cyber security instructions
SEPAM is designed to be operated only on a protected network. (see document "Recommended Cybersecurity Best Practices" --> https://www.se.com/us/en/download/document/7EN52-0390/ )
NOTICE
HAZARD OF DATA TAMPERING OR UNINTENDED OPERATION
b Secure the local network : physically or logically segment the network and restrict access using standard controls such as firewall. b Enable IP Filtering for Modbus/TCP and IEC61850 (see document "SEPAM IEC61850 communication" SEPED306024 chapter configuration of ACE850 communication interface). b Inhibit the remote-setting. It is possible to inhibit the remote-setting function using a configuration parameter accessible via SFT2841. In the default set-up (factory settings), the remote-setting function is inhibited.
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS CAN RESULT IN COMPROMISED SECURITY. SCHNEIDER-ELECTRIC MAKES NO WARRANTY THAT THE SEPAM PRODUCTS WILL BE FREE FROM VULNERABILITIES, CORRUPTION, ATTACK, VIRUSES, INTERFERENCE, HACKING OR OTHER SECURITY INTRUSIONS OR CYBER THREATS, AND SCHNEIDER-ELECTRIC DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY IN RELATION THERETO.
CRED301005EN
Installation
Precautions
We recommend that you follow the
Transport, handling and storage
instructions given in this document for quick, correct installation of your Sepam unit: b Equipment identification
Sepam in its original packaging
Transport: Sepam can be shipped to any destination by all usual means of transport without
1
b Assembly
taking any additional precautions.
b Connection of inputs, current, voltage and sensors b Connection of power supply b Checking prior to commissioning
Handling: Sepam can be handled without any particular care and can even withstand being dropped by a person standing at floor-level.
Storage: Sepam can be stored in its original packaging, in an appropriate location for several
years:
b Temperature between -25°C and +70°C (between -13°F and +158°F)
b Humidity y 90%.
Periodic, yearly checking of the environment and the packaging condition is
recommended.
Energize the Sepam for 1 hour:
b every 5 years for a storage temperature < 30 ° C (86 ° F)
b every 3 years for a storage temperature u 30 ° C (86 ° F)
b every 2 years for a storage temperature u 50 ° C (122 ° F)
Once Sepam has been unpacked, it should be energized as soon as possible.
If the storage time has been longer than 2 years, it is advisable to activate each
of the output relays 5 times during commissioning (see procedure in chapter
"Commissioning - Checking the connection of the logic outputs", page 298)
Sepam installed in a cubicle
Transport: Sepam can be transported by all usual means of transport in the customary conditions used for cubicles. Storage conditions should be taken into consideration for a long period of transport.
Handling: Should the Sepam fall out of a cubicle, check its condition by visual inspection and energizing.
Storage:
Keep the cubicle protection packing for as long as possible. Sepam, like all electronic
units, should not be stored in a damp environment for more than a month. Sepam
should be energized as quickly as possible. If this is not possible, the cubicle reheating system should be activated.
6
Environment of the installed Sepam
Operation in a damp environment The temperature/relative humidity factors must be compatible with the unit's environmental withstand characteristics. If the use conditions are outside the normal zone, special arrangements should be made before commissioning, such as air conditioning of the premises.
Operation in a polluted atmosphere A contaminated industrial atmosphere (such as the presence of chlorine, hydrofluoric acid, sulfur, solvents, etc.) can cause corrosion of the electronic components, in which case environmental control arrangements should be made (such as pressurized premises with filtered air, etc.) before commissioning. The effect of corrosion on Sepam has been tested according to the IEC 60068-2-60 and EIA 364-65A (See "Environmental Characteristic", page 18).
PCRED301005EN
137
Installation
6
DE80991
DE80990
Equipment identification
Identification of the base unit
Each Sepam comes in a single package which contains the base unit and the base unit 20-pin connector (CCA620 or CCA622). The other optional accessories such as modules, current or voltage input connectors and cords come in separate packages. To identify a Sepam, check the 2 labels on the right side panel of the base unit describing the product's functional and hardware features.
b Hardware reference and designation label
59607
Series 20/advanced UMI/24-250V Séries 20/IHM avancée/24-250V
S10UD
10491234
User Machine Interface model Power supply
59607 10491234
Test PASS: 12/09/2010 Operator: C99
b Functional reference and designation label
S20
S20
series 20
Type of application Working language
} Additional information (not given systematically)
{
138
CRED301005EN
Installation
DE80234
Equipment identification
Identification of accessories
The accessories such as optional modules, current or voltage connectors and connection cords come in separate packages, which are identified by labels. b Example of MES114 module identification label:
Part number
Commercial reference
6
PCRED301005EN
139
Installation
Equipment identification
List of Sepam series 20 references
Reference
59603 59607 59608 59609 59611
Description
Base unit with basic UMI, 24-250 V DC and 100-240 V AC power supply (1) Base unit with advanced UMI, 24-250 V DC and 100-240 V AC power supply (1) DSM303, remote advanced UMI module Working language English/French Working language English/Spanish
59620 59621 59622 59624 59625
Substation application type S20 Transformer application type T20 Motor application type M20 Busbar application type B21 Busbar application type B22
59778 59779
Substation application type S24 Transformer application type T24
59629 59630 59631 59632
CCA634 connector for 1 A/5 A CT + I0 current sensors CCA630 connector for 1 A/5 A CT current sensors CCA670 connector for LPCT current sensors CCA640 connector for VT voltage sensors
59634
59635 59636 59637 59638 59639
CSH30 interposing ring CT for I0 input CSH120 residual current sensor, diameter 120 mm (4.7 in) CSH200 residual current sensor, diameter 196 mm (7.72 in) CSH300 residual current sensor, diameter 291 mm (11.46 in) ECI850: IEC 61850 Sepam server with PRI surge arrester AMT852 lead sealing accessory
59641 59642 59643 59644
MET148-2 8-temperature sensor module ACE949-2 2-wire RS 485 network interface ACE959 4-wire RS 485 network interface ACE937 optical fiber interface
59646
MES114 10 input + 4 output module/24-250 V DC (1)
59647
MSA141 1 analog output module
59648
ACE909-2 RS 485/RS 232 converter
6
59649 59650
ACE919CA RS 485/RS 485 interface (AC power supply) ACE919CC RS 485/RS 485 interface (DC power supply)
59651
MES114E 10 input + 4 output module/110-125 V DC and V AC
59652
MES114F 10 input + 4 output module/220-250 V DC and V AC
59660 59661 59662 59663 59664
CCA770 remote module connection cord, L = 0.6 m (2 ft) CCA772 remote module connection cord, L = 2 m (6.6 ft) CCA774 remote module connection cord, L = 4 m (13 ft) CCA612 communication interface connection cord, L = 3 m (9.8 ft) CCA783 PC RS 232 connection cord
59666 59667 59668 59669 59670 59671 59672
CCA613 LPCT test plug ACE917 LPCT injection adapter CCA620 20-pin screw type connector CCA622 20-pin ring lug connector AMT840 mounting plate CCA784 PC USB connection cord ACE990 core balance CT interface for I0 input
(1) List of cancelled references and their replacements: b 59602 (base unit with basic UMI, 24 V DC power supply) cancelled and replaced by reference 59603 b 59606 (base unit with advanced UMI, 24 V DC power supply) cancelled and replaced by reference 59607 b 59645 (MES108 4I/4O module) cancelled and replaced by reference 59646 b 59720 (ACE969TP) cancelled and replaced by reference 59723 b 59721 (ACE969FO) cancelled and replaced by reference 59724 b 59626 (substation application S23) superseded by reference 59778. b 59627 (transformer application T23) superseded by reference 59779.
59676
Kit 2640 2 sets of spare connectors
59679
SFT2841 CD-ROM with SFT2841 and SFT2826 software, without CCA783 or CCA784 cords
59723
59724
59726 TCSEAK0100
ACE969TP-2 2-wire RS 485 multi-protocol interface (Modbus, DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-103)(1)
ACE969FO-2 fiber-optic multi-protocol interface (Modbus, DNP3 or IEC 60870-5-103)(1)
SFT850 CD-ROM with IEC 61850 configuration software
Ethernet configuration kit for ECI850
140
CRED301005EN
Installation
Base unit Dimensions
DE80030 DE80114 DE80042
mm in
8.8
Dimensions
mm in
Mounting
1.58
clip
7.71
8.8
mm in
6.3
6.93
(2) 3.85 2.04
(1) 1.22
6.92 Front view of Sepam.
CAUTION
HAZARD OF CUTS Trim the edges of the cut-out plates to remove any jagged edges.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in serious injury.
mm in
7.95
6.38
8.5 9.23 AMT840 mounting plate. PCRED301005EN
0.25 1.58 1.58
1.58 9.05 1.58 1.58
0.60 0.4
DE80082
DE80028 DE80044
1.58 1.58
(2) 3.86
(1) 1.22
Sepam with advanced UMI and MES114, flush-mounted in front panel.
Clearance for Sepam assembly and wiring.
Sepam with advanced UMI and MES114, flush-mounted in front panel.
(1) With basic UMI: 23 mm (0.91 in). (2) With CCA634: 105 mm (4.13 in).
With CCT640: 115 mm (4.58 in).
Cut-out
Cut-out accuracy must be complied with to ensure good withstand.
For mounting plate between 1.5 mm (0.059 in) and 3 mm (0.12 in) thick
mm in
For mounting plate 3.17 mm (0.125 inch) thick
mm in
6
7.95
7.95
2.91 0.47
0.08
6.38
6.38
Assembly with AMT840 mounting plate
Used to mount Sepam with basic UMI at the back of the compartment with access to the connectors on the rear panel. Mounting associated with the use of the remote advanced UMI (DSM303).
mm in
(1) 4.84
Sepam with basic UMI and MES114, mounted with AMT840 plate. Mounting plate thickness: 2 mm (0.079 in). (1) With CCA634: 130 mm (5.12 In).
With CCT640: 140 mm (5.51 In).
141
DE80029
Installation
Base unit Assembly
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions. b NEVER work alone. b Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
DE51143
The Sepam is simply flush-mounted and secured by its clips. No additional screw type fastening is required.
1 Present the product as indicated, making sure the metal plate is correctly entered in the groove at the bottom.
2 Tilt the product and press on the top part to clamp it with the clips.
6
142
CRED301005EN
Installation
Base unit Description
Sepam components
b Base unit 1 v A base unit connector: - power supply - output relays - CSH30, 120, 200, 300 or ACE990 input. Screw-type connector shown (CCA620), or ring lug connector (CCA622) v B 1 A/5 A CT current input connector (CCA630 or CCA634) or LPCT current input connector (CCA670) or VT voltage input connector (CCT640) v C communication module link connection (white) v D remote inter-module link connection (black) b Optional input/output module 2 (MES114) v L M MES114 module connectors v K MES114 module connector.
DE52149
6
PCRED301005EN
143
Installation
Base unit Connection
NOTICE
LOSS OF PROTECTION OR RISK OF NUISANCE TRIPPING If the Sepam is no longer supplied with power or is in fail-safe position, the protection functions
are no longer active and all the Sepam output
relays are dropped out. Check that this operating mode and the watchdog relay wiring are
compatible with your installation.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage and unwanted shutdown of the electrical installation
Connection of the base unit
The Sepam connections are made to the removable connectors located on the rear panel. All the connectors are screw-lockable.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions. b NEVER work alone. b Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off. b Start by connecting the device to the protective earth and to the functional earth. b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in use. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
DE51131
Wiring of the CCA620 connector: b Without fitting: v 1 wire with maximum cross-section of 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (AWG 24-12) or 2 wires with maximum cross-section of 0.2 to 1 mm2 (AWG 24-18) v Stripped length: 8 to 10 mm (0.31 to 0.39 in) b With fitting: v Recommended wiring with Schneider Electric fitting: - DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16) - DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2.5 mm2 (AWG 12) - AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mm2 (AWG 18) v Tube length: 8.2 mm (0.32 in) v Stripped length: 8 mm (0.31 in).
Wiring of the CCA622 connector:
b Ring lug connectors 6.35 mm (1/4 in)
b Wire with maximum cross-section of 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (AWG 24-12)
b Stripped length: 6 mm (0.236 in)
6
b Use an appropriate tool to crimp the lugs onto the wires b 2 ring or spade lugs maximum per terminal b Tightening torque: 0.7 to 1 N·m (6 to 9 lb-in).
Characteristics of the 4 base unit relay outputs O1, O2, O3, O4 b O1 and O2 are 2 control outputs, used by the breaking device control function for: v O1: breaking device tripping v O2: breaking device closing inhibition b O3 is a non assigned control output. b O4 is a non assigned indication output. It can be assigned to the watchdog function.
144
CRED301005EN
Installation
Base unit Connection of current inputs
Types S20/S23/S24/T20/T23/T24/M20
DE51144
Connection to 1 A/5 A current sensors
Connector Type
Ref.
Cable
A
Screw-type
CCA620 b 1 wire 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (AWG 24-12)
b 2 wires 0.2 to 1 mm2 (AWG 24-18)
6
Ring lug 6.35 mm CCA622 b Cross-section: 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (AWG 24-12)
(1/4 in)
b Stripped length: 6 mm (0.236 in)
b Tightening torque: 0.7 to 1 N.m (6 to 9 lb-in)
B
Ring lug 4 mm
CCA630/ b Cross-section: 1.5 to 6 mm2 (AWG 16-10)
(0.16 in)
CCA634 b Stripped length: 6 mm (0.236 in)
b Tightening torque: 1.2 N.m (11 lb-in)
C
RJ45
D
RJ45
CCA612 b CCA770: L = 0.6 m (2 ft) b CCA772: L = 2 m (6.6 ft) b CCA774: L = 4 m (13 ft)
PCRED301005EN
145
Installation
Base unit Other phase current input connection schemes
DE80144
Variant 1: phase current measurements by 3 x 1 A or 5 A CTs (standard connection)
CCA630/ CCA634
Description Connection of 3 x 1 A or 5 A sensors to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector.
The measurement of the 3 phase currents allows the calculation of residual current.
Parameters
Sensor type Number of CTs Rated current (In)
5 A CT or 1 A CT I1, I2, I3 1 A to 6250 A
DE80145
Variant 2: phase current measurement by 2 x 1 A or 5 A CTs
CCA630/ CCA634
Description Connection of 2 x 1 A or 5 A sensors to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector.
The measurement of phase currents 1 and 3 is sufficient to ensure all the phase current-based protection functions. The phase current I2 is only assessed for metering functions, assuming that I0 = 0.
This arrangement does not allow the calculation of residual current.
Parameters
Sensor type Number of CTs Rated current (In)
5 A CT or 1 A CT I1, I3 1 A to 6250 A
Variant 3: phase current measurement by 3 LPCT type sensors
DE51826
CCA670
Description Connection of 3 Low Power Current Transducer (LPCT) type sensors to the CCA670 connector. The connection of only one or two LPCT sensors is not allowed and causes Sepam to go into fail-safe position.
6
The measurement of the 3 phase currents allows the calculation of residual current.
Parameters
Sensor type
LPCT
Number of CTs
I1, I2, I3
Rated current (In)
25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000, 1600, 2000 or 3150 A
Note: Parameter In must be set 2 twice:
b Software parameter setting using the advanced UMI or the SFT2841 software tool b Hardware parameter setting using microswitches on the CCA670 connector
146
CRED301005EN
Installation
Base unit Other residual current input connection schemes
Variant 1: residual current calculation by sum of 3 phase currents
CCA630/ CCA634
Description Residual current is calculated by the vector sum of the 3 phase currents I1, I2 and I3, measured by 3 x 1 A or 5 A CTs or by 3 LPCT type sensors. See current input connection diagrams.
Parameters
Residual current Sum of 3 Is
Rated residual current In0 = In, CT primary current
Measuring range 0.1 to 40 In0
Variant 2: residual current measurement by CSH120, CSH200 or CSH300 core balance CT (standard connection)
Description Arrangement recommended for the protection of isolated or compensated neutral systems, in which very low fault currents need to be detected.
Parameters
Residual current 2 A rating CSH 20 A rating CSH
Rated residual current In0 = 2 A In0 = 20 A
Measuring range 0.2 to 40 A 2 to 400 A
Variant 3: residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs and CCA634
Description Residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs. b Terminal 7: 1 A CT b Terminal 8: 5 A CT
Parameters
Residual current
Rated residual current
Measuring range
1 A CT
In0 = In, CT primary current
0.1 to 20 In0
5 A CT
In0 = In, CT primary current
0.1 to 20 In0
6
DE80061
DE52520
DE80048
PCRED301005EN
147
DE80115
Installation
Base unit Other residual current input connection schemes
Variant 4: residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs and CSH30 interposing ring CT
Description The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used to connect 1 A or 5 A CTs to Sepam to measure residual current: b Connection of CSH30 interposing ring CT to 1 A CT: make 2 turns through CSH primary b Connection of CSH30 interposing ring CT to 5 A CT: make 4 turns through CSH primary.
turns turns
Parameters
Residual current 1 A CT 5 A CT
Rated residual current In0 = In, CT primary current In0 = In, CT primary current
Measuring range 0.1 to 20 In0 0.1 to 20 In0
DE80116
turns turns
Variant 5: residual current measurement by core balance CT with ratio of 1/n (n between 50 and 1500)
Description
DE51830
The ACE990 is used as an interface between an MV core balance CT with a ratio of
6
1/n (50 < n < 1500) and the Sepam residual current input. This arrangement allows the continued use of existing core balance CTs on the
installation.
Parameters
Residual current
ACE990 - range 1 (0.00578 y k y 0.04)
ACE990 - range 2 (0.0578 y k y 0.26316)
Rated residual current In0 = Ik.n(1)
In0 = Ik.n(1)
Measuring range 0.1 to 20 In0
0.1 to 20 In0
(1) n = number of core balance CT turns k = factor to be determined according to ACE990 wiring and setting range used by Sepam
148
CRED301005EN
Installation
Base unit Connection of low voltage residual current inputs
Variant 1: residual current measurement by CTs on the neutral earthing link (with or without CSH30 interposing ring CT)
Description Residual current is measured with a 1 A or 5 A CT on the neutral point.
Parameters
Residual current 1 A CT 5 A CT
Rated residual current In0 = neutral point CT In In0 = neutral point CT In
Measuring range 0.1 to 20 In0 0.1 to 20 In0
DE80952 DE80953 DE81047
N
PE
B
N B
Connection on TN-S network.
Connection on TT network.
A 19 18
CT 1 A: 2 turns CT 5 A: 4 turns Connection with CSH30.
Variant 2: residual current measurement by CSH120, CSH200 or CSH300 core balance CT on the
neutral earthing link
Description Residual current is measured with a core balance CT on the neutral point. Core
balance CTs are recommended for measuring very low fault currents provided that
the earth fault current remains below 2 kA. Above this value it is advisable to use the
standard variant 1.
Parameters
Residual current
Rated residual current
Measuring range
6
2 A rating CSH
In0 = 2 A
0.1 to 20 In0
20 A rating CSH
In0 = 20 A
0.1 to 20 In0
N
PE
N
Connection on TN-S network.
A 19 18
Connection on TT network.
A 19 18
DE80864 DE80955
PCRED301005EN
149
Installation
Base unit Connection of low voltage residual current inputs
DE80956
Variant 3: residual current measurement by sum of 3 phase currents and neutral current measurement by CSH120, CSH200 or CSH300 core balance CT
Description Measurement by core balance CT is recommended for measuring very low fault currents.
Parameters
Residual current
Rated residual current
Measuring range
2 A rating CSH
In0 = 2 A
0.1 to 40 A
N
20 A rating CSH
In0 = 20 A
0.2 to 400 A
A 19 18
DE81052
Connection on TN-S and TT networks.
Variant 4: residual current measurement by sum of 3 phase currents and neutral current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs and CSH30 interposing ring CT
N
Description
The phase and neutral CTs should have the same primary and secondary currents.
The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used to connect 1 A or 5 A CTs to Sepam to
measure residual current: b Connection of CSH30 interposing ring CT to 1 A CT: make 2 turns through
CSH primary b Connection of CSH30 interposing ring CT to 5 A CT: make 4 turns through
CSH primary.
A 19 18
Parameters
Residual current 1 A CT 5 A CT
Rated residual current In0 = phase CT primary current In In0 = phase CT primary current In
Measuring range 0.1 to 20 In0 0.1 to 20 In0
6
CT 1 A: 2 turns CT 5 A: 4 turns
Connection on TN-S and TT networks.
Variant 5: residual current measurement by sum of 3 phase currents and neutral current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs and CCA634 connector
N
Description
The phase and neutral CTs should have the same primary and secondary currents.
B
Residual current measurement by 1 A or 5 A CTs.
b Terminal 7: 1 A CT
b Terminal 8: 5 A CT
DE80957
Parameters
Residual current 1 A CT 5 A CT
Rated residual current In0 = phase CT primary current In In0 = phase CT primary current In
Measuring range 0.1 to 20 In0 0.1 to 20 In0
Connection on TN-S and TT networks.
150
CRED301005EN
Installation
Base unit Connections of input voltage
B21/B22 types
DE51157
Connector Type
Reference Cable
A
Screw-type Ring lug
CCA620 CCA622
b 1 wire 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (AWG 24-12) b 2 wires 0.2 to 1 mm2 (AWG 24-18) b Cross-section: 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (AWG 24-12)
6
6.35 mm (1/4 in)
b Stripped length: 6 mm (0.236 in)
b Tightening torque: 0.7 to 1 N.m (6 to 9 lb-in)
B
Screw-type
CCT640 b 1 wire 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (AWG 24-12)
b 2 wires 0.2 to 1 mm2 (AWG 24-18)
C
RJ45
CCA612
D
RJ45
b CCA770: L = 0.6 m (2 ft) b CCA772: L =2 m (6.6 ft) b CCA774: L = 4 m (13 ft)
PCRED301005EN
151
Installation
Base unit Other voltage input connection schemes
DE51831
The phase and residual voltage transformer secondary circuits are connected to the CCT640 connector (item B ) on Sepam series 20 type B units. The CCT640 connector contains 4 transformers which perform isolation and impedance matching of the VTs and Sepam input circuits.
Variant 1: measurement of 3 phase-to-neutral voltages (standard connection)
Parameters
Voltages measured by VTs Residual voltage
V1, V2, V3 Sum of 3Vs
Functions available
Voltages measured
V1, V2, V3
Values calculated
U21, U32, U13, V0, Vd, f
Measurements available
All
Protection functions available (according to type of Sepam) All
DE51832
Variant 2: measurement of 3 phase-to-neutral voltages and residual voltage
Parameters
Voltages measured by VTs Residual voltage
V1, V2, V3 External VT
Functions available
Voltages measured
V1, V2, V3, V0
Values calculated
U21, U32, U13, Vd, f
Measurements available
All
Protection functions available (according to type of Sepam) All
Variant 3: measurement of 2 phase-to-phase voltages
Parameters
Voltages measured by VTs Residual voltage
U21, U32 None
DE51833
Functions available
6
Voltages measured Values calculated
V1, V2, V3 U13, Vd, f
Measurements available
U21, U32, U13, Vd, f
Protection functions available (according to type of Sepam) All except 59N, 27S
DE51834
Variant 4: measurement of 1 phase-to-phase voltage and residual voltage
Parameters
Voltages measured by VTs Residual voltage
U21 External VT
Functions available
Voltages measured
U21, V0
Values calculated
f
Measurements available
U21, V0, f
Protection functions available (according to type of Sepam) All except 47, 27D, 27S
DE51835
Variant 5: measurement of 1 phase-to-phase voltage
Parameters
Voltages measured by VTs Residual voltage
U21 None
Functions available
Voltages measured
U21
Values calculated
f
Measurements available
U21, f
Protection functions available (according to type of Sepam) All except 47, 27D, 59N, 27S
152
CRED301005EN
DE80968 DE80969
Installation
Base unit Connection of low voltage phase voltage inputs
Variant 1: TN-S and TN-C networks
Variant 2: TT and IT networks
N
N
When a ground fault occurs on a TN-S or TN-C network, the neutral potential is not affected: the neutral can act as a reference for the VTs.
When a ground fault occurs on a TT or IT network, the neutral potential is affected: the neutral cannot act as a reference for the VTs, phase-to-phase voltages must be used on both phases.
6
PCRED301005EN
153
Installation
1 A/5 A current transformers
Function
Sepam may be connected to any standard 1 A and 5 A current transformer. Schneider Electric offers a range of current transformers to measure primary currents from 50 A to 2500 A. Please consult us for further information.
058731N 058733N
ARJA1.
6
154
DE80059
DE80051
ARJP3. CCA634
Sizing of current transformers
Current transformers should be dimensioned so as not to become saturated by the current values they are required to measure accurately (minimum 5 In).
For overcurrent protection
b Definite time:
The saturation current must be more than 1.5 times the setting value. b IDMT:
The saturation current must be more than 1.5 times the highest working value
on the curve.
Practical solution when there is no information on the settings
Rated secondary Rated
current in
burden
Accuracy class
CT secondary resistance RCT
1 A
2.5 VA
5P 20
< 3
5 A
7.5 VA
5P 20
< 0.2
Wiring resistance Rf
< 0.075
< 0.075
CCA630/CCA634 connector
Function
The current transformers (1 A or 5 A) are connected to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector on the rear panel of Sepam: b The CCA630 connector is used to connect 3 phase current transformers to Sepam b The CCA634 connector is used to connect 3 phase current transformers and a residual current transformer to Sepam. The CCA630 and CCA634 connectors contain interposing ring CTs with through primaries, which ensure impedance matching and isolation between the 1 A or 5 A circuits and Sepam when measuring phase and residual currents. The connectors can be disconnected with the power on since disconnection does not open the CT secondary circuit.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device. b NEVER work alone. b Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off. b To remove current inputs to the Sepam unit, unplug the CCA630 or CCA634 connector without disconnecting the wires from it. The CCA630 and CCA634 connectors ensure continuity of the current transformer secondary circuits. b Before disconnecting the wires connected to the CCA630 or CCA634 connector, short-circuit the current transformer secondary circuits.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
CRED301005EN
MT10490
DE80068 DE80069
Installation
1 A/5 A current transformers
Connecting and assembling the CCA630 connector
1. Open the 2 side shields for access to the connection terminals. The shields can
be removed, if necessary, to make wiring easier. If removed, they must be replaced after wiring.
1
2. If necessary, remove the bridging strap linking terminals 1, 2 and 3. This strap is
supplied with the CCA630.
3. Connect the wires using 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lugs and check the tightness of the
6 screws that guarantee the continuity of the CT secondary circuits.
The connector accommodates wires with cross-sections of 1.5 to 6 mm²
(AWG 16-10).
4. Close the side shields.
5. Plug the connector into the 9-pin inlet on the rear panel (item B ).
. 6. Tighten the 2 CCA630 connector fastening screws on the rear panel of Sepam.
Connecting and assembling the CCA634 connector
Bridging of terminals 1, 2, 3 and 9
Bridging of terminals 1, 2 and 3
1. Open the 2 side shields for access to the connection terminals. The shields can be removed, if necessary, to make wiring easier. If removed, they must be replaced after wiring. 2. According to the wiring required, remove or reverse the bridging strap. This is used to link either terminals 1, 2 and 3, or terminals 1, 2, 3 and 9 (see picture opposite). 3. Use terminal 7 (1 A) or 8 (5 A) to measure the residual current according to the CT secondary. 4. Connect the wires using 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lugs and check the tightness of the 6 screws that guarantee the continuity of the CT secondary circuits. The connector accommodates wires with cross-sections of 1.5 to 6 mm² (AWG 16-10). The wires only exit from the base. 5. Close the side shields. 6. Insert the connector pins into the slots on the base unit. 7. Flatten the connector against the unit to plug it into the 9-pin SUB-D connector (principle similar to that of the MES module). 8. Tighten the mounting screw.
NOTICE
6
HAZARD OF IMPROPER OPERATION Do not use a CCA634 on connector B1 and residual current input I0 on connector A (terminals 18 and 19) simultaneously. Even if it is not connected to a sensor, a CCA634 will disturb input I0 on connector A.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
PCRED301005EN
155
Installation
Voltage transformers
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device. b NEVER work alone. b Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off. b Start by connecting the device to the protective earth and to the functional earth. b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in use.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
DE51832
The phase and residual voltage transformer secondary circuits are connected to the CCT640 connector, item B on B2X type Sepam units.
CCT640 connector
The connector contains 4 transformers which provide impedance matching and isolation between the VTs and Sepam input circuits. Terminals B1 to B6 are intended for phase voltage measurement (1), and B7 and B8 for residual voltage measurement (case shown, not connected if obtained by the sum of the 3 phase voltages).
(1) 1, 2 or 3 VTs (case shown).
Installation of the CCT640 connector
1. Insert the connector pins into the slots 1 on the base unit. 2. Flatten the connector against the unit to plug it into the 9-pin SUB-D connector (principle similar to that of the MES module). 3. Tighten the mounting screw 2 .
Connection
b The connections are made to the screw type connectors that can be accessed on
the rear of the CCT640 (item 3 ) b Wiring with no fittings: v 1 wire with maximum cross-section of 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (AWG 24-12) or 2 wires with
maximum cross-section of 0.2 to 1 mm2 (AWG 24-18) v stripped length: 8 to 10 mm (0.315 to 0.39 in) b Wiring with fittings: v recommended wiring with Schneider Electric fitting:
6
- DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16) - DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2.5 mm2 (AWG 12) - AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mm2 (AWG 18)
v tube length: 8.2 mm (0.32 in)
v stripped length: 8 mm (0.31 in)
b The CCT640 must be earthed (by green/yellow wire + ring lug) on the screw 4
(safety measure in case the CCT640 becomes unplugged).
DE52152 MT10514
3
4 3
156
CRED301005EN
Installation
LPCT type current sensors
Function
Low Power Current Transducer (LPCT) type sensors are voltage-output sensors, which are compliant with the IEC 60044-8 standard. The Schneider Electric range of LPCTs includes the following sensors: CLP1, CLP2,
1
CLP3, TLP130, TLP160 and TLP190.
PE50031
DE51674
CLP1 LPCT sensor
CCA670/CCA671 connector
Function
The 3 LPCT sensors are connected to the CCA670 or CCA671 connector on the rear panel of Sepam. The connection of only one or two LPCT sensors is not allowed and causes Sepam to go into fail-safe position. The two CCA670 and CCA671 interface connectors serve the same purpose, the difference being the position of the LPCT sensor plugs: b CCA670: lateral plugs, for Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 b CCA671: radial plugs, for Easergy Sepam series 60 and series 80.
Description
1 3 RJ45 plugs to connect the LPCT sensors. 2 3 blocks of microswitches to set the CCA670/CCA671 to the rated phase current
value.
6
3 Microswitch setting/selected rated current equivalency table (2 In values per
position).
4 9-pin sub-D connector to connect test equipment (ACE917 for direct connector or
via CCA613).
NOTICE
HAZARD OF NON-OPERATION b Set the microswitches for the CCA670/ CCA671 connector before commissioning the device. b Check that only one microswitch is in position 1 for each block L1, L2, L3 and that no microswitch is in the center position. b Check that the microswitch settings on all 3 blocks are identical.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Rating of CCA670/CCA671 connectors
The CCA670/CCA671 connector must be rated according to the rated primary current In measured by the LPCT sensors. In is the current value that corresponds to the rated secondary current of 22.5 mV. The possible settings for In are (in A): 25, 50, 100, 125, 133, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500, 630, 666, 1000, 1600, 2000, 3150. The selected In value should be: b entered as a Sepam general setting b configured by microswitch on the CCA670/CCA671 connector.
Operating mode: 1. Use a screwdriver to remove the shield located in the "LPCT settings" zone; the shield protects 3 blocks of 8 microswitches marked L1, L2, L3. 2. On the L1 block, set the microswitch for the selected rated current to "1" (2 In values per microswitch). b The table of equivalencies between the microswitch settings and the selected rated current In is printed on the connector b Leave the 7 other microswitches set to "0".
3. Set the other 2 blocks of switches L2 and L3 to the same position as the L1 block and close the shield.
PCRED301005EN
157
DE51675
Installation
6
LPCT type current sensors Test accessories
Accessory connection principle DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions. b NEVER work alone. b Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
1 LPCT sensor, equipped with a shielded cable fitted with a yellow RJ 45 plug which is plugged directly into the CCA670/CCA671 connector.
2 Sepam protection unit. 3 CCA670/CCA671 connector, LPCT voltage interface, with microswitch setting of
rated current: b CCA670: lateral plugs for Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 b CCA671: radial plugs for Easergy Sepam series 60 and series 80. 4 CCA613 remote test plug, flush-mounted on the front of the cubicle and equipped
with a 3-meter (9.8 ft) cord to be plugged into the test plug of the CCA670/ CCA671 interface connector (9-pin sub-D). 5 ACE917 injection adapter, to test the LPCT protection chain with a standard injection box. 6 Standard injection box.
158
CRED301005EN
Installation
LPCT type current sensors Test accessories
DE80325
10.24
ACE917 injection adapter
Function
The ACE917 adapter is used to test the protection chain with a standard injection
1
box, when Sepam is connected to LPCT sensors.
The ACE917 adapter is inserted between: b The standard injection box b The LPCT test plug: v integrated in the Sepam CCA670/CCA671 interface connector 2.75 v or transferred by means of the CCA613 accessory.
The following are supplied with the ACE917 injection adapter: b Power supply cord b 3-meter (9.8 ft) cord to connect the ACE917 to the LPCT test plug on CCA670/CCA671 or CCA613.
6.70
Characteristics
Power supply
Protection by time-delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm (0.2 x 0.79 in)
115/230 V AC 0.25 A rating
CCA613 remote test plug
Function
The CCA613 test plug, flush-mounted on the front of the cubicle, is equipped with a 3-meter (9.8 ft) cord to transfer data from the test plug integrated in the CCA670/ CCA671 interface connector on the rear panel of Sepam.
Dimensions
mm
mm
in
in
Verrou de fixation
DE80045 DE80046
67,5
Câble
6
2.66
67,5
2.66
44 1.73
CAUTION
HAZARD OF CUTS Trim the edges of the cut-out plates to remove any jagged edges.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury.
DE80047
Front view with cover lifted. mm in
69 2.72
13
50
0.51
1.97 80
3.15
Right side view.
46 1.81
Cut-out.
PCRED301005EN
159
Installation
CSH120, CSH200 and CSH300 Core balance CTs
Function
The specifically designed CSH120, CSH200 and CSH300 core balance CTs are for direct residual current measurement. The only difference between them is the diameter. Due to their low voltage insulation, they can only be used on cables.
Note: b The CSH280 core balance CT available in the Motorpact offer is compatible with Sepam. b You must use an interface ACE990 with a core balance CT other than a CSH120, a CSH20 or a CSH300, even if this core balance CT has the same transformation ratio than a CSH120, a CSH200 or a CSH300.
PE50032
CSH120 and CSH200 core balance CTs.
Characteristics
Inner diameter Weight
Accuracy
1 CT
Transformation ratio Maximum permissible current
Operating temperature Storage temperature
2 CTs in parallel
1 CT 2 CTs in parallel
CSH120
120 mm (4.7 in) 0.6 kg (1.32 lb)
CSH200
196 mm (7.72 in) 1.4 kg (3.09 lb)
CSH300
291 mm (11.46 in) 2.4 Kg (5.29 lb)
±5% at 20°C (68°F)
±6% max. from -25°C to 70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
-
±10%
-
1/470
20 kA - 1 s -
6 kA - 1 s
-
-25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
-40°C to +85°C (-40°F to +185°F)
6
Dimensions
6 mm (0.236 in)
5 mm (0.197 in)
DE80249
Dimensions A B
D
CSH120 (in)
120 164 44 (4.75) (6.46) (1.73)
CSH200 (in)
196 256 46 (7.72) (10.1) (1.81)
CSH300 (in)
291 360 46 (11.46 (14.17) (1.81)
E
F
190 80 (7.48) (3.15)
274 120 (10.8) (4.72)
390 120 (15.35) (4.72)
H
40 (1.57)
60 (2.36)
60 (2.36)
J
166 (6.54)
254 (10)
369 (14.53)
K
65 (2.56)
104 (4.09)
104 (4.09)
L
35 (1.38)
37 (1.46)
37 (1.46)
160
PCRED301005EN
Installation
CSH120, CSH200 and CSH300 Core balance CTs
DANGER
Assembly
DE51678
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC
ARC OR BURNS b Only qualified personnel should install this
Group the MV cable (or cables) in the middle of the core balance CT. Use non-conductive binding to hold the
1
equipment. Such work should be performed only
cables.
after reading this entire set of instructions and
Remember to insert the 3 medium voltage
checking the technical characteristics of the
cable shielding earthing cables
device.
through the core balance.
b NEVER work alone. b Turn off all power supplying this equipment
E40466
E40465
before working on or inside it. Consider all
sources of power, including the possibility of
backfeeding.
b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing
device to confirm that all power is off.
b Only CSH120, CSH200 or CSH300 core
balance CTs can be used for direct residual current measurement. Other residual current sensors require the use of an intermediate
Assembly on MV cables.
Assembly on mounting plate.
device, CSH30, ACE990 or CCA634.
b Install the core balance CTs on insulated
cables.
b Cables with a rated voltage of more than
1000 V must also have an earthed shielding.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
Connection
HAZARD OF NON-OPERATION Do not connect the secondary circuit of the CSH core balance CTs to earth. This connection is made in Sepam.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Connection to Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 To residual current I0 input, on connector A , terminals 19 and 18 (shielding). Connection to (DVHUJ\Sepam series 60 To residual current I0 input, on connector E , terminals 15 and 14 (shielding). Connection to (DVHUJ\Sepam series 80 b To residual current I0 input, on connector E , terminals 15 and 14 (shielding)
b To residual current I'0 input, on connector E , terminals 18 and 17 (shielding).
Recommended cable b Sheathed cable, shielded by tinned copper braid
6
b Minimum cable cross-section 0.93 mm² (AWG 18)
b Resistance per unit length < 100 m/m (30.5 m/ft)
b Minimum dielectric strength: 1000 V (700 Vrms)
b Connect the cable shielding in the shortest manner possible to Sepam
b Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle.
The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam. Do not ground the cable by
any other means.
The maximum resistance of the Sepam connection wiring must not exceed 4
(i.e. 20 m maximum for 100 m/m or 66 ft maximum for 30.5 m/ft).
Connecting 2 CSH200 CTs in parallel
It is possible to connect 2 CSH200 CTs in parallel if the cables will not fit through a single CT, by following the instructions below: b Fit one CT per set of cables. b Make sure the wiring polarity is correct. The maximum permissible current at the primary is limited to 6 kA - 1 s for all cables.
DE80231
DE80231
PCRED301005EN
161
E40468 E44717
Installation
CSH30 interposing ring CT
Function
The CSH30 interposing ring CT is used as an interface when the residual current is measured using 1 A or 5 A current transformers.
Vertical assembly of CSH30 interposing ring CT.
Horizontal assembly of CSH30 interposing ring CT.
Characteristics
Weight Assembly
0.12 kg (0.265 lb)
On symmetrical DIN rail In vertical or horizontal position
Dimensions
mm
in
0.18
0.16
DE80023
1.18
1.97
3.23
0.2
0.63 0.18
0.315
2.36
1.14
6
162
CRED301005EN
Installation
CSH30 interposing ring CT
Connection
The CSH30 is adapted for the type of current transformer, 1 A or 5 A, by the number of turns of the secondary wiring through the CSH30 interposing ring CT:
1
b 5 A rating - 4 turns
b 1 A rating - 2 turns
Connection to 5 A secondary circuit Connection to 1 A secondary circuit
PE50033 PE50034
21 S1
turns
S2
turns
21
S1
turns
S2
turns
1. Plug into the connector. 2. Insert the transformer secondary wire through the CSH30 interposing ring CT 4 times.
1. Plug into the connector. 2. Insert the transformer secondary wire through the CSH30 interposing ring CT twice.
Connection to Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40 To residual current I0 input, on connector A , terminals 19 and 18 (shielding).
Connection to (DVHUJ\Sepam series 60 To residual current I0 input, on connector E terminals 15 and 14 (shielding).
Connection to (DVHUJ\Sepam series 80 b To residual current I0 input, on connector E , terminals 15 and 14 (shielding) b To residual current I'0 input, on connector E , terminals 18 and 17 (shielding).
Recommended cable
b Sheathed cable, shielded by tinned copper braid
b Minimum cable cross-section 0.93 mm² (AWG 18) (max. 2.5 mm², AWG 12)
b Resistance per unit length < 100 m/m (30.5 m/ft)
b Minimum dielectric strength: 1000 V (700 Vrms) b Maximum length: 2 m (6.6 ft).
6
It is essential for the CSH30 interposing ring CT to be installed near Sepam
(Sepam - CSH30 link less than 2 m (6.6 ft) long).
Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle.
The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam. Do not ground the cable by
any other means.
DE80125
DE80126
PCRED301005EN
163
Installation
ACE990 core balance CT interface.
6
DE81196
100 maxi 3.94 maxi
39 1.53
ACE990 Core balance CT interface
Function
The ACE990 is used to adapt measurements between an MV core balance CT with a ratio of 1/n (50 y n y 1500), and the Sepam residual current input.
Note: You must use an interface ACE990 with a core balance CT other than a CSH120, CSH200 or a CSH300 even if this core balance CT has the same transformation ratio than a CSH120,CSH200 or CSH300.
Characteristics
Weight Assembly Amplitude accuracy Phase accuracy Maximum permissible current
Operating temperature Storage temperature
0.64 kg (1.41 lb)
Mounted on symmetrical DIN rail
±1%
< 2°
20 kA - 1 s (on the primary winding of an MV core balance CT with a ratio of 1/50 that does not saturate)
-25°C à +70°C (-13°F à +158°F)
-25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
Description and dimensions
E ACE990 input terminal block, for connection of the core balance CT.
S ACE990 output terminal block, for connection of the Sepam residual current.
78 maxi
mm
3.07 maxi
in.
50
1.97
E
96 maxi 3.78 maxi
11 0.43
E1 E2 E3 E4 E5
S1 S2 ACE990
S 20 0.78
11 0.43
52 2.05
164
PCRED301005EN
Installation
ACE990 Core balance CT interface
DE51682
Connection
Connection of core balance CT Only one core balance CT can be connected to the ACE990 interface. The secondary circuit of the MV core balance CT is connected to 2 of the 5 ACE990
1
interface input terminals. To define the 2 input terminals, it is necessary to know the
following: b Core balance CT ratio (1/n) b Core balance CT power b Close approximation of rated current In0
(In0 is a general setting in Sepam and defines the earth fault protection setting
range between 0.1 In0 and 15 In0).
The table below can be used to determine: b The 2 ACE990 input terminals to be connected to the MV core balance CT secondary b The type of residual current sensor to set b The exact value of the rated residual current In0 setting, given by the following formula: In0 = k x number of core balance CT turns with k the factor defined in the table below.
The core balance CT must be connected to the interface in the right direction for correct operation: the MV core balance CT secondary output terminal S1 must be connected to the terminal with the lowest index (Ex).
K value
ACE990 input
Residual current
Min. MV core
terminals to be connected
sensor setting
balance CT power
Example:
0.00578
E1 - E5
ACE990 - range 1
0.1 VA
Given a core balance CT with a ratio of 1/400 2 VA, used within a measurement range of 0.5 A to 60 A. How should it be connected to Sepam via the ACE990? 1. Choose a close approximation of the rated current In0,
0.00676 0.00885 0.00909
E2 - E5 E1 - E4 E3 - E5
ACE990 - range 1 ACE990 - range 1 ACE990 - range 1
0.1 VA 0.1 VA 0.1 VA
i.e. 5 A.
0.01136
E2 - E4
ACE990 - range 1
0.1 VA
2. Calculate the ratio: approx. In0/number of turns = 5/400 = 0.0125.
3. Find the closest value of k in the table opposite to k = 0.01136.
0.01587 0.01667 0.02000
E1 - E3 E4 - E5 E3 - E4
ACE990 - range 1 ACE990 - range 1 ACE990 - range 1
0.1 VA 0.1 VA 0.1 VA
4. Check the mininum power required for the core balance CT: 0.02632
E2 - E3
ACE990 - range 1
0.1 VA
2 VA core balance CT > 0.1 VA V OK. 5. Connect the core balance CT secondary to ACE990 input
0.04000
E1 - E2
ACE990 - range 1
0.2 VA
terminals E2 and E4. 6. Set Sepam up with:
0.05780
E1 - E5
ACE990 - range 2
2.5 VA
6
In0 = 0.0136 x 400 = 4.5 A.
0.06757
E2 - E5
ACE990 - range 2
2.5 VA
6HOHFWWKHFORVHVWYDOXHURXQGHGWRDVLQJOHGHFLPDO H[DPSOH$URXQGHGWR$
0.08850 0.09091 0.11364
E1 - E4 E3 - E5 E2 - E4
ACE990 - range 2 ACE990 - range 2 ACE990 - range 2
3.0 VA 3.0 VA 3.0 VA
This value of In0 can be used to monitor current between 0.45 A and 67.5 A.
0.15873 0.16667
E1 - E3 E4 - E5
ACE990 - range 2 ACE990 - range 2
4.5 VA 4.5 VA
Wiring of MV core balance CT secondary circuit: b MV core balance CT S1 output to ACE990 E2 input terminal b MV core balance CT S2 output to ACE990 E4 input
terminal.
0.20000 0.26316
E3 - E4 E2 - E3
ACE990 - range 2 ACE990 - range 2
Connection to Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40
5.5 VA 7.5 VA
To residual current I0 input, on connector A , terminals 19 and 18 (shielding).
Connection to (DVHUJ\Sepam series 60 To residual current I0 input, on connector E , terminals 15 and 14 (shielding).
Connection to (DVHUJ\Sepam series 80 b To residual current I0 input, on connector E , terminals 15 and 14 (shielding) b To residual current I'0 input, on connector E , terminals 18 and 17 (shielding).
Recommended cables b Cable between core balance CT and ACE990: less than 50 m (160 ft) long b Sheathed cable, shielded by tinned copper braid between the ACE990 and Sepam, maximum length 2 m (6.6 ft) b Cable cross-section between 0.93 mm² (AWG 18) and 2.5 mm² (AWG 12) b Resistance per unit length less than 100 m/m (30.5 m/ft) b Minimum dielectric strength: 100 Vrms. Connect the connection cable shielding in the shortest manner possible (2 cm or 5.08 in maximum) to the shielding terminal on the Sepam connector. Flatten the connection cable against the metal frames of the cubicle. The connection cable shielding is grounded in Sepam. Do not ground the cable by any other means.
PCRED301005EN
165
PE50476
Installation
10 input/4 output MES114 module.
6
MES114 modules
Function
The 4 outputs included on the Sepam series 20 and 40 base unit can be extended by adding an optional MES114 module with 10 inputs and 4 outputs, available in 3 versions: b MES114: 10 DC inputs, voltage from 24 V DC to 250 V DC b MES114E: 10 inputs, voltage 110-125 V AC or V DC b MES114F: 10 inputs, voltage 220-250 V AC or V DC.
Characteristics
MES114 module
Weight Operating temperature Environmental characteristics
Logic inputs
0.28 kg (0.617 lb) -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F) Same characteristics as Sepam base units
MES114 MES114E
MES114F
Voltage Range
24 to 250 V DC
19.2 to 275 V DC
110 to 125 V DC
88 to 150 V DC
110 V AC
88 to 132 V AC
220 to 250 V DC
176 to 275 V DC
220 to 240 V AC
176 to 264 V AC
Frequency
-
-
47 to 63 Hz -
47 to 63 Hz
Typical consumption 3 mA
3 mA
3 mA
3 mA
3 mA
Typical switching threshold
Input limit At state 1
voltage
At state 0
14 V DC
u 19 V DC y 6 V DC
82 V DC
u 88 V DC y 75 V DC
58 V AC 154 V DC 120 V AC
u 88 V AC u 176 V DC u 176 V AC y 22 V AC y 137 V DC y 48 V AC
Isolation of inputs from Enhanced Enhanced other isolated groups
Enhanced Enhanced Enhanced
O11 control relay output
Voltage
DC
24/48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC 250 V DC -
AC
-
(47.5 to
63 Hz)
-
-
-
100 to
240 V AC
Continuous current
8 A
8 A
8 A
8 A
8 A
Breaking capacity
Resistive load
8/4 A
0.7 A
0.3 A
0.2 A
8 A
L/R load 6/2 A
0.5 A
0.2 A
-
-
< 20 ms
L/R load 4/1 A
0.2 A
0.1 A
-
-
< 40 ms
p.f. load > 0.3
-
-
-
5 A
Making capacity
< 15 A for 200 ms
Isolation of outputs from other isolated groups
Enhanced
Annunciation relay output O12 to O14
Voltage
DC
24/48 V DC 127 V DC 220 V DC 250 V DC -
AC
-
(47.5 to
63 Hz)
-
-
-
100 to
240 V AC
Continuous current
2 A
2 A
2 A
2 A
2 A
Breaking capacity
Resistive load
2/1 A
0.6 A
0.3 A
0.2 A
-
L/R load 2/1 A
0.5 A
0.15 A -
-
< 20 ms
p.f. load > 0.3
-
-
-
1 A
Making capacity
< 15 A for 200 ms
Isolation of outputs in relation to other isolated groups
Enhanced
166
CRED301005EN
DE52153
Installation
MES114 modules
Description
L , M and K : 3 removable, lockable screw-type connectors L : connectors for 4 relay outputs: b O11: 1 control relay output
1
b O12 to O14: 3 annunciation relay outputs
M : connectors for 4 independent logic inputs I11 to I14
K : connectors for 6 logic inputs: b I21: 1 independent logic input b I22 to I26: 5 common point logic inputs.
1 25-pin sub-D connector to connect the module to the base unit. 2 Voltage selector switch for MES114E and MES114F module inputs, to be set to: b V DC for 10 DC voltage inputs (default setting) b V AC for 10 AC voltage inputs. 3 Label to be filled in to indicate the chosen parameter setting for MES114E and MES114F input voltages.
The parameter setting status can be accessed in the "Sepam Diagnosis" screen of the SFT2841 software tool. Parameter setting of the inputs for AC voltage (V AC setting) inhibits the "operating time measurement" function.
Assembly
1. Insert the 2 pins on the MES module into the slots 1 on the base unit. 2. Flatten the module up against the base unit to plug it into the connector 2. 3. Tighten the mounting screw 3.
6
DE51683
PCRED301005EN
167
DE51685
Installation
6
MES114 modules
Connection
The inputs are potential-free and the DC power supply source is external.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device. b NEVER work alone. b Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off. b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in use. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
Wiring of connectors L , M and K : b Wiring with no fittings: v 1 wire with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (AWG 24-12) v or 2 wires with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm2 (AWG 24-18) v stripped length: 8 to 10 mm (0.315 to 0.39 in) b Wiring with fittings: v terminal 5, recommended wiring with Telemecanique fitting: - DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16) - DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2.5 mm2 (AWG 12) - AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mm2 (AWG 18) v tube length: 8.2 mm (0.32 in) v stripped length: 8 mm (0.31 in).
168
CRED301005EN
Installation
DE80294
Optional remote modules Connection
The optional MET148-2, MSA141 or DSM303 modules are connected to the base
unit connector D by a series of links using prefabricated cords which come in 3
different lengths with black fittings. b CCA770 (L = 0.6 m or 2 ft)
1
b CCA772 (L = 2 m or 6.6 ft)
b CCA774 (L = 4 m or 13.1 ft).
The DSM303 module may only be connected at the end of the series.
Maximum configuration
A maximum of three modules may be connected to the base unit, in compliance with the module order and maximum connection lengths indicated in the table:
Base
Cord
Module 1 Cord
Module 2 Cord
Module 3
CCA772 CCA772 CCA772
MSA141 MSA141 MET148-2
CCA770 CCA770 CCA770
MET148-2 MET148-2 MET148-2
CCA774 CCA772 CCA774
DSM303 MET148-2 DSM303
DE50566
6
PCRED301005EN
169
Installation
MET148-2 Temperature sensor module
PE50021
Function
The MET148-2 module can be used to connect 8 temperature sensors (RTDs) of the same type: b Pt100, Ni100 or Ni120 type RTDs, according to parameter setting b 3-wire temperature sensors b A single module for each Sepam series 20 base unit, to be connected by one of the CCA770 (0.6 or 2 ft), CCA772 (2 m or 6.6 ft) or CCA774 (4 m or 13.1 ft) cords b 2 modules for each Sepam series 40, Easergy Sepam series 60 or series 80 base unit, to be connected by CCA770 (0.6 or 2 ft), CCA772 (2 m or 6.6 ft) or CCA774 (4 m or 13.1 ft) cords
The temperature measurement (e.g. in a transformer or motor winding) is utilized by the following protection functions: b Thermal overload (to take ambient temperature into account) b Temperature monitoring.
DE80031
mm in
6
3.46
1.81 5.67
(1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA77x cord connected.
Characteristics
MET148-2 module
Weight Assembly Operating temperature Environmental characteristics
Temperature sensors
Isolation from earth Current injected in RTD
0.2 kg (0.441 lb)
On symmetrical DIN rail
-25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
Same characteristics as Sepam base units
Pt100
Ni100/Ni120
None
None
4 mA
4 mA
Description and dimensions
A Terminal block for RTDs 1 to 4
B Terminal block for RTDs 5 to 8
Da RJ45 connector to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord
Dd RJ45 connector to link up the next remote module with a CCA77x cord (according to application)
t Grounding/earthing terminal
1 Jumper for impedance matching with load resistor (Rc), to be set to: b Rc, if the module is not the last interlinked module (default position) b Rc, if the module is the last interlinked module.
2 Jumper used to select module number, to be set to: b MET1: 1st MET148-2 module, to measure temperatures T1 to T8 (default position) b MET2: 2nd MET148-2 module, to measure temperatures T9 to T16 (for Sepam series 40, Easergy Sepam series 60 and series 80 only).
170
CRED301005EN
DE51649
Installation
MET148-2 Temperature sensor module
Connection
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS
1
b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be
performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the
technical characteristics of the device. b NEVER work alone. b Check that the temperature sensors are isolated from dangerous voltages.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
Connection of the earthing terminal By tinned copper braid with cross-section u 6 mm² (AWG 10) or cable with cross-section u 2.5 mm² (AWG 12) and length y 200 mm (7.9 in), fitted with a 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lug. Check the tightness (maximum tightening torque 2.2 Nm or 19.5 lb-in).
Connection of RTDs to screw-type connectors b 1 wire with cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm² (AWG 24-12) b or 2 wires with cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm² (AWG 24-18) Recommended cross-sections according to distance: b Up to 100 m (330 ft) u 1 mm² (AWG 18) b Up to 300 m (990 ft) u 1.5 mm² (AWG 16) b Up to 1 km (0.62 mi) u 2.5 mm² (AWG 12) Maximum distance between sensor and module: 1 km (0.62 mi)
Wiring precautions b It is preferable to use shielded cables The use of unshielded cables can cause measurement errors which vary in degree according to the level of surrounding electromagnetic disturbance b Only connect the shielding at the MET148-2 end, in the shortest manner possible, to the corresponding terminals of connectors A and B b Do not connect the shielding at the RTD end.
Accuracy derating according to wiring The error t is proportional to the length of the cable and inversely proportional to the cable cross-section:
t(°C) = 2 × -S--L--(--(m--k----mm------2)---)
b ±2.1°C/km for 0.93 mm² cross-section (AWG 18) b ±1°C/km for 1.92 mm² cross-section (AWG 14).
6
PCRED301005EN
171
PE80748
Installation
MSA141 analog output module.
6
MSA141 Analog output module
Function
The MSA141 module converts one of the Sepam measurements into an analog signal: b Selection of the measurement to be converted by parameter setting b 0-1 mA, 0-10 mA, 4-20 mA, 0-20 mA analog signal according to parameter setting b Scaling of the analog signal by setting minimum and maximum values of the converted measurement. Example: the setting used to have phase current 1 as a 0-10 mA analog output with a dynamic range of 0 to 300 A is: v minimum value = 0 v maximum value = 3000 b A single module for each Sepam base unit, to be connected by one of the CCA770 (0.6m or 2 ft), CCA772 (2m or 6.6 ft) or CCA774 (4m or 13.1 ft) cords.
The analog output can also be remotely managed via the communication network.
Characteristics
MSA141 module
Weight Assembly Operating temperature Environmental characteristics
Analog output
0.2 kg (0.441 lb) On symmetrical DIN rail -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F) Same characteristics as Sepam base units
Current Scaling (no data input checking)
Load impedance Accuracy
Measurements available
Phase and residual currents Phase-to-neutral and phase-tophase voltages Frequency Thermal capacity used Temperatures Active power Reactive power Apparent power Power factor Remote setting via communication link
4 -20 mA, 0-20 mA, 0-10 mA, 0-1 mA
Minimum value
Maximum value
< 600 (including wiring)
0.5% full scale or 0,01 mA
Unit Series 20 Series 40 Series 60/
Series 80
0.1 A
b
b
b
1 V
b
b
b
0.01 Hz b
b
b
1%
b
b
b
1°C (1°F) b
b
b
0.1 kW
b
b
0.1 kvar
b
b
0.1 kVA
b
b
0.01
b
b
b
b
172
CRED301005EN
DE80907
Installation
MSA141 Analog output module
mm in
3.46
1mA Ø o2r0mA
1.81
5.67
2
11 23
2 (1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA77x cord connected.
Analog output module (MSA141) setting window.
1 1 2 3
Description and dimensions
A Terminal block for analog output Da RJ45 socket to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord
1
Dd RJ45 socket to link up the next remote module with a CCA77x cord (according to application)
t Earthing terminal
1 Jumper for impedance matching with load resistor (Rc),
to be set to:
b Rc, if the module is not the last interlinked module (default position) b Rc, if the module is the last interlinked module. 2 Micro-switches to set the analog output type:
Micro-switches
Position
Output type
low (default position) 0-20 mA
12
4-20 mA 0-10 mA
high
0-1 mA
12
Output Setting
The analog output type is configured in 2 steps: 1. Hardware setting: set the 2 micro-switches: b on low position for a 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA or 0-10 mA output type b on high position for a 0-1 mA output type. 2. Software configuration: select the desired output type in the SFT2841 setting software Analog output module (MSA141) setting window and validate by pressing the OK button.
Note : The 0-1 mA output works only if the 0-20 mA or 0-1 mA depending on switch output
type has been set in the SFT2841 setting software (step 2).
6
Connection
Connection of the earthing terminal By tinned copper braid with cross-section u 6 mm² (AWG 10) or cable with cross-section u 2.5 mm² (AWG 12) and length y 200 mm (7.9 in), equipped with a 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lug. Check the tightness (maximum tightening torque 2.2 Nm or 19.5 lb-in).
Connection of analog output to screw-type connector b 1 wire with cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm² (AWG 24-12) b or 2 wires with cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm² (AWG 24-18).
Wiring precautions b It is preferable to use shielded cables b Use tinned copper braid to connect the shielding at least at the MSA141 end.
PE80758
PE80758
PCRED301005EN
173
PE50127
Installation
DSM303 remote advanced UMI module.
DSM303 Remote advanced UMI module
Function
When associated with a Sepam that does not have its own advanced user-machine interface, the DSM303 offers all the functions available on a Sepam integrated advanced UMI. It can be installed on the front panel of the cubicle in the most suitable operating location: b Reduced depth < 30 mm (1.2 in) b A single module for each Sepam, to be connected by one of the CCA772 (2 m or 6.6 ft) or CCA774 (4 m or 13.1 ft) cords.
The module cannot be connected to Sepam units with integrated advanced UMIs.
Characteristics
DSM303 module
Weight Assembly Operating temperature Environmental characteristics
0.3 kg (0.661 lb) Flush-mounted -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F) Same characteristics as Sepam base units
6
174
CRED301005EN
Installation
DE80033 DE80034
DSM303 Remote advanced UMI module
Description and dimensions
The module is simply flush-mounted and secured by its clips. No additional screw-type fastening is required.
1
Front view
Side view
mm
in
16
17
mm
in
4.6
3.78
5.99
0.98 0.6
1 Green LED: Sepam on
2 Red LED:
- steadily on: module unavailable
- flashing: Sepam link unavailable
3 9 yellow LEDs
4 Label identifying the LEDs
5 Graphic LCD screen
6 Display of measurements
7 Display of switchgear, network and machine diagnosis data
8 Display of alarm messages
9 Sepam reset (or confirm data entry)
10 Alarm acknowledgment and clearing (or move cursor up)
11 LED test (or move cursor down)
12 Access to protection settings
13 Access to Sepam parameters
14 Entry of 2 passwords 15 PC connection port 16 Mounting clip
6
17 Gasket to ensure NEMA 12 tightness
(gasket supplied with the DSM303 module, to be installed if necessary)
Da RJ45 lateral output connector to connect the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord.
CAUTION
HAZARD OF CUTS Trim the edges of the cut-out plates to remove any jagged edges.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in injury.
Cut-out for flush-mounting (mounting plate thickness < 3 mm or 0.12 in) mm in
98.5 0,5 3.88
5.67
Connection
Da RJ45 socket to connector the module to the base unit with a CCA77x cord. The DSM303 module is always the last interlinked remote module and it systematically ensures impedance matching by load resistor (Rc).
PCRED301005EN
175
MT10151 DE80060
Installation
Communication accessory selection guide
There are 2 types of Sepam communication accessory: b Communication interfaces, which are essential for connecting Sepam to the communication network b Converters and other accessories, as options, which are used for complete implementation of the communication network.
Communication-interface selection guide
ACE949-2 ACE959
Type of Sepam
Sepam series 20
b
b
Sepam series 40/60/80
b
b
Type of network
S-LAN or E-LAN (1)
S-LAN or E-LAN (1)
Protocol
Modbus RTU
b
b
DNP3
IEC 60870-5-103
Modbus TCP/IP
IEC 61850
Physical interface
RS 485
2-wire b
4-wire
b
Fiber optic ST
Star
Ring
10/100 base Tx
2 ports
100 base Fx
2 ports
Power supply
DC
Supplied by
Supplied by
AC
Sepam
Sepam
See details on page page 178
page 179
(1) Only one connection possible, S-LAN or E-LAN. (2) Except with the Modbus RTU protocol. (3) Not supported simultaneously (1 protocol per application).
ACE937
b b S-LAN or E-LAN (1) b
b
Supplied by Sepam
page 180
ACE969TP-2 ACE969FO-2 ACE850TP ACE850FO
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
S-LAN E-LAN S-LAN E-LAN S-LAN and E-LAN S-LAN and E-LAN
b (3)
b
b (3)
b (3)
b
b
24 to 250 V 110 to 240 V
page 181
b (3)
b
b (3)
b (3)
b
b b (2)
24 to 250 V 110 to 240 V
page 181
b
b
b
b
b
24 to 250 V 110 to 240 V
b
24 to 250 V 110 to 240 V
6
To supervisor
Physical interface
ACE909-2
1 RS 232 port
Modbus RTU IEC 60870-5-103 DNP3 Modbus TCP/IP IEC 61850
To Sepam
Physical interface
b (1) b (1) b (1)
1 port 2-wire RS 485
RS 485 distributed power supply Modbus RTU IEC 60870-5-103 DNP3
Power supply
DC AC
b b (1) b (1) b (1)
110 to 220 V
Converter selection guide
ACE919CA ACE919CC EGX100
EGX300
1 port 2-wire RS 485 b (1)
b (1)
b (1)
1 port 2-wire RS 485 b (1)
b (1)
b (1)
1 Ethernet port 10/100 base T
1 Ethernet port 10/100 base T
b
b
1 port 2-wire RS 485 b b (1) b (1) b (1)
110 to 220 V
1 port 2-wire RS 485
b
b (1) b (1) b (1)
24 to 48 V
1 port RS 485 2-wire or 4-wire
1 port RS 485 2-wire or 4-wire
b
b
24 V
24 V
ECI850
1 Ethernet port 10/100 base T
b 1 port RS 485 2-wire or 4-wire b
24 V
See details on page page 187
page 188
(1) The supervisor protocol is the same as for Sepam. Note: All these interfaces support the E-LAN protocol.
page 188
See EGX100 manual
See EGX300 manual
page 190
176
CRED301005EN
Installation
Connection of communication interfaces Connection cords
Sepam series 20 and Sepam series 40
CCA612 connection cord
Function
The CCA612 prefabricated cord is used to connect ACE949-2, ACE959, ACE937,
1
ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2 communication interfaces:
b To the white communication port C on a Sepam series 20 or series 40 base unit
b To the white communication port C1 on an Easergy Sepam series 60 base unit.
b To the white communication ports C1 or C2 on an Easergy Sepam series 80 base unit.
Characteristics
b Length = 3 m (9.8 ft) b Fitted with 2 white RJ45 connectors.
Easergy Sepam series 60 Easergy Sepam series 80
DE80842 DE80844
DE80439 DE80440
CCA614 connection cord
NOTICE
Function
HAZARD OF DEFECTIVE COMMUNICATION
The CCA614 prefabricated cord is used to connect ACE850TP and ACE850FO
b Never use the C2 and F communication ports on an Easergy Sepam series 80 simultaneously.
communication interfaces: b To the white communication port C on a Sepam series 40 base unit
b To the blue communication port F on an Easergy Sepam series 60 or
b The only communication ports on an Easergy Sepam series 80 unit that can be used simultaneously
Sepam series 80 base unit.
6
are ports C1 and C2 or ports C1 and F .
Characteristics
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
b Length = 3 m (9.8 ft) b Fitted with 2 blue RJ45 connectors
b Minimum curvature radius = 50 mm (1.97 in)
Sepam series 40
ACE850
Easergy Sepam series 60 and Easergy Sepam series 80
ACE850
F
CCA614 C
ACE937
CCA614
CCA612
PCRED301005EN
177
Installation
ACE949-2 2-wire RS 485 network interface
PE80321
ACE949-2 2-wire RS 485 network connection interface.
DE80035
mm in
3.46
1.81
2.83
6
(1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA612 cord connected.
2-wire network
Power supply or
24 V DC
DE80127
2-wire network
Power supply or
24 V DC
Function
The ACE949-2 interface performs 2 functions: b Electrical interface between Sepam and a 2-wire RS 485 communication network b Main network cable branching box for the connection of a Sepam with a CCA612 cord.
Characteristics
ACE949-2 module
Weight
0.1 kg (0.22 lb)
Assembly
On symmetrical DIN rail
Operating temperature
-25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
Environmental characteristics
Same characteristics as Sepam base units
2-wire RS 485 electrical interface
Standard
EIA 2-wire RS 485 differential
Distributed power supply
External, 12 V DC or 24 V DC ±10%
Power consumption
16 mA in receiving mode
40 mA maximum in sending mode
Maximum length of 2-wire RS 485 network
with standard cable
Number of Sepam units
5 10 20 25
Maximum length with 12 V DC power supply
320 m (1000 ft) 180 m (590 ft) 160 m (520 ft) 125 m (410 ft)
Maximum length with 24 V DC power supply
1000 m (3300 ft) 750 m (2500 ft) 450 m (1500 ft) 375 m (1200 ft)
Description and dimensions
A and B Terminal blocks for network cable
C RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord
t Grounding/earthing terminal
1 Link activity LED, flashes when communication is active (sending or receiving in progress).
2 Jumper for RS 485 network line-end impedance matching with load resistor (Rc = 150 ), to be set to: b Rc, if the module is not at one end of the network (default position) b Rc, if the module is at one end of the network.
3 Network cable clamps (inner diameter of clamp = 6 mm or 0.24 in).
Connection
b Connection of network cable to screw-type terminal blocks A and B b Connection of the earthing terminal by tinned copper braid with cross-section u 6 mm² (AWG 10) or cable with cross-section u 2.5 mm² (AWG 12) and length y 200 mm (7.9 in), fitted with a 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lug. Check the tightness (maximum tightening torque 2.2 Nm or 19.5 lb-in). b The interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover shielding at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable: v the network cable must be stripped v the cable shielding braid must be around and in contact with the clamp b The interface is to be connected to connector C on the base unit using a CCA612 cord (length = 3 m or 9.8 ft, white fittings) b The interfaces are to be supplied with 12 V DC or 24 V DC.
178
CRED301005EN
Installation
ACE959 4-wire RS 485 network interface
PE80322
DE80036
Function
The ACE959 interface performs 2 functions: b Electrical interface between Sepam and a 4-wire RS 485 communication network b Main network cable branching box for the connection of a Sepam with a CCA612
1
cord.
ACE959 4-wire RS 485 network connection interface.
mm in
3.46
Characteristics
ACE959 module
Weight
0.2 kg (0.441 lb)
Assembly
On symmetrical DIN rail
Operating temperature
-25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
Environmental characteristics
Same characteristics as Sepam base units
4-wire RS 485 electrical interface
Standard
EIA 4-wire RS 485 differential
Distributed power supply
External, 12 V DC or 24 V DC ±10%
Power consumption
16 mA in receiving mode
40 mA maximum in sending mode
Maximum length of 4-wire RS 485 network
with standard cable
Number of Sepam units
Maximum length with 12 V DC power supply
Maximum length with 24 V DC power supply
5
320 m (1000 ft)
1000 m (3300 ft)
10
180 m (590 ft)
750 m (2500 ft)
20
160 m (520 ft)
450 m (1500 ft)
25
125 m (410 ft)
375 m (1200 ft)
1.81 5.67
Description and dimensions
(1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA612 cord connected.
A and B Terminal blocks for network cable
C RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord
-wire network
Power supply or
D Terminal block for a separate auxiliary power supply (12 V DC or 24 V DC)
t Grounding/earthing terminal
6
1 Link activity LED, flashes when communication is active (sending or receiving in
progress).
2 Jumper for 4-wire RS 485 network line-end impedance matching with load resistor
(Rc = 150 ), to be set to: b Rc, if the module is not at one end of the network (default position) b Rc, if the module is at one end of the network.
3 Network cable clamps
(inner diameter of clamp = 6 mm or 0.24 in).
Power supply or
-wire network
Power supply or
(1) Distributed power supply with separate wiring or included in the shielded cable (3 pairs). (2) Terminal block for connection of the distributed power supply module.
Connection
b Connection of network cable to screw-type terminal blocks A and B b Connection of the earthing terminal by tinned copper braid with cross-section u 6 mm² (AWG 10) or cable with cross-section u 2.5 mm² (AWG 12) and length y 200 mm (7.9 in), fitted with a 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lug. Check the tightness (maximum tightening torque 2.2 Nm or 19.5 lb-in). b The interfaces are fitted with clamps to hold the network cable and recover shielding at the incoming and outgoing points of the network cable: v the network cable must be stripped v the cable shielding braid must be around and in contact with the clamp b The interface is to be connected to connector C on the base unit using a CCA612 cord (length = 3 m or 9.8 ft, white fittings) b The interfaces are to be supplied with 12 V DC or 24 V DC b The ACE959 can be connected to a separate distributed power supply (not included in shielded cable). Terminal block D is used to connect the distributed power supply module.
PCRED301005EN
179
DE80129
Installation
ACE937 fiber optic interface
Function
The ACE937 interface is used to connect Sepam to a fiber optic communication star system. This remote module is connected to the Sepam base unit by a CCA612 cord.
PE50024
ACE937 fiber optic connection interface.
CAUTION
HAZARD OF BLINDING Never look directly into the end of the fiber optic. Failure to follow these instructions can result in serious injury.
DE80037
6
mm in
3.46
Characteristics
ACE937 module
Weight Assembly Power supply Operating temperature Environmental characteristics
Fiber optic interface
0.1 kg (0.22 lb) On symmetrical DIN rail Supplied by Sepam -25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F) Same characteristics as Sepam base units
Fiber type
Graded-index multimode silica
Wavelength
820 nm (invisible infra-red)
Type of connector
ST (BFOC bayonet fiber optic connector)
Fiber optic Numerical Maximum Minimum optical Maximum
diameter
aperture (NA) attenuation power available fiber length
(m)
(dBm/km) (dBm)
50/125
0.2
2.7
5.6
62.5/125
0.275
3.2
9.4
100/140
0.3
4
14.9
200 (HCS)
0.37
6
19.2
700 m (2300 ft) 1800 m (5900 ft) 2800 m (9200 ft) 2600 m (8500 ft)
Maximum length calculated with: b Minimum optical power available b Maximum fiber attenuation b Losses in 2 ST connectors: 0.6 dBm b Optical power margin: 3 dBm (according to IEC 60870 standard).
Example for a 62.5/125 m fiber Lmax = (9.4 - 3 - 0.6)/3.2 = 1.8 km (1.12 mi)
Description and dimensions
C RJ45 socket to connect the interface to the base unit with a CCA612 cord.
1 Link activity LED, flashes when communication is active (sending or receiving in progress).
2 Rx, female ST type connector (Sepam receiving). 3 Tx, female ST type connector (Sepam sending).
1.81 2.83
(1) 70 mm (2.8 in) with CCA612 cord connected.
Connection
b The sending and receiving fiber optic fibers must be equipped with male ST type connectors b Fiber optics screw-locked to Rx and Tx connectors.
The interface is to be connected to connector C on the base unit using a CCA612 cord (length = 3 m or 9.8 ft, white fittings).
DE51666
180
CRED301005EN
PB103454
Installation
ACE969TP-2 communication interface. ACE969FO-2 communication interface.
ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2 Multi-protocol interfaces
Function
The ACE969 multi-protocol communication interfaces are for Sepam series 20, Sepam series 40, Easergy Sepam series 60 and Easergy Sepam series 80. They have two communication ports to connect a Sepam to two independent communication networks: b The S-LAN (Supervisory Local Area Network) port is used to connect Sepam to a communication network dedicated to supervision, using one of the three following protocols: v IEC 60870-5-103 v DNP3 v Modbus RTU. The communication protocol is selected at the time of Sepam parameter setting. b The E-LAN (Engineering Local Area Network) port, reserved for Sepam remote parameter setting and operation using the SFT2841 software. There are two versions of the ACE969 interfaces, which are identical except for the S-LAN port: b ACE969TP-2 (Twisted Pair), for connection to an S-LAN network using a 2-wire RS 485 serial link b ACE969FO-2 (Fiber Optic), for connection to an S-LAN network using a fiber-optic connection (star or ring). The E-LAN port is always a 2-wire RS 485 type port.
Compatible Sepam
The ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2 multi-protocol interfaces are compatible with the following Sepam: b Sepam series 20 version u V0526 b Sepam series 40 version u V3.00 b Easergy Sepam series 60 all versions b Easergy Sepam series 80 base version and application version u V3.00
6
PB103453
PCRED301005EN
181
Installation
6
DB114880 service
ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2 Multi-protocol interfaces
Characteristics
ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2 module
Technical characteristics
Weight
0.285 kg (0.628 lb)
Assembly
On symmetrical DIN rail
Operating temperature
-25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F)
Environmental characteristics
Same characteristics as Sepam base units
Power supply
Voltage
24 to 250 V DC
110 to 240 V AC
Range
-20%/+10%
-20%/+10%
Maximum consumption
2 W
3 VA
Inrush current
< 10 A 100 µs
Acceptable ripple content
12%
Acceptable momentary outages
20 ms
2-wire RS 485 communication ports
Electrical interface
Standard
EIA 2-wire RS 485 differential
Distributed power supply
ACE969-2 not required (built-in)
Fiber optic communication port
Fiber optic interface
Fiber type
Graded-index multimode silica
Wavelength
820 nm (invisible infra-red)
Type of connector
ST (BFOC bayonet fiber optic connector)
Maximum length of fiber optic network
Fiber diameter (m)
Numerical aperture (NA)
Attenuation (dBm/km)
Minimum optical Maximum fiber power available length (dBm)
50/125
0.2
2.7
5.6
700 m (2300 ft)
62.5/125
0.275
3.2
9.4
1800 m (5900 ft)
100/140
0.3
4
14.9
2800 m (9200 ft)
200 (HCS)
0.37
6
19.2
2600 m (8500 ft)
Maximum length calculated with: b Minimum optical power available b Maximum fiber attenuation b Losses in 2 ST connectors: 0.6 dBm b Optical power margin: 3 dBm (according to IEC 60870 standard).
Example for a 62.5/125 m fiber Lmax = (9.4 - 3 - 0.6)/3.2 = 1.8 km (1.12 mi).
Dimensions
mm in
ACE969TP-2
e1 e2
Rx Tx on
Rx Tx
BA
V- V+
12345
S-LAN
BA
V- V+
12345
E-LAN
Rc Rc
12345
Rc Rc
12345
94 3.70
144 5.67
51.2 2.0
182
CRED301005EN
Installation
ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2 Multi-protocol interfaces Description
1 Grounding/earthing terminal using supplied braid 2 Power-supply terminal block 3 RJ45 socket to connect the interface to
the base unit with a CCA612 cord
4 Green LED: ACE969-2 energized 5 Red LED: ACE969-2 interface status
b LED off = ACE969-2 set up and communication operational b LED flashing = ACE969-2 not set up or setup incorrect b LED remains on = ACE969-2 has faulted 6 Service connector: reserved for software upgrades 7 E-LAN 2-wire RS 485 communication port (ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2)
8 S-LAN 2-wire RS 485 communication port (ACE969TP-2)
9 S-LAN fiber-optic communication port (ACE969FO-2).
DB114628 DB114629
ACE969-2 communication interfaces
ACE969TP-2
ACE969FO-2
3 45 6
3 45 6
SENS DE LECTURE
ACE969TP-2
Rx Tx
S-LAN
Rx Tx
on
B 1
A 2
3
V4
V+ 5
E-LAN
1234 5
12 34 5
SENS DE LECTURE
ACE969FO-2
Rx Tx
S-LAN
Rx Tx
on
B 1
A 2
3
V4
V+ 5
E-LAN
12 34 5
2
1
8
7
2
1
9
7
2-wire RS 485 communication ports
1 Draw-out terminal block, with two rows of
S-LAN port (ACE969TP-2)
E-LAN port (ACE969TP-2 or
connections to the RS 485 2-wire network:
ACE969FO-2)
b 2 black terminals: connection of RS 485 twistedpair (2 wires) b 2 green terminals: connection of twisted pair for distributed power supply 2 Indication LEDs:
DB114630
s
DB114631
s
1
Rx Tx on
2
Rx Tx
1
2
Rx Tx on
Rx Tx
b flashing Tx LED: Sepam sending b flashing Rx LED: Sepam receiving
BA
V- V+
12345
BA
V- V+
12345
3 Jumper for RS 485 network line-end impedance matching with load resistor (Rc = 150 ), to be set
S-LAN
E-LAN
LAN
E-LAN
to:
b Rc, if the interface is not at the line end (default position) b Rc, if the interface is at the line end.
Rc Rc
12345
Rc Rc
12345
Rc Rc
12345
6
3
3
1 Indication LEDs: b flashing Tx LED: Sepam sending b flashing Rx LED: Sepam receiving
2 Rx, female ST-type connector (Sepam receiving) 3 Tx, female ST-type connector (Sepam sending).
DB114632
Fiber optic communication port
S-LAN port (ACE969FO-2) 1
Rx Tx on
Rx Tx
S-LAN
A
B V+
12345
E-LAN
Rc Rc
12345
2
3
PCRED301005EN
183
DB114795 DE51845 DE51962
Installation
6
ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2 Multi-protocol interfaces Connection
Power supply and Sepam
b The ACE969-2 interface connects to connector C on the Sepam base unit using a CCA612 cord (length = 3 m or 9.84 ft, white RJ45 fittings) b The ACE969-2 interface must be supplied with 24 to 250 V DC or 110 to 240 V AC.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS b Only qualified personnel should install this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions and checking the technical characteristics of the device. b NEVER work alone. b Turn off all power supplying this equipment before working on or inside it. Consider all sources of power, including the possibility of backfeeding. b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing device to confirm that all power is off. b Start by connecting the device to the protective earth and to the functional earth. b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in use.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
Terminals
e1-e2 - supply
Protective earth Functional earth
Type
Screw terminals
Screw terminal 4 mm (0.16 in) ring lug
Wiring
b Wiring with no fittings: v 1 wire with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 2.5 mm²(u AWG 24-12) or 2 wires with maximum cross-section 0.2 to 1 mm²(u AWG 24-18) v stripped length: 8 to 10 mm (0.31 to 0.39 in) b Wiring with fittings: v recommended wiring with Schneider Electric fitting: - DZ5CE015D for 1 wire 1.5 mm² (AWG 16) - DZ5CE025D for 1 wire 2.5 mm² (AWG 12) - AZ5DE010D for 2 wires 1 mm² (AWG 18) v tube length: 8.2 mm (0.32 in) v stripped length: 8 mm (0.31 in).
1 green/yellow wire, max. length 3 m (9.8 ft) and max. cross-section 2.5 mm² (AWG 12)
Earthing braid, supplied for connection to cubicle grounding
184
CRED301005EN
DB115265
Installation
ACE969TP-2 and ACE969FO-2 Multi-protocol interfaces Connection
2-wire RS 485 communication ports (S-LAN or E-LAN)
b Connection of the RS 485 twisted pair (S-LAN or E-LAN) to terminals A and B b In case of ACE 969TP wired with ACE969TP-2: v connection of twisted pair for distributed power supply to terminals 5 (V+) and 4 (V-) b In case of ACE969TP-2 only: v connection only on the terminal 4 (V-) ( ground continuity) v no need of external power supply b The cable shields must be connected to the terminals marked 3 (.) on the connection terminal blocks. b Terminal marked 3(.) are linked by an internal connection to the earthing terminals of the ACETP-2 interface (protective an functional earthing): Ie the shielding of the RS 485 cables is earthed as well. b On the ACE960TP-2 interface, the cable clamps for the S-LAN and E-LAN RS 485 networks are earthed by the terminal 3.
If ACE969TP and ACE969TP-2 are used together, the external power supply is required.
6
DB115263
DE52165
ACE969FO-2 PCRED301005EN
ACE969FO-2
Fiber optic communication port (S-LAN)
CAUTION
HAZARD OF BLINDING Never look directly into the fiber optic.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in serious injury.
ACE969FO-2
The fiber optic connection can be made: b point-to-point to an optic star system b in a ring system (active echo). The sending and receiving fiber optic fibers must be equipped with male ST type connectors. The fiber optics are screw-locked to Rx and Tx connectors.
185
Installation
ACE909-2 RS 232/RS 485 converter
PE80317
Function
The ACE909-2 converter is used to connect a master/central computer equipped with a V24/RS 232 type serial port as a standard feature to stations connected to a 2-wire RS 485 network. Without requiring any flow control signals, after the parameters are set, the ACE909-2 converter performs conversion, network polarization and automatic dispatching of frames between the master and the stations by two-way simplex (half-duplex, single-pair) transmission. The ACE909-2 converter also provides a 12 V DC or 24 V DC supply for the distributed power supply of the Sepam ACE949-2, ACE959 or ACE969-2 interfaces. The communication settings should be the same as the Sepam and supervisor communication settings.
ACE909-2 RS 232/RS 485 converter.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC
ARC OR BURNS b Only qualified personnel should install this
equipment. Such work should be performed only
after reading this entire set of instructions and
checking the technical characteristics of the
device. b NEVER work alone. b Turn off all power supplying this equipment
before working on or inside it. Consider all
sources of power, including the possibility of
backfeeding. b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing
device to confirm that all power is off. b Start by connecting the device to the
6
protective earth and to the functional earth. b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in
use.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
Characteristics
Mechanical characteristics
Weight
0.280 kg (0.617 lb)
Assembly
On symmetrical or asymmetrical DIN rail
Electrical characteristics
Power supply
110 to 220 V AC ± 10%, 47 to 63 Hz
Galvanic isolation between ACE power supply and frame, and between ACE power supply and interface supply
2000 Vrms, 50 Hz, 1 min
Galvanic isolation between RS 232 and RS 485 interfaces
1000 Vrms, 50 Hz, 1 min
Protection by time-delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm 1 A rating (0.2 in x 0.79 in)
Communication and Sepam interface distributed supply
Data format
11 bits: 1 start, 8 data, 1 parity, 1 stop
Transmission delay
< 100 ns
Distributed power supply for Sepam interfaces
12 V DC or 24 V CC, 250 mA max.
Maximum number of Sepam interfaces with
12
distributed supply
Environmental characteristics
Operating temperature
Electromagnetic compatibility
Fast transient bursts, 5 ns
1 MHz damped oscillating wave 1.2/50 s impulse waves
-5°C to +55°C (+23°F to +131°F)
IEC
Value
standard
60255-22-4
4 kV with capacitive coupling in common mode 2 kV with direct coupling in common mode 1 kV with direct coupling in differential mode
60255-22-1
1 kV common mode 0.5 kV differential mode
60255-5
3 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode
186
CRED301005EN
DE80306
DE80022
Installation
ACE909-2 RS 232/RS 485 converter
Description and dimensions
mm in
A Terminal block for RS 232 link limited to 10 m (33 ft). B Female 9-pin sub-D connector to connect to the 2-wire RS 485 network, with
1
distributed power supply.
1 screw-type male 9-pin sub-D connector is supplied with the converter.
C Power-supply terminal block
3.344.13
4.13
mm in
1.75
1.77 2.56
1 Distributed power supply voltage selector switch, 12 V DC or 24 V DC. 2 Protection fuse, unlocked by a 1/4 turn. 3 LEDs:
b ON/OFF: on if ACE909-2 is energized b Tx: on if RS 232 sending by ACE909-2 is active b Rx: on if RS 232 receiving by ACE909-2 is active.
4 SW1, parameter setting of 2-wire RS 485 network polarization and line impedance matching resistors.
Function
SW1/1
SW1/2
SW1/3
Polarization at 0 V via Rp -470
ON
Polarization at 5 V via Rp +470
ON
2-wire RS 485 network impedance
ON
matching by 150 resistor
2.22 1.42
0.63 Male 9-pin sub-D connector supplied with the ACE909-2.
5 SW2, parameter setting of asynchronous data transmission rate and format (same parameters as for RS 232 link and 2-wire RS 485 network).
Rate (bauds)
SW2/1 SW2/2 SW2/3
1200
1
1
1
2400
0
1
1
4800
1
0
1
9600
0
0
1
19200
1
1
0
38400
0
1
0
Format
SW2/4 SW2/5
With parity check
0
Without parity check
1
1 stop bit (compulsory for Sepam)
1
2 stop bits
0
Converter configuration when delivered b 12 V DC distributed power supply
6
b 11-bit format, with parity check
b 2-wire RS 485 network polarization and impedance matching resistors activated.
Connection
RS 232 link b To 2.5 mm² (AWG 12) screw type terminal block A b Maximum length 10 m (33 ft) b Rx/Tx: RS 232 receiving/sending by ACE909-2 b 0V: Rx/Tx common, do not earth. 2-wire RS 485 link with distributed power supply b To connector B female 9-pin sub-D b 2-wire RS 485 signals: L+, Lb Distributed power supply: V+ = 12 V DC or 24 V DC, V- = 0 V. Power supply b To 2.5 mm² (AWG 12) screw type terminal block C b Reversible phase and neutral b Earthed via terminal block and metal case (ring lug on back of case).
DE80529
PCRED301005EN
187
Installation
ACE919CA and ACE919CC RS 485/RS 485 converters
Function
The ACE919 converters are used to connect a master/central computer equipped with an RS 485 type serial port as a standard feature to stations connected to a 2-wire RS 485 network. Without requiring any flow control signals, the ACE919 converters perform network polarization and impedance matching. The ACE919 converters also provide a 12 V DC or 24 V DC supply for the distributed power supply of the Sepam ACE949-2, ACE959 or ACE969-2 interfaces. There are 2 types of ACE919 converter: b ACE919CC, DC-powered b ACE919CA, AC-powered.
PE80316
ACE919CC RS 485/RS 485 converter.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC
ARC OR BURNS b Only qualified personnel should install this
equipment. Such work should be performed only
after reading this entire set of instructions and
checking the technical characteristics of the
device. b NEVER work alone. b Turn off all power supplying this equipment
before working on or inside it. Consider all
sources of power, including the possibility of
backfeeding. b Always use a properly rated voltage sensing
device to confirm that all power is off. b Start by connecting the device to the
6
protective earth and to the functional earth. b Screw tight all terminals, even those not in use.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
Characteristics
Mechanical characteristics
Weight
0.280 kg (0.617 lb)
Assembly
On symmetrical or asymmetrical DIN rail
Electrical characteristics
ACE919CA ACE919CC
Power supply
110 to 220 V AC ±10%, 47 to 63 Hz
24 to 48 V DC ±20%
Protection by time-delayed fuse 5 mm x 20 mm 1 A rating (0.2 in x 0.79 in)
1 A rating
Galvanic isolation between ACE power supply and frame, and between ACE power supply and interface supply
2000 Vrms, 50 Hz, 1 min
Communication and Sepam interface distributed supply
Data format
11 bits: 1 start, 8 data, 1 parity, 1 stop
Transmission delay
< 100 ns
Distributed power supply for Sepam interfaces
12 V DC or 24 V CC, 250 mA max.
Maximum number of Sepam interfaces with
12
distributed supply
Environmental characteristics
Operating temperature
-5°C to +55°C (+23°F to +131°F)
Electromagnetic compatibility IEC standard Value
Fast transient bursts, 5 ns
60255-22-4
4 kV with capacitive coupling in common mode 2 kV with direct coupling in common mode 1 kV with direct coupling in differential mode
1 MHz damped oscillating wave
60255-22-1
1 kV common mode 0.5 kV differential mode
1.2/50 s impulse waves
60255-5
3 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode
188
CRED301005EN
DE80307
Installation
ACE919CA and ACE919CC RS 485/RS 485 converters
mm in
3.34 4.13
4.13
mm in
1.75
2.22 1.42
1.77 2.56
Description and dimensions
A Terminal block for 2-wire RS 485 link without distributed power supply. B Female 9-pin sub-D connector to connect to the 2-wire RS 485 network, with
1
distributed power supply.
1 screw-type male 9-pin sub-D connector is supplied with the converter.
C Power supply terminal block.
1 Distributed power supply voltage selector switch, 12 V DC or 24 V DC.
2 Protection fuse, unlocked by a 1/4 turn. 3 ON/OFF LED: on if ACE919 is energized. 4 SW1, parameter setting of 2-wire RS 485 network polarization and
line impedance matching resistors.
Function
SW1/1
SW1/2
SW1/3
Polarization at 0 V via Rp -470
ON
Polarization at 5 V via Rp +470
ON
2-wire RS 485 network impedance
ON
matching by 150 resistor
Converter configuration when delivered b 12 V DC distributed power supply b 2-wire RS 485 network polarization and impedance matching resistors activated.
0.63
Male 9-pin sub-D connector supplied with the ACE919.
Connection
2-wire RS 485 link without distributed power supply b To 2.5 mm² (AWG 12) screw type terminal block A b L+, L-: 2-wire RS 485 signals
b t Shielding.
2-wire RS 485 link with distributed power supply
b To connector B female 9-pin sub-D
b 2-wire RS 485 signals: L+, Lb Distributed power supply: V+ = 12 V DC or 24 V DC, V- = 0 V.
6
Power supply b To 2.5 mm² (AWG 12) screw type terminal block C b Reversible phase and neutral (ACE919CA) b Earthed via terminal block and metal case (ring lug on back of case).
DE80022
DE51670
PCRED301005EN
189
Installation
ECI850 IEC 61850 Sepam server
PE80319
ECI850: IEC 61850 Sepam server. NotH: This module is inoperative from 30 June 2017. You can use the ACE850 communication interface on Sepam series 40, Easergy Sepam series 60 and series 80.
6
Function
The ECI850 can be used to connect Sepam series 20, Sepam series 40, Easergy Sepam series 60 and series 80 to an Ethernet network using the IEC 61850 protocol. The ECI850 creates the interface between the Ethernet/IEC 61850 network and a Sepam RS 485/Modbus network. A PRI surge arrester (ref. 16339) is supplied with the ECI850 to protect its power supply.
Compatible Sepam
The ECI850 servers are compatible with the following Sepam: b Sepam series 20 version u V0526 b Sepam series 40 version u V3.00 b Easergy Sepam series 60 all versions b Easergy Sepam series 80 base version and application version u V3.00.
Characteristics
ECI850 module
Technical characteristics
Weight
0.17 kg (0.37 lb)
Assembly
On symmetrical DIN rail
Power supply
Voltage
24 V DC (± 10%) supplied by a class 2 power supply
Maximum consumption
4 W
Dielectric withstand
1.5 kV
Environmental characteristics
Operating temperature
-25 °C to +70 °C (-13 °F to +158 °F)
Storage temperature
-40 °C to +85 °C (- 40 °F to +185 °F)
Humidity ratio
5 to 95% relative humidity (non condensing) at +55 °C (131 °F)
Degree of pollution
Class 2
Tightness
IP30
Electromagnetic compatibility
Emission tests
Emissions (radiated and conducted)
EN 55022/EN 55011/FCC Class A
Immunity tests - Radiated disturbances
Electrostatic discharge
EN 61000-4-2
Radiated radiofrequencies
EN 61000-4-3
Magnetic fields at the network frequency EN 61000-4-8
Immunity tests - Conducted disturbances
Fast transient bursts
EN 61000-4-4
Surges
EN 61000-4-5
Conducted radiofrequencies
EN 61000-4-6
Safety
International
IEC 60950
USA
UL 508/UL 60950
Canada
cUL (complies with CSA C22.2, no. 60950)
Australia/New Zealand
AS/NZS 60950
Certification
Europe
e
2-wire/4-wire RS 485 communication port
Electrical interface
Standard
2-wire or 4-wire differential RS 485 EIA
Max. number of Sepam units per ECI850
2 Easergy Sepam series 80 or 2 Easergy Sepam series 60 or 3 Sepam series 40 or 5 Sepam series 20
Maximum network length
1000 m (3300 ft)
Ethernet communication port
Number of ports Type of port Protocols
Transmission speed
1 10/100 Base Tx HTTP, FTP, SNMP, SNTP, ARP, SFT, IEC 61850 TCP/IP 10/100 Mbps
190
PCRED301005EN
Installation
ECI850 IEC 61850 Sepam server
Characteristics (cont'd)
PRI surge arrester
Electrical characteristics
Nominal operating voltage Maximum discharge current Nominal discharge current Protection level Response time
Connection
With cage terminals
1
48 V DC 10 kA (8/20 µs wave) 5 kA (8/20 µs wave) 70 V 1 ns
Cables with cross-section 2.5 to 4 mm2 (AWG 12-10)
Description
1
LED: power-up/maintenance
PE80063
2 Standard LEDs: b RS 485 LED: network link active v On: RS 485 mode v Off: RS 232 mode b Flashing green Tx LED: ECI850 transmission
active b Flashing green Rx LED: ECI850 reception active
3 Ethernet LEDs: b LK green LED on: network link active b Flashing green Tx LED: ECI850 transmission
active b Flashing green Rx LED: ECI850 reception active b 100 green LED: v On: 100 Mbps network speed v Off: 10 Mbps network speed 4 10/100 Base Tx port for Ethernet connection
by RJ45 connector
5 Connection of the 24 V DC supply
6 Reset button
7 RS 485 connection
8 RS 485 parameter-setting selector switches
9 RS 232 connection
6
Setting the RS 485 network parameters
Recommended settings
The network polarization and line impedance matching resistors and type of 2-wire/ 4-wire RS 485 network are selected by means of the RS 485 parameter-setting selector switches. These selector switches are configured by default for a 2-wire RS 485 network with network polarization and line impedance matching resistors.
123456 2-wire (by default)
Network line impedance matching SW1 with resistor
2-wire RS 485
OFF
4-wire RS 485
ON
SW2
ON ON
SW3
SW4
SW5
SW6
123456 4-wire
Setting the RS 485 network parameters.
Network polarization
at the 0 V at the 5 V
SW1
SW2
SW3
ON
SW4
ON
SW5
SW6
Selecting the RS 485 network
2-wire network 4-wire network
SW1
SW2
SW3
SW4
SW5
ON OFF
SW6
ON OFF
Setting the Ethernet link parameters
The TCSEAK0100 configuration kit can be used to connect a PC to the ECI850 to set the Ethernet link parameters.
DE80262
PCRED301005EN
191
Installation
ECI850 IEC 61850 Sepam server
DE80263
Dimensions
mm in
35 1.38
65.8 2.59
57.9 2.28 80.8
3.18 90.7 3.57
45.2 1.78
NOTICE
RISK OF DESTRUCTION OF THE ECI850 b Connect the PRI surge arrester in accordance with the wiring diagrams below. b Check the quality of the earth connected to the surge arrester.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
2.5
72
49.5
0.10
2.83
1.95
68.3 2.69
Connection
b Connect the power supply and RS 485 twisted pair using cable with cross-section y 2.5 mm2 (uAWG 12) b Connect the 24 V DC power supply and the earth to inputs (1), (5) and (3) of the
PRI surge arrester (ref. 16339) supplied with the ECI850 b Connect outputs (2), (8) and (6), (12) of the PRI surge arrester to the - and +
terminals of the black screen terminal block b Connect the RS 485 twisted pair (2-wire or 4-wire) to the (RX+ RX- or RX+ RX-
TX+ TX-) terminals of the black screw terminal block
b Connect the RS 485 twisted pair shielding to the
terminal of the black screw
terminal block b Connect the Ethernet cable to the green RJ45 connector
2-wire RS 485 network
6
DE80447
+ +24 V (1) (7) (3) (5) (11)
PRI Ref : 16339
(2) (8) (6) (12)
ECI850
(7) V+ (6) V-
ACE949-2
A
B
V+
V-
ACE949-2
A
B
V+
V-
Rx+ (3)
L-
L-
Rx- (4)
L+
L+
(5)
DE80448
4-wire RS 485 network
+ +24 V (1) (7) (3) (5) (11)
PRI Ref : 16339
(2) (8) (6) (12)
ECI850
(7) V+ (6) V-
Rx+ (3) Rx- (4) Tx+ (1) Tx- (2)
(5)
ACE959
A
B
V+ V-
Tx+ Tx-
Rx+ Rx-
ACE959
A
B
V+
V-
Tx+ Tx-
Rx+ Rx-
192
CRED301005EN
DE81028
Installation
ECI850 IEC 61850 Sepam server
Supervisor or RTU
Example of architecture
The diagram below shows an example of the communication architecture with ECI850 IEC 61850 Sepam servers.
1
Note: Rc, line impedance matching resistor
ECI850
S-LAN and E-LAN
ECI850
S-LAN and E-LAN
ECI850
S-LAN and E-LAN
Ethernet TCP/IP/IEC 61850
ECI850
S-LAN and E-LAN
RS 485/Modbus
Rc ACE949-2
Rc ACE949-2
Easergy Sepam series 80
Easergy Sepam series 80
RS 485/Modbus Rc ACE949-2
Rc ACE949-2
Easergy Sepam series 60
Easergy Sepam series 60
RS 485/Modbus
Rc ACE949-2
Rc ACE949-2
Rc ACE949-2
6
Sepam series 40
Rc ACE949-2
Rc ACE949-2
Sepam series 40
Rc ACE949-2
Sepam series 40
RS 485/Modbus
Rc ACE949-2
Rc ACE949-2
Sepam series 20
Sepam series 20
Sepam series 20
Sepam series 20
Sepam series 20
Maximum Advised Configuration
The maximum configuration of Sepam for an ECI850 IEC 61850 Sepam server of level 1 is to be choosen between the following configurations: b 5 Sepam series 20, b 3 Sepam series 40, b 2 Easergy Sepam series 60, b 2 Easergy Sepam series 80.
PCRED301005EN
193
6
194
CRED301005EN
Use
Contents
User Machine Interfaces
SFT2841 setting and operating software Welcome window Presentation General screen organization Use of the software Configuration of a Sepam network
UMI on front panel Presentation
Advanced UMI Access to data White keys for current operation Blue keys for parameter and protection setting Data entry principles
Default parameter setting
Commissioning: principles and method
Testing and metering equipment required
General examination and preliminary actions
Checking parameter and protection settings
Checking phase current input connections 1 A/5 A current transformers LPCT type current sensors
Checking the residual current input connection
Checking phase voltage input connections
Checking the residual voltage input connection
Checking logic input and output connections
Validation of the complete protection chain
Checking optional module connections
Test sheet
Maintenance
Firmware modifications
196
197 197 198 199 200 201
206 206
207 207 208 210 212
213
215
216
217
218
219 219 220
221
222
223
224
225
226
7 227
228
230
PCRED301005EN
195
Use
User Machine Interfaces
Sepam User Machine Interfaces
Two different levels of user machine interface (UMI) are offered on the front panel of Sepam: b Basic UMI, with LEDs, for installations operated via a remote system with no need for local operation b Advanced UMI, with keypad and graphic LCD display, giving access to all the information necessary for local operation and Sepam parameter setting.
SFT2841 setting and operating software
The UMI on the front panel of Sepam can be completed by the SFT2841 PC software tool, which can be used for all Sepam parameter setting, local operation and customization functions. The SFT2841 setting and operating software is supplied on CD-ROM, along with the SFT2826 program for recovering disturbance recording files, the interactive introduction to the Sepam range, and all the Sepam documentation in PDF format. The CCA783 or CCA784 PC connecting cord, to be ordered separately, connects the PC to the port on the Sepam front panel, so that the SFT2841 package can be used in point-to-point connected mode.
PE80320
7
196
CRED301005EN
PE80759
DE80303
Use
SFT2841 setting and operating
software
Welcome window
Description
The SFT2841 welcome window opens when the program is launched. It lets you choose the language for the SFT2841 screens, and provides access to the Sepam parameter and protection setting files: b In disconnected mode, you can open or create a parameter and protection setting file for a Sepam b When connected to a single Sepam unit, you can access the parameter and protection setting file for the Sepam unit connected to the PC b When connected to a Sepam network, you can access the parameter and protection setting files for a group of Sepam units connected to the PC via a communication network.
Language of SFT2841 screens
SFT2841 software can be used in English, French or Spanish. The language is selected at the top of the window.
Welcome window.
Sepam series 60
RS 232 SFT2841 connected to a single Sepam unit with the serial port.
Sepam series 60
CCA784 USB SFT2841 connected to a single Sepam unit with the USB port.
Using SFT2841 in disconnected mode
Disconnected mode allows you to prepare parameters and settings files for Sepam prior to commissioning. The parameter and protection setting files prepared in disconnected mode will be downloaded later to the Sepam units in connected mode. b To create a new parameter and protection setting file, click on the icon for the relevant Sepam family b To open an existing parameter and protection setting file, click on the icon for the relevant Sepam family.
Using SFT2841 connected to a single Sepam unit
Connected to a single Sepam unit mode is used during commissioning: b To upload, download and modify Sepam parameters and settings b To have all the measurements and supporting data available for commissioning. The PC fitted with the SFT2841 software is connected to the port on the front panel of the Sepam via an RS 232 port using the CCA783 cord. Connection to a USB port is possible using the CCA784 cable. To open the parameter and setting file on the Sepam once it is connected to the PC, click on the icon.
Sepam series 60
Using SFT2841 connected to a Sepam network
Connected to a Sepam network mode is used during operation:
b To manage the protection system
b To check the status of the power supply b To diagnose any incident occurring on the power supply.
7
The PC fitted with the SFT2841 software is connected to a group of Sepam units via
a communication network (connection via serial link, telephone line or Ethernet). This
network forms the E-LAN engineering network.
The connection window allows configuration of the Sepam network, and provides access to the parameter and protection setting files of the Sepam units on the network.
To open the connection window, click on the icon.
See "Configuration of a Sepam network" page 201 for details of how to configure the E-LAN engineering network from the connection window.
SFT2841 connected to a Sepam network.
DE80343
DE81050
PCRED301005EN
197
Use
SFT2841 setting and operating
software
Presentation
PE10051
All the setting and operating functions are available on the screen of a PC equipped with the SFT2841 software tool and connected to the PC connection port on the front panel of Sepam (run in a Windows XP or Vista environment). All the data used for the same task are grouped together in the same screen to facilitate operation. Menus and icons are used for fast, direct access to the required information.
Current operation b Display of all metering and operation data b Display of alarm messages with the time of appearance (date, hour, min, s) b Display of diagnosic data such as: tripping current, number of switchgear operations and cumulative breaking current b Display of all the protection and parameter settings b Display of the logic status of inputs, outputs and LEDs. This software is suitable for occasional local operation, meeting the needs of demanding personnel who require fast access to all the information.
Parameter and protection setting (1) b Display and setting of all the parameters of each protection function in the same page b Program logic parameter setting, parameter setting of general installation and Sepam data b Input data can be prepared ahead of time and transferred into the corresponding Sepam units in a single operation (downloading function).
PE80516
Example of a measurement display screen (Sepam M20).
Main functions performed by SFT2841: b Modification of passwords b Entry of general characteristics (ratings, integration period, etc.) b Setting Sepam date and time b Entry of protection settings b Changing of program logic assignments b Enabling/disabling of functions b Saving of files.
Saving b Protection and parameter setting data can be saved b Printing of reports is possible as well.
This software can also be used to recover disturbance
7
recording files and provide graphic display using the SFT2826 software tool.
Operating assistance Access from all the screens to a help section which contains all the technical data required for Sepam installation and use.
Example of a phase overcurrent protection setting screen.
(1) Modes accessed via 2 passwords (protection setting level, parameter setting level).
198
CRED301005EN
Use
SFT2841 setting and operating
software
General screen organization
A Sepam document is displayed on the screen via a
graphic interface that has conventional Windows
features.
All the SFT2841 software screens are set up in the
same way.
They include: b A : title bar, with: v name of the application (SFT2841) v identification of the Sepam document displayed v window manipulation handles b B : menu bar, to access all the SFT2841 software functions (unavailable functions are dimmed) b C : toolbar, a group of contextual icons for quick access to the main functions (also accessed via the menu bar) b D : work zone available to the user, presented in the form of tab boxes b E : status bar, with the following information relating to the active document: v alarm on v identification of the connection window v SFT2841 operating mode, connected or disconnected v type of Sepam v Sepam editing identification v identification level v Sepam operating mode v PC date and time.
PE10053
Example of Sepam configuration screen.
PE10054
Guided navigation
A guided navigation mode is proposed to make it easier to enter all the Sepam parameter and protection settings. It allows users to go through all the data input screens in the natural order. The sequencing of screens in guided mode is controlled by clicking on 2 icons on the toolbar C : b : To go back to the previous screen b : To go to the next screen
The screens are linked up in the following order:
1. Sepam configuration
2. Program logic
3. General characteristics
4. Setting screens for the protection functions
available, according to the type of Sepam 5. Control matrix.
7
Example of general characteristics screen.
On-line help
The operator can refer to the on-line help at any time via the "?" command in the menu bar. To use the on-line help, a browser such as Netscape Navigator or Internet Explorer MS is required.
PCRED301005EN
199
Use
SFT2841 setting and operating
software
Use of the software
Not connected to Sepam mode
Connected to Sepam mode
Sepam parameter and protection setting The parameter and protection setting of a Sepam using SFT2841 consists of preparing the Sepam file containing all the characteristics that are specific to the application, a file that is then downloaded into Sepam at the time of commissioning.
Precaution When a laptop is used, given the risks inherent in the accumulation of static electricity, the customary precaution consists of discharging in contact with an earthed metal frame before physically connecting the CCA783 cord.
Note: If you are unable to connect to Sepam, check that the SFT2841 software version used is actually compatible with your Sepam. (see "Compatibility of Sepam version/SFT2841 version" page 229).
NOTICE
HAZARD OF UNINTENDED OPERATION b The device must only be configured and set by qualified personnel, using the results of the installation protection system study. b During commissioning of the installation and after any modification, check that the Sepam configuration and protection function settings are consistent with the results of this study.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Plugging into Sepam b Plug the 9-pin connector (SUB-D type) into one of the PC communication ports. Configure the PC communication port via the "Communication port" function in the "Options" menu. b Plug the 6-pin connector (round minidin type) into the connector situated behind the blanking plate on the front panel of Sepam or the DSM303 module.
Connection to Sepam 2 possibilities for setting up the connection between SFT2841 and the Sepam: b Choice of "Connect to the Sepam" at the start-up of SFT2841 b "Connection" function in the "File" menu. Once the connection with Sepam has been established, "Connected" appears in the status bar, and the Sepam connection window can be accessed in the work zone.
Operating mode: 1. Create a Sepam file for the type of Sepam to be set up. (The newly created file contains the Sepam factory-set parameter and protection settings).
User identification The window intended for the entry of the 4-digit password is activated: b Via the "Passwords" tab b Via the "Identification" function in the "Sepam" menu b Via the "Identification" icon .
2. Modify the "Sepam" page function sheet
The "Return to Operating mode" function in the "Passwords" tab removes access
parameters and the "Protections" page function
rights to parameter and protection setting mode.
sheet protection settings: b All the information relating to a function is grouped together on a single screen b We recommend entering all the parameter and protection settings in the natural screen order suggested by the guided navigation tool.
Downloading of parameters and protection settings Parameter and protection setting files can only be downloaded to the connected Sepam in Parameter setting mode. Once the connection has been established, the procedure for downloading a parameter and protection setting file is as follows: 1. Activate the "Download Sepam" function in the "Sepam" menu.
Entry of parameter and protection settings b The parameter and protection setting input fields
2. Select the *.rpg file which contains the data to be downloaded. 3. Acknowledge the end of operation report.
correspond to the type of value: v selection buttons
Return to factory settings This operation is only possible in Parameter setting mode, via the "Sepam" menu. All
v numerical value input fields
the Sepam general characteristics, protection settings and the control matrix go back
v dialog box (Combo box)
to the default values.
b The modifications made to a function sheet are to be Uploading of parameters and protection settings
"Applied" or "Canceled" before the user goes on to the The connected Sepam parameter and protection setting file can only be uploaded in
following function sheet b The consistency of the parameter and protection
Operating mode. Once the connection has been established, the procedure for uploading a parameter
7
settings entered is checked: v a clear message specifies the inconsistent value in the function sheet opened v values which become inconsistent following the
and protection setting file is as follows: 1. Activate the "Upload Sepam" function in the "Sepam" menu. 2. Select the *.rpg file that is to contain the data to be uploaded. 3. Acknowledge the end of operation report.
modification of a parameter are replaced by "****" and
must be corrected.
Local operation of Sepam
Connected to Sepam, SFT2841 offers all the local operating functions available in
the advanced UMI screen, plus the following functions: b Setting of Sepam internal clock, via the "General characteristics" tab. It should be
noted that Sepam saves the date and time, in case the auxiliary power supply fails
(< 24 hours) b Implementation of the disturbance recording function, via the "OPG" menu:
validation/inhibition of the function, recovery of Sepam files, start-up of SFT2826 b Consultation of the history of the last 64 Sepam alarms, with time-tagging b Access to Sepam diagnostic data, in the "Sepam" tab box, included in "Sepam
diagnosis".
In Parameter setting mode, the switchgear diagnostic values can be modified:
operation counter, cumulative breaking current to reset the values after a change of
breaking device.
200
CRED301005EN
Use
SFT2841 setting and operating software Configuration of a Sepam network
Connection window
The SFT2841 software connection window is used: b To select an existing Sepam network or configure a new one b To set up the connection to the selected Sepam network b To select one Sepam unit from the network and access its parameters, settings, and operation and maintenance information.
Configuration of a Sepam network
Several configurations can be defined for the various Sepam installations. A Sepam network configuration is identified by a name. It is saved on the SFT2841 PC in a file in the SFT2841 installation directory (default: C:\Program Files\Schneider\SFT2841\Net).
Configuration of a Sepam network is in 2 parts: b Configuration of the communication network b Configuration of the Sepam units.
Configuration of the communication network
To configure the communication network, first define: b The type of link between the PC and the Sepam network b The communication parameters, according to the type of link selected: v direct serial link v link via Ethernet TCP/IP v link via telephone modem.
PE80421
Configuration window for the communication network, according to the type of link: serial link,
modem link (STN) or Ethernet link (TCP).
7
PCRED301005EN
201
Use
SFT2841 setting and operating
software
Configuration of a Sepam network
PE80422
Configuration window for the serial link communication network.
Direct serial link
The Sepam units are connected to an RS 485 (or fiber-optic) multidrop network. Depending on the serial link interfaces available on the PC, the PC itself will be connected either directly to the RS 485 network (or fiber-optic HUB), or via an RS 232/RS 485 converter (or fiber-optic converter).
The communication parameters to be defined are: b port: communication port used on the PC b speed: 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 bauds b parity: None, Even or Odd b handshake: none, RTS or RTS-CTS b time-out: from 100 to 3000 ms b number of retries: from 1 to 3.
PE80423
Link via Ethernet TCP/IP
The Sepam units are connected to an RS 485 multidrop network over one or more Ethernet Modbus TCP/IP gateways (for example: EGX gateways or ECI850 servers that act as the Modbus TCP/IP gateway for the link with the SFT2841).
Use on an IEC 61850 network SFT2841 can be used on an IEC 61850 network. In this case, it can be used to define the IEC 61850 configuration of Sepams connected to this network. See the Sepam IEC 61850 Communication user's manual (reference SEPED306024EN) for more information.
Configuration window for the Ethernet TCP/IP communication network.
Configuration of the Modbus TCP/IP gateway See the setup manual for the gateway used. In general, the gateway should be assigned an IP address. The configuration parameters for the gateway's RS 485 interface must be defined in accordance with the Sepam communication interface configuration: b speed: 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 bauds b character format: 8 data bits + 1 stop bit + parity (none, even, odd).
Configuration of communication on SFT2841 When configuring a Sepam network on SFT2841, the following communication
parameters must be defined: b Type of device: Modbus gateway, ECI850 or Sepam b IP address: IP address for the connected remote equipment b time-out: from 100 to 3000 ms. A time-out of between 800 ms and 1000 ms is sufficient in most installations. Communication via the TCP/IP gateway may, however, be slowed down if other applications want Modbus TCP/IP or IEC 61850 access at the same time. The time-out value should then be increased (2 to 3 seconds). b number of retries: from 1 to 3.
Note 1: SFT2841 uses the Modbus TCP/IP communication protocol.
Although communication is IP-based, use of SFT2841 is restricted to a local installation network
7
based on an Ethernet network (LAN Local Area Network). The operation of SFT2841 over a WAN (Wide Area Network) cannot be guaranteed because of the presence of some routers or firewalls that may reject the Modbus protocol, causing
communication times that would be incompatible with Sepam.
Note 2: SFT2841 allows Sepam protection settings to be modified, and direct activation of the outputs. These operations, which could involve the operation of electrical equipment (opening and closing), and thus put the safety of people and installations at risk, are protected by the Sepam password. In addition to this protection, the E-LANs and S-LANs must be designed as private networks, protected from external actions by all suitable methods.
202
CRED301005EN
PE80424
Use
SFT2841 setting and operating
software
Configuration of a Sepam network
Configuration window for the communication network via telephone modem
Link via telephone modem
The Sepams are connected to an RS 485 multidrop network using an industrial STN modem. This modem is the "called modem". It must first be configured, either via AT commands from a PC using HyperTerminal or the configuration tool that may have been supplied with the modem, or by setting switches (see the modem manufacturer's manual).
The PC can use an internal or an external modem. This modem on the PC side is always the calling modem. It must be installed and configured in accordance with the Windows modem installation procedure.
Configuration of the calling modem in SFT2841
When configuring a Sepam network, SFT2841 displays the list of all the modems installed on the PC. The communication parameters to be defined are: b modem: select one of the modems listed by SFT2841 b telephone no.: no. of the remote modem to be called b speed: 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 bauds b parity: none (not adjustable) b handshake: none, RTS or RTS-CTS b time-out: from 100 to 3000 ms. Communication via modem and telephone network is slowed considerably because of the transit time through the modems. A time-out of between 800 ms and 1000 ms is sufficient in most 38400 baud installations. In some cases, the poor quality of the telephone network may require a slower speed (9600 or 4800 bauds). The time-out value should then be increased (2 to 3 seconds). b number of retries: from 1 to 3.
Note: The speed and parity of the calling modem must be configured in Windows with the same values as for SFT2841.
7
PCRED301005EN
203
Use
SFT2841 setting and operating
software
Configuration of a Sepam network
PE80424
Configuration window for the communication network via telephone modem.
7
Configuration of called modem
The modem on the Sepam side is the called modem. It must first be configured, either via AT commands from a PC using HyperTerminal or the configuration tool that may have been supplied with the modem, or by setting switches (see the modem manufacturer's manual).
Modem RS 485 interface In general, the configuration parameters for the modem's RS 485 interface must be defined in accordance with the Sepam communication interface configuration: b speed: 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 bauds b character format: 8 data bits + 1 stop bit + parity (none, even, odd).
Telephone network interface Modern modems offer sophisticated features such as checking the quality of the telephone line, error correction and data compression. These options are not appropriate for communication between SFT2841 and Sepam, which is based on the Modbus RTU protocol. Their effect on communication performance may be the opposite of the expected result.
It is therefore highly advisable to: b Invalidate the error correction, data compression and telephone line quality monitoring options b Use the same end-to-end communication speed between: v the Sepam network and the called modem v the called modem (Sepam side) and the calling modem (PC side) v the PC and the calling modem (see recommended configurations table).
Sepam network 38400 bauds 19200 bauds 9600 bauds
Telephone network V34 modulation, 33600 bauds V34 modulation, 19200 bauds V32 modulation, 9600 bauds
PC modem interface 38400 bauds 19200 bauds 9600 bauds
Industrial configuration profile The following table shows the main characteristics of the modem on the Sepam side. These characteristics match a configuration profile commonly known as an "industrial profile", as opposed to the configuration of modems used in offices.
Depending on the type of modem used, the configuration will either be via AT commands from a PC using HyperTerminal or the configuration tool that may have been supplied with the modem, or by setting switches (see the modem manufacturer's manual).
Characteristics of the "industrial profile" configuration Transmission in buffered mode, without error correction Data compression deactivated Line quality monitoring deactivated DTR signal assumed to be permanently off (allows the modem connection to be established automatically on an incoming call) CD signal off when carrier is present All reports made to Sepam blocked Character echo suppression No flow control
AT command \N0 (force &Q6) %C0 %E0 &D0
&C1 Q1 E0 &K0
204
CRED301005EN
PE80468
Use
SFT2841 setting and operating
software
Configuration of a Sepam network
Sepam network connected to SFT2841.
Access to parameters and settings for an Easergy Sepam series 80 connected to a communication network.
Identification of Sepam units connected to the communication network
The Sepam units connected to the communication network are identified by either: b Their Modbus address b Their IP address b The IP address for their gateway and their Modbus address These addresses can be configured in either of the following ways: b Manually, one by one: v the "Add" button is used to define a new device v the "Edit" button is used to modify the Modbus address if necessary v the "Delete" button removes a device from the configuration b Or automatically for Modbus addresses, by running an automatic search of the Sepam units connected: v the "Automatic search"/"Stop search" button starts or interrupts the search v when SFT2841 recognizes a Sepam unit, its Modbus address and type are shown on screen v when a Modbus device other than Sepam responds to SFT2841, its Modbus address is displayed. The text "???" indicates that the device is not a Sepam.
The Sepam network configuration is saved in a file when the UMI window closes, by pressing the "OK" button.
Access to Sepam information
To establish communication between SFT2841 and a Sepam network, select the Sepam network configuration you want, select the device connected to the TCP/IP network and press "Connect". The Sepam network is displayed in the connection window. SFT2841 polls all the equipment defined in the selected configuration. Each Sepam queried is represented by an icon:
b
Sepam series 20 or Sepam series 40 actually connected to the network
b
Easergy Sepam series 60 or Sepam series 80 actually connected to the network
b
Sepam configured but not connected to the network
b Device other than Sepam connected to the network.
A summary report of each Sepam detected as present is also displayed: b Sepam Modbus address b Type of application and Sepam identification b Any alarms present b Any minor/major faults present.
To access parameters, settings and operation and maintenance information for a
particular Sepam, click on the icon for that Sepam. SFT2841 then establishes a
point-to-point connection with the selected Sepam.
7
PE80119
PCRED301005EN
205
Use
UMI on front panel
Presentation
Basic UMI
MT10817
This UMI includes:
on
b 2 LEDs indicating Sepam operating status:
v green "on" LED: device on
v red LED: device unavailable (initialization phase
or detection of internal failure) b 9 parameterizable yellow LEDs, fitted with a standard label (with SFT2841, a customized label can be printed on a laser printer) b reset key for clearing faults and resetting b 1 connection port for the link with the PC (CCA783 or CCA784 cord); the connector is protected by a sliding cover.
I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext
0 off I on Trip reset
Fixed or remote advanced UMI
MT10822
In addition to the basic UMI functions, this version
on
I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext
0 off I on Trip
provides: b A "graphic" LCD display for the display of measurements, parameter/protection settings, and alarm and operating messages. The number of lines, size of characters and symbols are in accordance with the screens and language versions.
1
I1= 162A RMS
The LCD display retrolighting can be activated by pressing a key. b A 9-key keypad with 2 operating modes v white keys for current operation: 1 display of measurements 2 display of "switchgear, network diagnosis" data
I2= 161A RMS
2
I3= 163A RMS 3
3 display of alarm messages
4 resetting
5 acknowledgment and clearing of alarms v blue keys activated in parameter and protection setting mode: 7 access to protection settings
8 access to Sepam parameter settings including date and time (1)
clear
reset
9
8
7
6
5
4
9 used to enter the 2 passwords
required to change protection and parameter settings.
7
The , reset
,
( 4 , 5 , 6 ) keys are used
to browse through the menus, and to scroll and accept
the values displayed.
6 "lamp test" keys: switching on sequence of all the LEDs.
(1) Date/time saved in case the auxiliary power supply fails (< 24 hours).
206
CRED301005EN
Use
Advanced UMI
Access to data
Access to measurements and
Example: measurement loop
parameters
The measurements and parameters can be accessed using the metering, diagnosis, status and protection
energizing of Sepam
MT10885
keys.
They are arranged in a series of screens as shown in
the diagram opposite. b The data are split up by category into 4 loops, associated with the following 4 keys: v key : measurements v key : switchgear diagnosis
Measurements numerical values I rms
and additional measurements: v key : general settings v key : protection settings. b When the user presses a key, the system moves on
Measurements bar graphs
to the next screen in the loop. When a screen includes
more than 4 lines, the user can move about in the
clear
screen via the cursor keys ( , ).
Average I
Overcurrent
clear
Io bar graph
Temperatures 1 to 4 temperature sensors
Temperatures 5 to 8 temperature sensors
Protection and parameter setting modes
MT10808
There are 3 levels of use:
on
I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext
0 off I on Trip
b Operator level: used to access all the screens in read mode and does not require any passwords b Protection setter level: requires the entry of the
7
first password ( key), allows protection setting (
key) b Parameter setter level: requires the entry of the
passwords
second password ( key), allows modification of the
general settings as well ( key).
Only parameter setters can modify the passwords.
The passwords have 4 digits.
apply
cancel
clear
reset
PCRED301005EN
207
Use
Advanced UMI
White keys for current operation
key
The "metering" key is used to display the variables measured by Sepam.
MT10829
on
I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext
0 off I on Trip
I1= 162A RMS I2= 161A RMS I3= 163A RMS
key
The "diagnosis" key provides access to diagnostic data on the breaking device and additional measurements, to facilitate fault analysis.
7
key
The "alarms" key is used to consult the 16 most recent alarms that have not yet been cleared.
MT10287
MT10286
clear
reset
on
I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext
0 off I on Trip
TripI1 = 162A TripI2 = 161A TripI3 = 250A TripIo = 250A
clear
reset
on
I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext
0 off I on Trip
0 Io FAULT -1 -2 -3
clear
reset
208
CRED301005EN
Use
Advanced UMI
White keys for current operation
reset key
The "reset" key resets Sepam (extinction of LEDs and resetting of protection units after the disappearance of faults). The alarm messages are not erased.
clear key
When an alarm is present on the Sepam display, the "clear" key is used to return to the screen that was present prior to the appearance of the alarm or to a less recent unacknowledged alarm. Sepam is not reset. In the metering or diagnosis or alarm menus, the "clear" key can be used to reset the average currents, peak demand currents, running hours counter and alarm stack when they are shown on the display.
MT10833
MT10906
on
I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext
0 off I on Trip
2001 / 10 / 06 12:40:50
PHASE FAULT 1A Trip I1 = 162A Trip I2 = 161A Trip I3 = 250A
clear
reset
on
I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext
0 off I on Trip
I1max = 180A I2max = 181A I3max = 180A
clear
reset
key
7
MT10829
Press the "lamp test" key for 5 seconds to start up an LED and display test sequence. When an alarm is present, the "lamp test" key is disabled.
on
I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext
0 off I on Trip
I1= 162A RMS I2= 161A RMS I3= 163A RMS
clear
reset
PCRED301005EN
209
Use
Advanced UMI
Blue keys for parameter and
protection setting
key
The "status" key is used to display and enter the Sepam general settings including setting the Sepam date and time. They define the protected equipment characteristics and the different optional modules. This key can also be used to access the version compatible with SFT2841 screen.
MT10810
on
I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext
0 off I on Trip
General settings
language frequency
English
50 Hz
French
60 Hz
A/B choice (A actif) = A
clear
reset
key
The "protection" key is used to display, set and enable or disable the protection units.
MT10811
on
I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext
0 off I on Trip
50/51 1 A
Off On
Trip
Curve = inverse
Threshold = 110 A
Delay = 100 ms
7
key
The "key" key is used to enter the passwords for access to the different modes: b protection setting b parameter setting and return to "operating" mode (with no passwords).
MT10808
clear
reset
on
I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext
0 off I on Trip
passwords
apply
cancel
clear
reset
210
CRED301005EN
Use
Advanced UMI
Blue keys for parameter and
protection setting
reset key
The reset key is used to confirm the protection settings, parameter settings and passwords.
MT10812
on
I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext
0 off I on Trip
50/51 1 A
Off On
Trip
Curve = SIT
Threshold = 550 A
Delay = 600 ms
clear key
When there are no alarms on the Sepam display and the user is in the status, protection or alarm menus, the
key is used to move the cursor upward.
MT10812
clear
reset
on
I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext
0 off I on Trip
50/51 1 A
Off On
Trip
Curve = SIT
Threshold = 550 A
Delay = 600 ms
clear
reset
key
7
MT10812
When there are no alarms on the Sepam display and
on
I>51 I>>51 Io>51N Io>>51N ext
0 off I on Trip
the user is in the status, protection or alarm menus, the
key is used to move the cursor downward.
50/51 1 A
Off On
Trip
Curve = SIT
Threshold = 550 A
Delay = 600 ms
clear
reset
PCRED301005EN
211
Use
Advanced UMI
Data entry principles
MT10816
Use of passwords
Sepam has two 4-digit passwords. b The first password, symbolized by a key, is used to modify the protection settings b The second password, symbolized by two keys, is used to modify the protection settings and all the general settings. The 2 factory-set passwords are: 0000
Entry of passwords Press the key to display the following screen:
passwords
apply
cancel
Modification of passwords Only the parameter setting qualification level (2 keys) or the SFT2841 allow modification of the passwords. Passwords are modified in the general settings screen, key.
Loss of passwords If the factory-set passwords have been modified and the latest passwords entered have been irretrievably lost by the user, please contact your local after-sales service representative.
Entry of parameters or settings
Principle applicable to all Sepam screens (example of phase overcurrent protection) b Enter the password b Access the corresponding screen by successively pressing the key b Move the cursor by pressing the key for access to the desired field (e.g. curve) b Press the reset key to confirm the choice, then select the type of curve by pressing
the or key and confirm by pressing the reset key
b Press the key to reach the following fields, up to the apply the reset key to confirm the setting.
box. Press
Press the reset key to position the cursor on the first digit
0 XXX
Scroll through the digits using the cursor keys ( ,
) then confirm to go on to the next digit by pressing
the reset key. Do not use characters other than numbers
0 to 9 for each of the 4 digits.
When the password for your qualification level is
entered, press the key to position the cursor on the
apply
box. Press the reset key again to confirm.
When Sepam is in protection setting mode, a key
appears at the top of the display.
When Sepam is in parameter setting mode, two keys
appear at the top of the display.
Entry of numerical values
(e.g. current threshold value) b Position the cursor on the required field using the
keys, then confirm to
go on to the next digit by pressing the reset key b Select the first digit to be entered and set the value by pressing the or key
(choice of
: 0......9)
b Press the reset key to confirm the choice and go on to the following digit.
The values are entered with 3 significant digits and a period.
The unit (e.g. A or kA) is chosen using the last digit. b Press the reset key to confirm the entry, then press the key for access to the
following field b All of the values entered are only effective after the user confirms by selecting the
apply
box at the bottom of the screen and presses the reset key.
MT10817
Off On
Trip curve = definitive thershold = 120 A
delay = 100 ms
response time
7
curve delay
= definitive = 0 ms
apply
cancel
Access to the protection setting or parameter setting modes is disabled: b By pressing the key b Automatically if no keys are activated for more than 5 minutes.
212
CRED301005EN
Use
Default parameter setting
The Sepam units are delivered with default parameter setting and protection setting according to the type of application. These "factory" settings are also used with the SFT 2841 software: b for the creation of new files in disconnected mode b for a return to the "factory" settings in connected mode.
S20, S24 (1), T20, T24 (1), M20 applications
Hardware configuration b Identification: Sepam xxxx b Model: UX b MES module: absent b MET module: absent b MSA module: absent b DSM module: present b ACE module: absent.
Output parameter setting b Outputs used: O1 to O4 b Shunt trip units: O1, O3 b Undervoltage trip units: O2, O4 b Impulse mode: no (latched).
Program logic b Circuit breaker control: no b Logic discrimination: no b Logic input assignment: not used.
General characteristics b Network frequency: 50 Hz b Group of settings: A b Enable remote setting: no b Working language: English b CT rating: 5 A b Number of CTs: 3 (I1, I2, I3) b Rated current In: 630 A b Basic current Ib: 630 A b Integration period: 5 min b Residual current: 3I sum b Pre-trig for disturbance recording: 36 periods.
Protection functions b All the protection functions are "Off" b The settings comprise values and choices that are informative and consistent with the general default characteristics (in particular rated current In) b Tripping behavior: v latching: yes (except for functions 50BF, 49RMS, 37 and 66) v activation of output O1: yes (except for functions 50BF and 66) v disturbance recording triggering: with (except for functions 50BF, 48/51LR and 66).
Control matrix
Each Sepam has default program logic according to the type (S20, T20, etc.) as well
as messages for the different LEDs.
The functions are assigned according to the most frequent use of the unit. This
parameter setting and/or marking can be customized if required using the SFT 2841
software tool. b S20 application:
7
v activation of output O2 upon protection tripping
v activation of LEDs according to front panel markings
v watchdog on output O4
v disturbance recording triggering upon signal pick-up
b Additional functions for T20 application:
v activation of O1 without latching upon tripping of temperature monitoring 1 to 7
v activation of O1 and LED L9 without latching upon thermal overload tripping
b Additional functions for M20 application:
v activation of outputs O1 and O2 and LED L9 upon tripping of functions, 37 (phase
undercurrent) and 51LR (locked rotor) v activation of output O2 upon tripping of function 66 (starts per hour) v latching for function 51LR b Complement for S24, T24 applications:
All functions, except for 49 RMS, activate the 50BF protection function in the
absence of circuit breaker control.
By default, the CLPU 50/51 and CLPU 50N/51N functions are off.
(1) Applications S24 and T24 perform the functions of applications S23 and T23 respectively and, in addition, the phase overcurrent and earth fault cold load pick-up functions.
PCRED301005EN
213
Use
Default parameter setting
B21(1) and B22 applications
Hardware configuration b Identification: Sepam xxxx b Model: UX b MES module: absent b MET module: absent b MSA module: absent b DSM module: present b ACE module: absent. Output parameter setting b Outputs used: O1 to O4 b Shunt trip units: O1 to O3 b Undervoltage trip units: O4 b Impulse mode: no (latched). Program logic b Circuit breaker control: no b Logic input assignment: not used. General characteristics b Network frequency: 50 Hz b Enable remote setting: no b Working language: English b Primary rated voltage (Unp): 20 kV b Secondary rated voltage (Uns): 100 V b Voltages measured by VTs: V1, V2, V3 b Residual voltage: sum of 3Vs b Pre-trig for disturbance recording: 36 periods.
7
Protection functions b All the protections are "Off" b The settings comprise values and choices that are informative and consistent with the general characteristics by default b Latching: no b Disturbance recording triggering: with
Control matrix b Assignment of output relays and LEDs according to chart:
Functions
Outputs
LEDs
B21 B22 O1 O2 O3 O4 L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9
27D-1 27D-1
b
b
27D-2 27D-2 b
b
b
27R 27R
b
b
27-1 27-1
b
b
27-2 27-2 b
b
b
27S-1 27S-1 b
b
b
27S-2 27S-2 b
b
b
27S-3 27S-3 b
b
b
59-1 59-1
b
b
59-2 59-2 b
b
b
59N-1 59N-1
b
b
59N-2 59N-2 b
b
b
81H 81H b
b
b
81L-1 81L-1
b
b
81L-2 81L-2 b
bb
81R b
bb
b Disturbance recording triggering upon signal pick-up b Watchdog on output O4.
LED marking L1: U < 27 L2: U < 27D L3: U < 27R L4: U > 59 L5: U > 59N L6: F > 81H L7: F < 81L L8: F << 81L L9: Trip
(1) Type B21 performs the same functions as cancelled type B20.
214
CRED301005EN
Commissioning
Commissioning: principles and method
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS b Only qualified personnel should commission this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions. b NEVER work alone. b Obey all existing safety instructions when commissioning and maintaining high-voltage equipment. b Beware of potential hazards and wear personal protective equipment.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
Protection relay testing
Protection relays are tested prior to commissioning, with the dual aim of maximizing availability and minimizing the risk of malfunction of the assembly being commissioned. The problem consists of defining the consistency of the appropriate tests, keeping in mind that the relay is always involved as the main link in the protection chain. Therefore, protection relays based on electromechanical and solid state technologies must be systematically submitted to detailed testing, not only to qualify relay commissioning, but also to check that they actually are in good operating order and have the required level of performance.
The Sepam concept makes it possible to do away with such testing. In effect: b The use of digital technology ensures the reproducibility of the stated performances b Each of the Sepam functions has undergone full factory qualification b An internal self-testing system provides continuous information on the state of the electronic components and the integrity of the functions (e.g. automatic tests diagnose the level of component polarization voltages, the continuity of the analog value acquisition chain, non-alteration of RAM memory, absence of settings outside the tolerance range) and thereby ensures a high level of availability.
Sepam is therefore ready to operate without requiring any additional qualification testing that concerns it directly.
Sepam commissioning tests
The preliminary Sepam commissioning tests can be limited to a commissioning check, i.e.: b Checking compliance with BOMs and hardware installation diagrams and rules during a preliminary general check b Checking compliance of the general settings and protection settings entered with the setting sheets b Checking current or voltage input connections by secondary injection tests b Checking logic input and output connections by simulation of input data and forcing of output status b Validating the complete protection chain b Checking the connection of the optional MET148-2 and MSA141 modules. The various checks are described further on.
General principles
b All the tests should be carried out with the MV cubicle completely isolated and the MV circuit breaker racked out (disconnected and open) b All the tests are to be performed under operating conditions. We strongly recommend that you do not modify, even temporarily, the wiring or the settings to facilitate testing..
b The SFT2841 parameter setting and operating software is the basic tool for all
Sepam users. It is especially useful during Sepam commissioning tests. The tests described in this document are systematically based on the use of that tool.
7
Method
For each Sepam: b Only carry out the checks suited to the hardware configuration and the functions activated b Use the test sheet provided to record the results of the commissioning tests. A comprehensive description of all the tests is given further on: b Checking phase current input connections v with 1 A/5 A transformer, see page 219 v with LPCT type current sensor, see page 220 b Checking the residual current input connection, see page 221 b Checking phase voltage input connections, see page 222 b Checking the residual voltage input connection, see page 223.
PCRED301005EN
215
Commissioning
7
Testing and metering equipment required
Generators
b Sinusoidal AC current generator: v 50 or 60 Hz frequency (according to the country) v single-phase type, adjustable from 0 to 50 Arms v with connector suited to the built-in test terminal box in the current input connection diagram b Sinusoidal AC voltage generator: v 50 or 60 Hz frequency (according to the country) v single-phase type, adjustable from 0 to 150 Vrms v with connector suited to the built-in test terminal box in the voltage input connection diagram b DC voltage generator: v adjustable from 48 to 250 V DC v for adaptation to the voltage level of the input being tested v with electric cord and clamps, wire grip or touch probes.
Metering devices
b 1 ammeter, 0 to 50 Arms b 1 voltmeter, 0 to 150 Vrms.
Computer equipment
b PC with minimum configuration: v Microsoft Windows XP or Vista v 400 MHz Pentium processor v 64 MB of RAM v 200 MB free on hard disk v CD-ROM drive b SFT2841 software b CCA783 serial connection or CCA784 USB cord between the PC and Sepam.
Documents
b Complete connection diagram of Sepam and additional modules, with: v phase current input connection to the corresponding CTs via the test terminal box v residual current input connection v phase voltage input connection to the corresponding VTs via the test terminal box v residual voltage input connection to the corresponding VTs via the test terminal box v logic input and output connection v temperature sensor connection v analog output connection b Hardware BOMs and installation rules b All Sepam parameter and protection settings, available in paper format.
216
CRED301005EN
Commissioning
General examination and preliminary actions
Checking to be done prior to energizing
Apart from the mechanical state of the equipment, use the diagrams and BOMs provided by the contractor to check: b Identification of Sepam and accessories defined by the contractor b Correct earthing of Sepam (via terminal 17 of the 20-pin connector) b Conformity of Sepam auxiliary voltage (indicated on the label stuck to the right side of the base unit) with the auxiliary supply voltage of the switchboard (or cubicle) b Correct connection of the auxiliary voltage (terminal 1: AC or positive polarity; terminal 2: AC or negative polarity) b Presence of a residual current measurement core balance CT and/or additional modules connected to Sepam, when applicable b Presence of test terminal boxes upstream from the current inputs and voltage inputs b Conformity of connections between Sepam terminals and the test terminal boxes.
Connections
Check that the connections are tightened (with equipment not energized). The Sepam connectors must be correctly plugged in and locked.
Energizing
1. Switch on the auxiliary power supply. 2. Check that Sepam performs the following initialization sequence, which lasts approximately 6 seconds: b Green ON and red LEDs on b Red LED off b Pickup of "watchdog" contact.
The first screen displayed is the phase current or phase voltage metering screen according to the application.
Implementation of the SFT2841 software for PC
1. Start up the PC. 2. Connect the PC RS 232 serial port or the USB port to the communication port on the front panel of Sepam using the CCA783 or the CCA784 cord. 3. Start up the SFT2841 software, by clicking on the related icon. 4. Choose to connect to the Sepam to be checked.
Identification of Sepam
1. Note the Sepam serial number given on the label stuck to the right side of the base unit. 2. Note the Sepam type and software version using the SFT2841 software, "Sepam Diagnosis" screen. (This information is also available on the advanced UMI, in the Sepam general settings). 3. Enter them in the test sheet.
7
PCRED301005EN
217
Commissioning
Checking parameter and protection settings
Determination of parameter and protection settings
All of the Sepam parameter and protection settings are determined beforehand by the design department in charge of the application, and should be approved by the customer. It is presumed that the study has been carried out with all the attention necessary, or even consolidated by a network coordination study. All of the Sepam parameter and protection settings should be available at the time of commissioning: b in hard copy format (with the SFT2841 software, the parameter and protection setting file for a Sepam can be printed directly or exported to a text file for editing) b and, when applicable, in the format of a file to be downloaded into Sepam using the SFT2841 software.
Checking parameters and protection settings
Check to be made when the Sepam parameter and protection settings have not been entered or downloaded during commissioning testing, to confirm the conformity of the parameter and protection settings entered with the values determined during the study. The aim of this check is not to confirm the relevance of the parameter and protection settings. 1. Go through all the parameter and protection setting screens in the SFT2841 software, in the order proposed in guided mode. 2. For each screen, compare the values entered in the Sepam with the values recorded in the parameter and protection setting file. 3. Correct any parameter and protection settings that have not been entered correctly, proceeding as indicated in the "Use of the (SFT2841) software" section of this manual.
Conclusion
Once the checking has been done and proven to be conclusive, as of that phase, the parameter and protection settings should not be changed any further and are considered to be final. In order to be conclusive, the tests which follow must be performed with these parameter and settings. We strongly recommend that you do not modify, even temporarily, any of the existing values to facilitate testing.
7
218
CRED301005EN
Commissioning
DE80524
Checking phase current input connections 1 A/5 A current transformers
Description
Check to be carried out for Sepam S20, S23, S24, T20, T23, T24 or M20, when phase currents are measured by 1 A or 5 A current transformers.
Procedure
1. To inject a current into the phase 1 input, connect the single-phase generator to the test terminal box using the plug provided, in accordance with the diagram below:
L1 L2 L3
Sepam S20/S23/S24/T20/T23/ T24/M20
4 1B 5 2 6 3
A 18 19
PCRED301005EN
ex : I1
I
A
N A
7
2. Turn on the generator. 3. Inject the CT secondary rated current, i.e. 1 A or 5 A. 4. Use the SFT2841 software to check that the phase 1 current value is approximately equal to the CT primary rated current. 5. If the residual current is calculated by taking the sum of the 3 phase currents, use the SFT2841 software to check that the residual current value is approximately equal to the CT primary rated current. 6. If the residual current is measured via 3 phase CTs, use the SFT2841 software to check that the residual current value is approximately equal to the CT primary rated current. 7. Turn off the generator. 8. Proceed in the same way for the other 2 phase current inputs. 9. At the end of the test, put the cover back on the test terminal box.
219
Commissioning
Checking phase current input connections LPCT type current sensors
Description
Check to be performed for Sepam S20, S23, S24, T20, T23, T24 or M20, when phase currents are measured by LPCT-type current sensors.
Phase current measurement by LPCT sensors
b The 3 LPCT current sensors are connected via an RJ45 plug to the CCA670 connector which is to be mounted on the rear panel of Sepam, identified as B b The connection of only one or two LPCT sensors is not allowed and causes Sepam to go into the fail-safe position b The primary rated current In measured by the LPCT sensors is to be entered as a Sepam general setting and configured by microswitches on the CCA670 connector.
Procedure
The tests to be carried out to check phase current input connections are the same whether the phase currents are measured by CTs or by LPCT sensors. Only the Sepam current input connection procedure and current injection values change. To test current inputs connected to LPCT sensors with a standard injection box, the ACE917 injection adapter is required. The ACE917 adapter is inserted between: b The standard injection box b The LPCT test plug: v integrated in the Sepam CCA670 connector v or transferred by means of the CCA613 accessory. The ACE917 injection adapter should be set according to the currents selected on the CCA670 connector: the ACE917 setting should be equal to the number of the microswitch that is set to 1 on the CCA670. The injection value depends on the primary rated current selected on the CCA670 connector and entered in the Sepam general settings, i.e.: b 1 A for the following values (in Amps): 25, 50, 100, 133, 200, 320, 400, 630 b 5 A for the following values (in Amps): 125, 250, 500, 666, 1000, 1600, 2000, 3150.
Block diagram (without CCA613 accessory)
DE80519
Sepam S20/S23/S24/T20/ T23/T24/M20
7
Current generator
220
CRED301005EN
Commissioning
DE80520
Checking the residual current input connection
Description
Check to be carried out for Sepam S20, S23, S24, T20, T23, T24 or M20, when the residual current is measured by a specific sensor: b CSH120, CSH200 or CSH300 core balance CT b Another core balance CT connected to an ACE990 interface b A single 1 A or 5 A CT encompassing the 3 phases.
Procedure
1. Connect the single-phase current generator to inject current into the primary circuit of the core balance CT or the CT, in accordance with the diagram below:
L1 L2 L3
test terminal box
Sepam S20/S23/S24/T20/ T23/T24/M20
4 1B 5 2 6 3
A
18
19
I
A
N A
7
Current generator
2. Turn on the generator. 3. Inject a 5 A primary residual current. 4. Use the SFT2841 software to check that the residual current value is approximately equal to 5 A. 5. Turn off the generator.
PCRED301005EN
221
Commissioning
Checking phase voltage input connections
Description
Check to be carried out for Sepam B21 or B22.
Procedure
1. To apply a phase-to-neutral voltage to the phase 1 voltage input, connect the single-phase voltage generator to the test terminal box using the plug provided, in accordance with the diagram below:
DE52246
7
222
2. Turn on the generator. 3. Apply the VT secondary rated phase-to-neutral voltage (Uns/3). 4. Use the SFT2841 software to check that the phase-to-neutral voltage V1 is equal to the VT primary rated phase-to-neutral voltage (Unp/3). 5. If the residual voltage is calculated by taking the sum of the 3 voltages, use the SFT2841 software to check that the residual voltage value is approximately equal to the VT primary rated phase-to-neutral voltage (Unp/3). 6. Turn off the generator. 7. Proceed in the same way for the other 2 phase voltage inputs. 8. At the end of the test, put the cover back on the test terminal box.
CRED301005EN
Commissioning
Checking the residual voltage input connection
Description
Check to be carried out for Sepam B21 or B22, when the residual voltage is measured by 3 VTs on the secondary circuits connected in an open delta arrangement.
Procedure
1. Connect the single-phase voltage generator to the test terminal box using the plug provided, in accordance with the diagram below:
DE52247
PCRED301005EN
7
2. Turn on the generator. 3. Apply the VT secondary rated phase-to-neutral voltage (Uns/3). 4. Use the SFT2841 software to check the residual voltage value V0. 5. V0 should be equal to the VT primary rated phase-to-neutral voltage (Unp/3 or Vnp) if the VTs deliver Uns/3 to the secondary circuit. 6. V0 should be equal to the VT primary rated phase-to-phase voltage (Unp or 3Vnp) if the VTs deliver Uns/3 to the secondary circuit. 7. Turn off the generator. 8. Put the cover back on the test terminal box.
223
MT10588
Commissioning
Checking logic input and output connections
SFT2841 "Input, output, indicator status" screen. SFT2841 "Sepam Diagnosis - output relay test" screen.
Checking logic input connections
Procedure
Proceed as follows for each input: 1. If the input supply voltage is present, use an electric cord to short-circuit the contact that delivers logic data to the input. 2. If the input supply voltage is not present, apply a voltage supplied by the DC voltage generator to the terminal of the contact linked to the chosen input, being sure to comply with the suitable polarity and level. 3. Observe the change of status of the input using the SFT2841 software, in the "Input, output, indicator status" screen. 4. At the end of the test, if necessary, press the SFT2841 Reset key to clear all messages and deactivate all outputs.
Checking logic output connections
Procedure
Check carried out using the "Output relay test" function, activated via the SFT2841 software, in the "Sepam Diagnosis" screen. Only output O4, when used for the watchdog, can be tested. This function requires prior entry of the "Parameter setting" password. 1. Activate each output relay using the buttons in the SFT2841 software. 2. The activated output relay changes status over a period of 5 seconds. 3. Observe the change of status of the output relay through the operation of the related switchgear (if it is ready to operate and is powered), or connect a voltmeter to the terminals of the output contact (the voltage cancels itself out when the contact closes). 4. At the end of the test, if necessary, press the SFT2841 Reset key to clear all messages and deactivate all outputs.
MT10589
7
224
CRED301005EN
Commissioning
Validation of the complete protection chain
Principle
The complete protection chain is validated during the simulation of a fault that causes tripping of the breaking device by Sepam.
Procedure
1. Select one of the protection functions that trips the breaking device. 2. According to the type of Sepam, inject a fault current or voltage. 3. Observe the tripping of the breaking device.
PCRED301005EN
7
225
Commissioning
Checking optional module connections
Checking temperature sensor input connections to the MET148-2 module
The temperature monitoring function provided by Sepam T20, T23, T24 or M20 units checks the connection of each sensor that is configured. An "RTD FAULT" alarm is generated whenever one of the sensors is detected as being short-circuited or disconnected (absent). To identify the faulty sensor or sensors: 1. Display the temperature values measured by Sepam T20 or M20 using the SFT2841 software. 2. Check the consistency of the temperatures measured: b The temperature displayed is "****" if the sensor is short-circuited (T < -35°C or T < -31°F) b The temperature displayed is "-****" if the sensor is disconnected (T > 205°C or T > 401°F).
Checking the analog output connection to the MSA141 module
1. Identify the measurement associated by parameter setting with the analog output using the SFT2841 software. 2. Simulate, if necessary, the measurement linked to the analog output by injection. 3. Check the consistency between the value measured by Sepam and the indication given by the device connected to the analog output.
7
226
CRED301005EN
Commissioning
Test sheet Sepam series 20
Project:................................................................. Type of Sepam
Switchboard: ....................................................... Serial number
Cubicle: ................................................................ Software version
V
Overall checks
Check the box v when the check has been made and is conclusive
Type of check
Preliminary general examination, prior to energizing
v
Energizing
v
Parameter and protection settings
v
Logic input connection
v
Logic output connection
v
Validation of the complete protection chain
v
Analog output connection to the MSA141 module
v
Temperature sensor input connection to the MET148-2 module (for type T20, T23, T24 or M20)
v
Checking of Sepam S20, S24, T20, T24 or M20 current inputs
Type of check
Test performed
Result
Phase current input connection
Secondary injection of CT rated current,
CT rated primary current
i.e. 1 A or 5 A
Display
I1 =.................... v
I2 =....................
I3 =....................
Residual current value obtained by 3 phase CTs
Secondary injection of CT rated current,
CT rated primary current
I0 =.................... v
i.e. 1 A or 5 A
Residual current input connection to a specific
Injection of 5 A into primary Injected current value circuit of core balance CT or
I0 =.................... v
sensor:
CT
b CSH120, CSH200, CSH300 b Other core balance CT + ACE990
b 1 x 1 A or 5 A CT
Checking of Sepam B21 or B22 voltage inputs
Type of check
Test performed
Result
Display
7
Phase voltage input connection
Secondary injection of VT rated phase-to-neutral voltage Uns/3
VT primary rated
phase-to-neutral voltage Unp/3 V1 = ................... v
V2 = ..................
Residual voltage value obtained by 3 phase VTs
Residual voltage input connection
Secondary injection of VT
rated phase-to-neutral voltage Uns/3 Secondary injection of voltage Uns/3
V3 = .................. VT primary rated
phase-to-neutral voltage Unp/3 V0 = .................. v
Residual voltage = Unp/3 (if Uns/3 VT) = Unp (if Uns/3 VT)
V0 = .................. v
Tests performed on: ...................................................................... Signatures By: ...................................................................................................
Comments: ......................................................................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................................................................
PCRED301005EN
227
Commissioning
Maintenance
Sepam has a large number of self-tests that are carried out in the base unit and in additional modules. The purpose of the self-tests is: b To detect failures that can lead to nuisance tripping or the failure to trip when a fault occurs b To put Sepam in the fail-safe position to avoid user errors b To notify the operator that a maintenance operation is required. The "Sepam Diagnosis" screen of the SFT2841 software provides access to data on the status of the base unit and optional modules.
Shutdown of the base unit in fail-safe position
The base unit goes into the fail-safe position in the following conditions: b Detection of an internal failure by the self-tests b Sensor interface connector missing (CCA630, CCA634, CCA670 or CCT640 according to the type of application) b No connection of one of the 3 LPCT sensors to the CCA670 (connectors L1, L2, L3) b MES module configured but missing. See "List of self-tests which place Sepam in the fail-safe position" page 95.
The fail-safe position is conveyed by:
b ON LED on
b
LED on the base unit steadily on
b O4 "watchdog" relay in fault position
b Output relays dropped out
b All protection units inhibited
b Display showing fault message
MT10587
01
b
LED on DSM303 module (remote advanced UMI option) flashing.
SFT2841 "Sepam Diagnosis" screen.
7
Downgraded operation
The base unit is in working order (all the protection functions activated are operational) and indicates that one of the optional modules such as DSM303, MET148-2 or MSA141 is faulty or else that a module is configured but not connected. See "List of self-tests which do not place Sepam in the fail-safe position" page 95.
According to the model, this operating mode is conveyed by:
b Sepam with integrated advanced UMI (UD base):
v ON LED on
v
LED on the base unit flashing, including when the display is out of order (off)
v
LED on the MET or MSA module faulty, steadily on.
The display shows a partial fault message and indicates the type of fault by a code:
v code 1: inter-module link fault
v code 3: MET module unavailable
v code 4: MSA module unavailable.
b Sepam with remote advanced UMI, UX base + DSM303:
v ON LED on
v
LED on the base unit flashing
v
LED on the MET or MSA module faulty, steadily on
v the display indicates the type of fault by a code (same as above).
Special case of faulty DSM303:
v ON LED on
v
LED on the base unit flashing
v
LED on DSM303 steadily on
v display off.
This Sepam operating mode is also transmitted via the communication link.
NOTICE
HAZARD OF DAMAGE TO SEPAM b Do not open the Sepam base unit. b Do not attempt to repair any components in the Sepam range, either in the base unit or an accessory.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
RTD fault
Each temperature monitoring function, when activated, detects whether the temperature sensor associated with the MET148-2 module is short-circuited or disconnected. When this is the case, the alarm message "RTD FAULT" is generated. Since this alarm is common to all 8 functions, the identification of the faulty sensor or sensors is obtained by looking up the measured values: b Measurement displayed "****" if the sensor is short-circuited (T < -35°C or T < -31°F) b Measurement displayed "-****" if the sensor is disconnected (T > +205°C or T > +401°F).
Replacement and repair
When Sepam or a module is considered to be faulty, have it replaced by a new product or module, since the components cannot be repaired.
228
CRED301005EN
DE80236
Commissioning
Maintenance
About SFT2841
Please use SFT2841
10.0
SFT2841 compatible version screen.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, ELECTRIC ARC OR BURNS b Only qualified personnel should maintain this equipment. Such work should be performed only after reading this entire set of instructions. b NEVER work alone. b Obey all existing safety instructions when commissioning and maintaining high-voltage equipment. b Beware of potential hazards and wear personal protective equipment. Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
Compatibility of Sepam version/SFT2841 version
The About SFT2841 screen indicates the minimum version of SFT2841 that is compatible with the Sepam being used. To display this screen on the Sepam UMI, press the key several times to bring up the SFT2841 compatible version screen. Check that the SFT2841 software version used is higher than or the same as that indicated on the Sepam screen. If the SFT2841 software version is lower than the minimum version compatible with the Sepam being used, the SFT2841 software cannot be connected to Sepam and the SFT2841 software displays the following error message: SFT2841 software version incompatible with the connected device.
Preventive maintenance
General The logic inputs and outputs and the analog inputs are the parts of Sepam least covered by the self-tests. (See "List of self-tests which place Sepam in the fail-safe position" page 95). They should be tested during a maintenance operation. The recommended interval between preventive maintenance operations is 5 years (1).
Maintenance tests To perform maintenance on Sepam, see section "Commissioning: principles and method" page 215. Carry out all the recommended commissioning tests according to the type of Sepam to be tested. First test all the logic inputs and outputs involved in tripping the circuit breaker. A test of the complete chain including the circuit breaker is also recommended.
(1) For more details about the maintenance period, see "Precautions" page 137.
7
PCRED301005EN
229
Commissioning
Firmware modifications
Firmware evolutions
The table below describes the firmware version history of the Sepam base. Only the
main fimware versions are described here. The following information is provided for each firmware version: b release date, b compatible base version(s), b serial number range of compatible Sepam bases, b new features added to the Sepam base.
The base version represents the hardware version of the Sepam base.
Firmware Firmware version version
release date
Compatible Base
base
serial
number
New features
V9947
October 1999
Base 1
9948001 to First version 9951000
V9951 V0015 V0040
V0247
V0322 V0444
V0526 V0608 V0621 V0709
December 1999 April 2000 November 2000
November 2002
July 2003 January 2005
July 2005 N/A (1) June 2006 June 2007
Base 1
9951001 to Possibility to inhibit disturbance recording
0015000
Base 1
0015001 to b New applications added: M20 (motor), T20 (transformer), B20 (busbar) 0044017 b The display language of the Sepam is fully customizable.
Base 1
0044018 to 0247152
b New applications added: B21and B22 (busbar) b Possibility to reset alarms from the front panel b The minimum threshold for the protection functions ANSI 50 and ANSI 51 can be set to 0.1 In
instead of 0.3 In as in previous version.
Base 1, Base 2 0247153 to b The minimum displayed RMS value has been decreased from 8 % to 2 %. Accuracy
0331000
characteristics remain unchanged in the range 0.1 to 1.5 In. b For the application T20 or M20 equipped with MET148 or MET148-2, the message "sensor
faulty" caused by a power supply switch-off is cleared automatically when the supply power
returns.
Base 1, Base 2 0331001 to b ANSI 66 protection (starts per hour) improvement 0501000 b The identification of the Sepam type and version through Modbus is now possible.
Base 1, Base 2 0501001 to b Time and date can now be set from the advanced UMI or remote advanced UMI of the relay.
0528000
The way procedure is the same as for Sepam series 40. b The phase tripping current Itrip can now be read down to 0.08 In, in order to ensure the correct
recording of this current with minimum setting of 51 protection (0.1 In). The previous minimum
value for Itrip was 0.1 In.
Base 1, Base 2, 0528001 to b Compatibility with the ACE969 communication interface (Modbus, IEC 60870-5-103 or
Base 3
0623000
DNP3.0 protocols) b The time delay of the trip circuit supervision function has been increased from 200 ms to 2 s.
Base 1, Base 2, (1) Base 3
b New applications added: S23 and T23 b It is now possible to measure I2 with 2TCs. Warning: With 2 TCs, I2 can be measured but this
Base 1, Base 2, 0623001 to
Base 3
07230000
value is not taken into account by the protection functions. b Communication Protocol DNP3: It is now possible to set the threshold that starts the event transmission. b Possibility to inhibit the protection function 51N by using the input I23.
Base 1, Base 2, 07230001 to b Optimization of the 49RMS and 48/51LR protections: accuracy of tripping time on 49RMS and
Base 3, Base 4 07370000
locked time before rotor restarts on 48/51LR. b Creation of the TS Info TRIP with linked event. b Alarm clearing on factory setting actions
V0736
September 2007 Base 1, Base 2, 07370001 to Io channel self test optimization on compensated neutral system Base 3, Base 4 09280000
V0838
7 V0938
July 2009 November 2009
Base 1, Base 2, 09280001 to
Base 3, Base 4, 09460000
Base 5
Base 1, Base 2, 09460001 to b 2 new applications (S24,T24) added based on the S23 and T23 applications added with the
Base 3, Base 4, 11400000 Base 5
following functions: v Cold load pick-up I & Io, v H2 restraint functions on ANSI 50/51(cable arcing fault). b The following functions have been added on the B21 and B22 applications: v Under voltage function (ANSI 27/27S) setting point, v Positive sequence under voltage function (ANSI 27D) setting point, v Rated secondary voltage Uns setting point. b The following functions have been added on all applications: v H2 restraint function on ANSI 50/51(cable arcing fault, except B21 and B22 applications), v New H2 function on ANSI 50N/51N (except B21 and B22 applications), v Monitoring Modbus communication.
V1114
October 2011
Base 1, Base 2, 11400001 Base 3, Base 4, until now Base 5
Correction of 2 minor problems
(1) Revision not released in mass production, only for site upgrade purpose.
230
CRED301005EN
Commissioning
Firmware modifications
General upward compatibility
The following table presents the compatibility of a firmware version range with the
different hardware bases.
Hardware evolutions
Firmware version Base 1
V9947 to V0215
v
Base 2
-
Base 3 (1) Base 4 (1) Base 5 (1)
-
-
-
V0241 to V0444
v
v
-
-
-
V0510
v
v
v
-
-
V0526 to V0621
v
v
v
-
-
V0709 to V0827
v
v
v
v
-
V0838
v
v
v
v
v
V0938 to V1114
b
b
b
b
b
b Compatible with all features v Compatible but with limited features - Not compatible (1) The backup of the date and time on power-off is only available since the serial number 0528001.
PCRED301005EN
7
231
Notes
7
232
CRED301005EN
Schneider Electric Industries SAS
35, rue Joseph Monier CS 30323 F - 92506 Rueil-Malmaison Cedex RCS Nanterre 954 503 439 Share capital 896 313 776 www.schneider-electric.com
PCRED301005EN/12
As standards, specifications and designs change from time to time, please ask for confirmation of the information given in this publication.
Printed on recycled paper.
Production: Schneider Electric Publication: Schneider Electric Printed:
01/2021
ART.08552 © 2021 Schneider Electric - All rights reserved
Acrobat Distiller 9.4.5 (Windows)